Navigation

  • Page 1

    CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)B-63523EN-1/03FANUC Series 16*/160*/160*s-MODEL BFANUC Series 18*/180*/180*s-MODEL BFANUC Series 21*/210*/210*s-MODEL BFANUC Series 20*-MODEL B

  • Page 2

    • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manua...

  • Page 3

    B–63523EN–1/03DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEs–1DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEThis manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Als...

  • Page 4

  • Page 5

    B–63523EN–1/03PREFACEp–1PREFACEThis manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machinetool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items areexplained for each function.1. GeneralDescribes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual asrequied.2. Sig...

  • Page 6

    PREFACEB–63523EN–1/03p–2The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :Model nameAbbreviationFANUC Series 16i–TB16i–TBSeries 16iFANUC Series 16i–MB16i–MBSeries 16iFANUC Series 160i–TB160i–TBSeries 160iFANUC Series 160i–MB160i–MBSeries 160iFANUC Series 160is...

  • Page 7

    B–63523EN–1/03PREFACEp–3NOTE1 Some functions described in this manual may not be appliedto some products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual(B–63522EN).2 The specifications of each function of the F series are thesame as for the M series.For the F series, read the description ...

  • Page 8

    PREFACEB–63523EN–1/03p–4One address accommodates eight signals.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0OPF000SASTLSPLRWDSymbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)AddressIn an item where both T series and M series are described, some signalsare covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shownbelow. This...

  • Page 9

    B–63523EN–1/03PREFACEp–5#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)Data No.0000SEQINIISOTVC1023Servo axis number of a specific axisDataData No.NOTEIn an item where both T series and M series are described,parameters having different meanings between the T seriesand M series and p...

  • Page 10

    PREFACEB–63523EN–1/03p–6The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i, Series 18i,Series 21i, Series 160i, Series 180i, Series 210i, Series 160is, Series180is, Series 210is–MODEL B. This manual is indicated by anasterisk(*).Related manuals of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210...

  • Page 11

    B–63523EN–1/03PREFACEp–7Manual nameSpecificationnumberProfibus–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUALB–62924ENEthernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUALB–63354ENFAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUALB–63644ENDeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUALB–63404ENPC function...

  • Page 12

    PREFACEB–63523EN–1/03p–8The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTORαis/αi/βis seriesManual nameSpecificationnumberFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi seriesDESCRIPTIONSB–65262ENFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis seriesDESCRIPTIONSB–65302ENFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis seriesPA...

  • Page 13

    B–63523EN–1/03PREFACEp–9The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR a seriesManual nameSpecificationnumberFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a series DESCRIPTIONSB–65142FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUALB–65150FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series DESCRIPTIONSB–65152FANUC AC ...

  • Page 14

  • Page 15

    Table of ContentsB–63523EN–1/03c–1DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEs–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREFACEp–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. AXIS ...

  • Page 16

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–21.9.3Composite Control184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.4Superimposed Control187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 17

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–33.4.2Tool Axis Perpendicular Direction Handle Feed Function486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6HANDLE–SYNCHRONOUS FEED5...

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–46.5SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING689. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6HELICAL INTERPOLATION696. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 19

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–57.1.16AI Contour Control/AI Nano Contour Control (M series)856. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.17AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series)895. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.18AI Hig...

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–69.11RIGID TAPPING1126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11.1General1126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 21

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–710.4.5Tool Center Point Control (M series)1306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. PROGRAM COMMAND1321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11...

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–812.1.16Multi–language Display1563. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.17Remote Diagnosis1564. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 23

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–914.4.1Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series)1758. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.2Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series)1760. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.3...

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–1017.3.3Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function1910. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time1910. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.3.2 FTP file tran...

  • Page 25

    TABLE OF CONTENTSB–63523EN–1/03c–1118.1.1Outline1984. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2Trouble Diagnosis Guidance Screen1986. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 26

  • Page 27

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL11 AXIS CONTROL

  • Page 28

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2ItemM seriesT seriesNo. of basiccontrolled axes1–path3 axes2 axescontrolled axes2–path3 axes per path2 axes per pathControlled axesexpansion(total)1–pathMax. 8 axes(Including the Cs axis)Max. 8 axes(Including the Cs axis)(total)2–pathMax. 8 axes per path(...

  • Page 29

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3ItemM seriesT seriesNo. of basiccontrolled axes1–path3 axes2 axesControlled axesexpansion(total)1–pathMax. 5 axes(Including the Cs axis)Max. 5 axes(Including the Cs axis)Basicsimultaneouslycontrolled axes1–path2 axes2 axesSimultaneouslycontrolled axesexpans...

  • Page 30

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL4NumberMessageDescription015TOO MANY AXES COM-MANDED(M series)The number of the commanded axesexceeded that of simultaneously con-trolled axes. Correct the program.TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED(T series)An attempt was made to move the ma-chine along the axes, but the n...

  • Page 31

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL5Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by thePMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B,C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020).The names of the basic axes, however, are fixed (X, Y, and Z for the Mseries and X an...

  • Page 32

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL6NOTE1 With the T series, when G code system A is used, neitherU, V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G codesystem B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axisnames.2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more then oneaxis.3 When the secondary au...

  • Page 33

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL7Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.2.2NAMES OF AXESOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.2.2NAMES OF AXESSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)II.2.2NAMES OF AXE...

  • Page 34

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL8Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system IS–CLeast input incrementLeast command incrementMetricsystemmminput0.0001mm(Diameter)0.00005mmsystemmachineinput0.0001mm(Radius)0.0001mmmachine0.0001deg0.0001deginchinput0.00001inch(Diameter)0.00005mminput0.00001inch(Radius)0.00...

  • Page 35

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL9#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IPR1004IPRISCISCISANOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] BitISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set.ISCISALeast input increment andleast co...

  • Page 36

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL10#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006DIAxNOTEWhen this parameter is changed, turn off the power beforecontinuing operation.[Data type] Bit axisDIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount oftravel on each axis.0 : Radius1 : DiameterSeries16i/18i/1...

  • Page 37

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL11Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linearaxis or rotation axis. Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter 1006 can be used to selectthe rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of theparameters for details of types A and B.W...

  • Page 38

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL12#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006ROSxROTxNOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Bit axisROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis.ROSxROTxMeaning00Linear axis(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.(2) A...

  • Page 39

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL13NOTEROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (forwhich ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.1 : Specified by the sign of comma...

  • Page 40

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL14[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataStandard valueUnitIS–A0.0136000degIS–B0.001360000degIS–C0.00013600000deg[Valid data range] 1000 to 9999999Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis.NOTE1 Rotary axis roll–over fun...

  • Page 41

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL15These signals release the specified control axes from control by the CNC.When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), thesesignals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted.The signals can also be used for switching the C ax...

  • Page 42

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL16[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals notify the PMC that the corresponding axes have beenreleased from control.These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of thesignal name shows the control axis number.1 ..... The 1st...

  • Page 43

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL17MCCx When an axis is released from control, control for the MCC signal for thecorresponding servo amplifier is0 : Disabled1 : EnabledNOTEIf the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2–axis orother multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from controlcauses ...

  • Page 44

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL18The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC.[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving.The signals are provided for each control axis, and the number in thesignal name corresponds to the control axi...

  • Page 45

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL19[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal namecorresponds to the control axis number.1 ..... The moving direction of the 1st axis...

  • Page 46

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL20CAUTIONAxis moving signals and axis moving direction signals areoutput in both automatic and manual operations.Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or byparameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions arereversed during ...

  • Page 47

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL211 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis.2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis.3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis. :: ::MI 1The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:a) During offset cancel;b) When the CNC is...

  • Page 48

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL22#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00012MIRxThe following parameter can be set at “Setting screen.”[Data type] Bit axisMIRx Mirror image for each axis0 : Mirror image is off.1 : Mirror image is on.WARNING1 When programmable mirror image (M series) and ordinarymirror image are s...

  • Page 49

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL23When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servois off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine ismoved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changingthe current position of the CNC and reseti...

  • Page 50

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL24#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01819FUPx[Data type] Bit axisFUPx To perform follow–up when the servo is off for each axis.0 : The follow–up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow–up isperformed or not.When *FLWU is 0, follow–up is performed.When *FLWU is 1, follow–u...

  • Page 51

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL25Place the controlled axes in the servo off state, stop the current to the servomotor, which disables position control. However, the position detectionfeature functions continuously, so the current position is not lost.These signals are used to prevent the servo...

  • Page 52

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL26CAUTION1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo offsignal for that axis is 1.2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor isturned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using theauxiliary function. Set the timing for the aux...

  • Page 53

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL27Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machinecoordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges.[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates that the machine coordinates along the controlled axes specifiedby parameters (...

  • Page 54

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL28#76901#6#5#4#3PSF#2PCM#1EPS#0IGP[Data type] BitIGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position switchsignals are:0 : Output1 : Not outputEPS The number of position switches is:0 : Up to 10.1 : Up to 16.PCM Position switch signals are output:0...

  • Page 55

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL296910Axis corresponding to the first position switch6911Axis corresponding to the second position switch6912Axis corresponding to the third position switch6913Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch6914Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch6915A...

  • Page 56

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL306930Maximum operation range of the first position switch6931Maximum operation range of the second position switch6932Maximum operation range of the third position switch6933Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch6934Maximum operation range of the f...

  • Page 57

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL316950Minimum operation range of the first position switch6951Minimum operation range of the second position switch6952Minimum operation range of the third position switch6953Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch6954Minimum operation range of the f...

  • Page 58

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL32The high–speed position switch function obtains the current positionalong an arbitrary controlled axis from the machine coordinate values anda feedback signal from the position detector, and outputs a signal if thecurrent position is within a certain range. B...

  • Page 59

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL33#7HPS08Yxx#6HPS07#5HPS06#4HPS05#3HPS04#2HPS03#1HPS02#0HPS01HPS16Yxx+1HPS15HPS14HPS13HPS12HPS11HPS10HPS09#76901#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IGP[Data type] BitIGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position switchsignals are:0 : Output1 : Not outputNOTEThis p...

  • Page 60

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL348565High–speed position switch output address 1[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 1 to 126This parameter specifies the address of a Y signal used to notify that theaxis corresponding to each high–speed position switch is within a rangespecified by a paramete...

  • Page 61

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL358570Axis corresponding to the first high–speed position switch8571Axis corresponding to the second high–speed position switch8572Axis corresponding to the third high–speed position switch8573Axis corresponding to the fourth high–speed position switch8574...

  • Page 62

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL368580Maximum value of the operation range of the first high–speed positionswitch or position where the first high–speed position switch is turned on8581Maximum value of the operation range of the second high–speed positionswitch or position where the second...

  • Page 63

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL37[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999These parameters set the maximum operating range for each high–speedposition switch. Specifying ”maximum value < minimum value”disables the high–speed position switch from working because there is novalid ope...

  • Page 64

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3812245Minimum value of the operation range of the fifteenth high–speed positionswitch or position where the fifteenth high–speed position switch is turned on12246Minimum value of the operation range of the sixteenth high–speed positionswitch or position whe...

  • Page 65

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL39This function monitors machine coordinate values and the direction ofoperations related to arbitrary controlled axes and turns on or off theoutput of the high–speed position switch signal. Two machine coordinatevalues can be monitored. If a position specifie...

  • Page 66

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL40The following figure illustrates the above description. (a)P1P2 (b)a c gb d feCurrent position PTimeTimeCurrentpositionOutput signalÀÁÂÃÄÅÀÄ(*1) This setting specifies that, when the current positio...

  • Page 67

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL415. If the current position starts at point e, passes across border P2, andreaches point f, the high–speed position switch becomes OFF becausethe passing direction is the same as defined (*2).6. Even if the current position starts at point f, passes across bord...

  • Page 68

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL42NOTE1 The direction–sensitive high–speed position switchbecomes ON at point A and OFF at point B.2 The position switch does not change its state when point Aor B is passed through in the direction opposite to theeffective direction.3 Specifying a nonexistent...

  • Page 69

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL43#7HE88504#6HE7#5HE6#4HE5#3HE4#2HE3#1HE2#0HE1#7HEG8505#6HEF#5HEE#4HED#3HEC#2HEB#1HEA#0HE9[Data type] BitHE1 to HEG The corresponding high–speed position switch is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled. (A disabled high–speed position switch always outputs 0.)NOTEThe two...

  • Page 70

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL44#7HB88516#6HB7#5HB6#4HB5#3HB4#2HB3#1HB2#0HB1#7HBG8517#6HBF#5HBE#4HBD#3HBC#2HBB#1HBA#0HB9[Data type] BitHB1 to HBG The signal is turned off when the corresponding high–speed positionswitch passes through the machine coordinate position set in parameterNo. 8590 ...

  • Page 71

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL45WARNING1 Be sure not to use any Y signal already used in the PMCladder with this function. If used, the machine may behavein an unexpected manner.2 If you want to use high–speed position switches for multiplepaths, use a different Y signal output address for ...

  • Page 72

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL4612203Axis corresponding to the thirteenth high–speed position switch12204Axis corresponding to the fourteenh high–speed position switch12205Axis corresponding to the fifteenth high–speed position switch12206Axis corresponding to the sixteenth high–speed ...

  • Page 73

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL47[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMetric machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inchRotation axis0.0010.0001deg[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999These parameters specify the machine coordinates where eachhigh–speed position swit...

  • Page 74

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL4812244Position where the fourteenth high–speed position switch is turned on12245Position where the fifteenth high–speed position switch is turned on12246Position where the sixteenth high–speed position switch is turned on[Data type] 2–wordIncrement system...

  • Page 75

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL49If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis canbe compensated in detection units per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at theintervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is t...

  • Page 76

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL50·Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis):Parameter 36241Set the following parameters:⋅Pitch error compensation position at the reference position (foreach axis): Parameter 3620⋅Pitch error compensation position having the smalles...

  • Page 77

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL51To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positivedirection or the negative direction relative to the compensation positionNo. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the specifiedrange on either the positive direction or ...

  • Page 78

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL52The correspondence between the machine coordinate and thecompensation position No. is as follows:333940414256–400 –350 –100–50050100750800Machine coordinate (mm)Compensation position number.Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by ...

  • Page 79

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL53⋅Amount of movement per rotation: 360°⋅ Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45°⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position inthe negative dir...

  • Page 80

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL54The following is an example of compensation amounts.(deg)060 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68+1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1NoCompensationvalue61 62 63 64 65 66 6768(60)–1–2–3–4+1+2+3+4Pitch error compensation value(absolute value)Reference position4590 135 18...

  • Page 81

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL553622Number of the pitch error compensation position at extreme positiveposition for each axisNOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Number[Valid data range] 0 to ...

  • Page 82

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL56[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999The pitch error compensation positions are equally spaced to parameterNo. 3624. Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis.The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions islimited and obtained fro...

  • Page 83

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL57WARNING1 Compensation value rangeCompensation values can be set within the range from –7x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 xcompensation magnification (detection unit). Thecompensation magnification can be set for each axis withinthe range fr...

  • Page 84

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL58Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.8.6.3Inputting pitch error compensa-tion data160is/180is(B–63534EN)III.8.6.4Outputting pitch error com-pensation dataIII.11.5.2Displaying and setting pitch errorcompen...

  • Page 85

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL59Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set acompensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to"9999 pulses for each axis.More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlashcompensating value depending on ...

  • Page 86

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL60#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800RBK[Data type] BitRBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapidtraverse0 : Not performed1 : Performed1851Backlash compensating value for each axis[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] ...

  • Page 87

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL61For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness betweenaxes may affect the machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axismoves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improvestraightness. This improvement results in better machin...

  • Page 88

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL62Imagine a table whose Y–axis ball screw is placed on its X–axis ballscrew. If the X–axis ball screw is inclined at a certain angle because of,for example, bending, the machining precision related to the Y–axisbecomes low because its ball screw is affect...

  • Page 89

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL635721Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 15722Axis number of compensation axis 2 for moving axis 25723Axis number of compensation axis 3 for moving axis 3[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)[Valid data...

  • Page 90

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL645761Compensation corresponding to compensation position number a of moving axis 15762Compensation corresponding to compensation position number b of moving axis 15763Compensation corresponding to compensation position number c of moving axis 15764Compensation co...

  • Page 91

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL65NOTE1 The straightness compensation function can be used aftera moving axis and its compensation axis have returned tothe reference position.2 After setting parameters for straightness compensation, besure to turn off the NC power.3 Set parameters for straightne...

  • Page 92

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL66Three approximate straight lines are formed with fourparameter–specified compensation points and compensation amountsrelated to the respective compensation points. Gradient compensation iscarried out along these approximate straight lines at pitch errorcompen...

  • Page 93

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL675861Compensation point number a for each axis5862Compensation point number b for each axis5863Compensation point number c for each axis5864Compensation point number d for each axis[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Number[Valid data range] 0 to 1023These parame...

  • Page 94

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL68NOTE1 Gradient compensation is enabled after the referenceposition is established on the compensation axis.2 When the parameters No.5861 – No.5864 (compensationpoint number a – d for each axis) are set, turn the NC off thenback on.When the parameters No.5871...

  • Page 95

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL691. Setting parametersSet the following parameters for each axis.Table 1.3.5 (a)Data numberDescription3605#0Bidirectional pitch error compensation, 1: Enabled / 0: Disabled3620Number of the pitch error compensation point of the refer-ence position3621Number of th...

  • Page 96

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL70If the direction of a manual reference position return is positive on an axis(linear axis) having the pitch error amounts shown in the figure below(Fig. 1.3.5 (b)), set the data given in the table below (Table 1.3.5 (b)).–40.0–30.0–20.0 –10.00.0 10.020.0...

  • Page 97

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL71Table 1.3.5 (d)DatanumberSettingDescription3605#01Bidirectional pitch error compensation, 1: Enabled / 0: Disabled362023Number of the pitch error compensation point for thereference position362120Number of the most distant pitch error compensationpoint on the ...

  • Page 98

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL72If, in the setting example given in the previous section, the machinemoves0.0 to 40.0, 40.0 to –40.0, and–40.0 to 0.0for a manual reference position return, pitch error compensation pulsesare output as follows:Machinecoordinate0.05.015.025.035.040.0Compensa-...

  • Page 99

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL73All the compensation data can be displayed and set on the conventionalscreen for the pitch error compensation data.And those data can be input and output by the following methods.* Input by MDI* Input by G10* Input and output by input/output device interface* In...

  • Page 100

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL743621Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position foreach axis (In case of positive–direction movement)[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Number[Valid data range] 0 to 1023, 3000 to 4023Set the number of the pitch error compen...

  • Page 101

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL753624Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis[Data type] 2–word axisIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric machine0.010.0010.0001mmInch machine0.0010.00010.00001inchRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999Th...

  • Page 102

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL763626Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position foreach axis (In case of negative–direction movement)[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Number[Valid data range] 0 to 1023, 3000 to 4023When using bidirectional pitch error com...

  • Page 103

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL77(5) When this function is used for a rotation axis, the sum of the pitch errorcompensation amounts per rotation about the rotation axis must be 0for both the positive and negative directions.(6) The function cannot be used with the inclination compensationfuncti...

  • Page 104

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL783621Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position foreach axis (In case of positive–direction movement)NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data...

  • Page 105

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL79[Valid data range] 0 to 2559, 3000 to 5559When using bidirectional pitch error compensation, set the number of thepitch error compensation position at the extremely negative position foreach axis in the case of negative–direction movement.In stored pitch error...

  • Page 106

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL80When interpolation type pitch error compensation is used, the followingparameters are assigned the same values as those in stored pitch errorcompensation.– Number of the pitch error compensation point of the reference positionon each axis (No.3620)– Number o...

  • Page 107

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL81Any of pitch error compensation, straightness compensation, andgradient compensation is applied to each compensation point based on themachine position at parameter–specified compensation intervals intowhich the machine stroke is divided.Both gradient compensa...

  • Page 108

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL82In straightness compensation, similarly to gradient compensation, fourtypical pitch error compensation points (a, b, c, and d) are selected frompitch error compensation points and specified as straightnesscompensation points, and compensation amounts are set up ...

  • Page 109

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL83Up to six combinations of moving axes and compensation axes can beused in the straightness compensation function.012345606162636465606162636465122 123 124 125 126 127abcde....................xyzD Up to 128 compensation points can be set per axis.D The settings (...

  • Page 110

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL84The 128–point straightness compensation data is set by the stored pitcherror compensation data setting screen. On this setting screen, set128–point straightness compensation data above compensation pointnumber 6000.These data can be input and output by the f...

  • Page 111

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL85(2) Two or more compensation axes can be set for a single moving axis.Setting ofmoving axisSetting ofcompensation axisEffective magnificationParameterNoSettingvalueParameterNoSettingvalueEffective magnification5711157212Value set in parameterNo.133915712157223Va...

  • Page 112

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL86Compensation data, which is set using 128–point straightnesscompensation data, is divided into parts in each compensation pointinterval and output.With the 128–point straightness compensation method, the straightnesscompensation amount at each compensation p...

  • Page 113

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL875711Axis number of moving axis 15712Axis number of moving axis 25713Axis number of moving axis 35714Axis number of moving axis 45715Axis number of moving axis 55716Axis number of moving axis 6[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1 – Number of controlled axesSet ...

  • Page 114

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL88[Valid data range] 6000 to 6767Set the number of the straightness compensation point at the extremelynegative point for each moving axis.When the value set in this parameter is out of the data range, an alarm isgenerated and compensation can not be performed.133...

  • Page 115

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL89NumberMessageDescription5046ILLEGAL PARAMETER(ST.COMP)The parameter for straightness compensa-tion is not correct. This alarm occurs in thefollowing case:D Invalid axis number is assigned to movingor compensation axis.D Parameter No.13881–13886 setting isnot c...

  • Page 116

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL90The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following:Digitally controlled AC servo motorMotor feedback with serial pulse coders(1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev (2) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 65,536 pulse...

  • Page 117

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL91#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800CVR[Data type] BitCVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before positioncontrol ready signal PRDY comes ON0 : A servo alarm is generated.1 : A servo alarm is not generated.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01815APCxAPZxOPTxNOTEWhen this parameter...

  • Page 118

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL92[Data type] Bit axisDM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplierSet valueDetection multiplierDM3xDM2xDM1xDetection multiplier0000111100110011010101011/213/225/237/24NOTEWhen the flexible feed gear is used, do not use theseparameters. Set the numerator and denom...

  • Page 119

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL93(2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48Set value = 2 command multiplierValid data range: 2 to 96NOTEWhen command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must bedetermined so that an integer can be set for commandmultiplier.1821Reference counter size for each axis[...

  • Page 120

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL94Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit duringmovement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stoppedimmediately (as in emergency stop).Generally, set the positioni...

  • Page 121

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL95Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery–powered pulsecoder stores the current position. No reference position return is requiredwhen the power to the CNC is restored.[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies that the life of the absolu...

  • Page 122

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL96#7PBATLF172#6PBATZ#5#4#3#2#1#0#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01815APCxNOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.[Data type] Bit axisAPCx Position detector0: Other than absolute position detector1: Absolute position detector ...

  • Page 123

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL97Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high–speedserial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiberoptics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machinetool electrical sections.In a system using the ...

  • Page 124

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL98In an FSSB–based system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect the CNCto servo amplifiers and separate detector interface units. These amplifiersand separate detector interface units are called slaves. The two–axisamplifier consists of two slaves, and th...

  • Page 125

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL99By manual setting 1, some of the following functions and values cannotbe used, as described below. They should be used with automatic settingor manual setting 2.D No separate detector interface unit can be used; hence, no separateposition detectors can be used....

  • Page 126

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL100If the following parameter is set, manual setting 2 can be used for eachparameter axis setting.Bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to1919, 1936, and 1937. Refer to the Parameter Manual for the definit...

  • Page 127

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL101The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axisinformation. This information can also be specified by the operator.1. Press the SYSTEM function key.2. To display [FSSB], press the next menu page key several times.3. Pressing the [FSSB] soft k...

  • Page 128

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL102D AMPamplifier type. . . . The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for“amplifier”, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, ascounted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (firstaxis) or M (second axis) ...

  • Page 129

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL103(2) Axis setting screenThe axis setting screen displays the information shown below:AXIS SETTINGO1000 N00001AXISNAMEAMP M1 M21–DSP CSTNDM1XA1–L000012YA1–M101003ZA2–L000104AA3–L000025BA3–M000006CA4–L00000>_MDI **** *** ***13:11:56[ AMP ][ AXI...

  • Page 130

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL104(3) Amplifier maintenance screenThe amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance informationfor servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages,either of which can be selected by pressing the PAGE or PAGE key.AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCEO1000 N...

  • Page 131

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL105D TESTdate of test performed on an amplifier. . . . . . . . . connected to each axisExample) 010123 = January 23, 2001D MEINTE–No.engineering change number for an amplifier. . connected to each axisOn an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintena...

  • Page 132

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL106The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:D AXIScontrolled axis number. . . For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum numberof controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this range isentered, the warning message FORMAT ERR...

  • Page 133

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL107D TNDMEnter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes fortandem control. These numbers must be consecutive and in therange of between 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the validrange is entered, the message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.When the [...

  • Page 134

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL108#7PM21905#6PM1#5#4#3#2#1#0FSL[Data type] Bit axisFSL Specifies whether to use a fast or slow interface between a servo amplifierand the servo software.0 : Fast type1 : Slow typeThere are two types of servo data transfer interfaces: fast and slow types.They are ...

  • Page 135

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1091910Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)1911Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR)1912Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR)1913Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR)1914Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR)1...

  • Page 136

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL110f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting1021324354616758489401040SlavenumberATRNo.1910to 1919XAYZB(M1)C(M2)(None)(None)Axis1X12Y33Z44A25B56C6Controlledaxis numberProgramaxis name(No. 1020)Servo axisnumber(No. 1023)CNCTwo–axisamplifierSingle–axi...

  • Page 137

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL111f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting when the simpleelectronic gearbox (EGB) function is used(EGB workpiece axis = A–axis; EGB axis = B–axis (parameter No.7771 = 5))1021324455616748839401040XYAZC(M1)(M2)(Dummy)(None)(None)1X12Y23Z54A35B46C6...

  • Page 138

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1121931Connector number for first separate detector interface unit(FSSB setting screen only)1932Connector number for second separate detector interface unit(FSSB setting screen only)[Data type] Byte axis[Valid data range] 0 to the number of connectors in each sepa...

  • Page 139

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL113Example)ControlledaxisConnectornumber forfirst sepa-rate detectorinterfaceunitConnectornumber forsecond sep-arate detec-tor interfaceunitNo.1936No.1937No.1905(#7, #6)X1Not used000,1YNot used2011,0ZNot used1001,0ANot usedNot used000,0B2Not used100,1CNot used3021...

  • Page 140

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL114NumberDescriptionMessage460n AXIS : FSSB DISCON-NECTFSSB communication was interrupted.The most likely causes are:1. The FSSB communication cable isdisconnected or has a broken con-ductor.2. The amplifier power supply wasturned off.3. A low–voltage alarm cond...

  • Page 141

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL115NumberDescriptionMessage5138FSSB : AXIS SETTINGNOT COMPLETEAxis setting has not been performed inautomatic setting mode. Perform axissetting using the FSSB setting screen.5139FSSB : ERRORThe initialization of the servo was notcompleted normally. Probable case...

  • Page 142

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL116CNCAbsolute position detection atpower–on timeSerial pulse coder (absolute position detector)Linear scale (incremental)Ordinary position controlFig. 1.4.4 System using tentative absolute coordinate system setting#71801#6#5#4#3INA#2#1#0[Data type] BitINA Speci...

  • Page 143

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL117APCx Specifies whether to use a absolute position detector, as follows:0 : Not to use.1 : To use.NOTE1 When using tentative absolute coordinate system setting,set both OPTx and APCx to 1.2 After setting any of these parameters, turn the power offthen on again s...

  • Page 144

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL118Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero pointproper to the machine system. A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes theparameter-preset (No. 1240) coordinate value when manual referenceposition return is performed, i...

  • Page 145

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL119[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machinecoordinate system.1722Rapid traverse deceleration rate at inter–rapid traverse block overlap[Data type] Byte axis[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 ...

  • Page 146

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL120Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.7.1MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEMOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.7.1MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEMSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–...

  • Page 147

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL121(4) Method of specifying the workpiece coordinate system counterIf the WKINC parameter (bit 4 of parameter No. 3108) has been set,pressing an axis address and the [INP.C.] soft key on the workpiececoordinate system screen in succession causes the relative coord...

  • Page 148

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL122When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command orthe automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmedworkpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted.Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system...

  • Page 149

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL123ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is setautomatically0 : Value set in parameter No. 1250 is used.1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input ininches, the value set in parameter No. 1251 is used.AW...

  • Page 150

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1241220External workpiece zero point offset value[Data type] Two–word axisInput incrementIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitLinear axis (input in mm)0.010.0010.0001mmLinear axis (input in inches)0.0010.00010.00001inchRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Valid data range] –99999...

  • Page 151

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL125Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)Workpiece zero point offsetOrigin of machine coordinate systemWorkpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)1250Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinatesystem setting is performed[Data type] Two–word ax...

  • Page 152

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL126#73108#6#5#4WCI#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitWCI On the workpiece coordinate system screen, a counter input is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.7.2WORKPIECE COORDINATESYSTEMOPERATOR’...

  • Page 153

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL127The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis fromoverflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx)of parameter 1008 to 1.For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in thecommand. For an absolut...

  • Page 154

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL128#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01008RRLxRABxROAxNOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Bit axisROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is0 : Invalid1 : ValidNOTEROAx specifies the function onl...

  • Page 155

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL129NOTEThis function cannot be used together with the indexingfunction of the index table (M series).Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.20.2ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVEROPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)...

  • Page 156

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL130Suppose that a workpiece has been set on the rotary table, its position hasbeen measured, and the workpiece coordinate system has been set up.Once the rotary table rotates before cutting begins, it has conventionallybecome necessary to measure the workpiece pos...

  • Page 157

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1312) Reference angle for the rotation axis and the corresponding referencefixture offset valueSet up a certain position (reference angle) for the rotation axis and thecorresponding fixture offset value.YFXWCMachine zero pointW: Offset value at the work-piece zero...

  • Page 158

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL132The CLR parameter (bit 6 of parameter No. 3402) and C23 parameter (bit7 of parameter No. 3408) specify whether to cancel the fixture offset whena reset occurs.If CLR = 0 or if CLR = 1 and C23 = 1, the vector is saved before the resetoccurs.If CLR = 1 and C23 = ...

  • Page 159

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL133If block N2 issues G54.2P1, a vector (X = 0, Y = 10.0) for the fixture offsetis calculated. This vector is treated in the same manner as for the offsetvalue at the workpiece zero point, and at this point of time, the currentposition in the workpiece coordinate...

  • Page 160

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL134Program setting and external input/output can be performed as statedbelow:1) Setting a reference fixture offset value, using G10G10L21 Pn IP;n: Fixture offset numberIP: Reference fixture offset value or referenceangle for an individual axisThe command shown abo...

  • Page 161

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1351) Relationships between rotation and linear axes (when A = 0 and B = 0)First set: 5 (B–axis), 1 (X–axis), 3 (Z–axis)First set: 4 (A–axis), 3 (Z–axis), 2 (Y–axis)First set: 0, 0, 0 (Z–axis)2) Reference angle and reference fixture offset valueX:...

  • Page 162

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL136CAUTION1 If parameter Nos. 7580 to 7588 or a reference fixture offsetvalue is changed in the G54.2 mode, the new setting takeseffect after the next G54.2Pn command is issued.2 If changing the fixture offset vector causes movement, thesame mode and movement spee...

  • Page 163

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1377580Specifying rotation axis to which the fixture offset is to be applied (first set)7581Specifying linear axis 1 forming a plane to which the fixture offset is to be applied (first set)7582Specifying linear axis 2 forming a plane to which the fixture offset is...

  • Page 164

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL138#77575#6#5#4#3#2#1#0FAX[Data type] Bit axisFAX Specifies whether to enable the fixture offset for an individual axis.0 : To disable.1 : To enable.NumberMessageDescription5251There is an error in theG54.2 parameter.The fixture offset parameter is in-correct (758...

  • Page 165

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL139A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a movecommand specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement withanother axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signalsent from the machine.In synchronous operation, t...

  • Page 166

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL140WARNING1 Before using the synchronization error check function, setidentical values for the reference positions of the masterand slave axes.2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximumsynchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press thereset key. Ne...

  • Page 167

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL141NOTE1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set theSOF bit, bit 7 of parameter 8301 (if only one master/slaveaxis pair is in sync) or SOFx bit, bit 7 of parameter 8303 (ifmore than one master/slave axis pair is in sync), to 1.2 The synchronization c...

  • Page 168

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL142If the master and slave axes operate independently while simplesynchronous control is applied, the machine may be damaged. To preventthis, the torque command difference between the axes is monitored. If thedifference is found to be abnormal, an alarm can be i...

  • Page 169

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1435 Connect a check board to observe torque differences.If an analog check board is used, set the rotary switch of the checkboard to 1, and observe signals on CH7.If the oscilloscope is a combined analog/digital model, set the DATAdigit for CH1 to 5, and observe ...

  • Page 170

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL144[Classification] Input signal[Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feedmode.The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the endof the signal name represents the number of the controlled axis.1. ... The fi...

  • Page 171

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1451010Number of CNC–controlled axesNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axesSet the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by t...

  • Page 172

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL146Units digit in the parameter for the first axis→ Set the axis number for the master axis when the first axis is usedas a slave axis.Tens digit in the parameter for the first axis→ Set the axis number for the master axis when the second axis is usedas a slav...

  • Page 173

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL147Example: To establish reversed synchronization when using the third axisas the master axis and the fourth axis as the slave axis, set parameter No.8312 as follows:Parameter No. 8312 (first axis) = 0Parameter No. 8312 (second axis) = 0Parameter No. 8312 (third ...

  • Page 174

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL148#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0SOF8301[Data type] BitSOF The synchronization compensation funciton under simple synchronouscontrol (one master/slave axis pair) is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.#78302#6#5#4#3#2#1ATS#0ATENOTEThe system power must be turned off then back on in orderfor ...

  • Page 175

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL149NOTETo start the automatic setting of grid positioning, set ATSxto 1. ATSx automatically becomes 0 upon the completionof automatic setting.SOFx Specify whether to enable synchronization compensation during simplesynchronous control (more than one master/slave ...

  • Page 176

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL150Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the masterand slave axes (one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)8313[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter specifies a limit ...

  • Page 177

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL151[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999This parameter is set to the reference counter difference between themaster and slave axes.NOTEUpon the completion of grid positioning, the referencecounter difference is set automatically. At the same time,parameter A...

  • Page 178

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1528326Reference counter difference between the master and slave axes (more than onemaster/slave axis pair under synchronous control)[Data type] Two–word axis[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999This parameter is automatically s...

  • Page 179

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL153NumberMessageDescription213ILLEGAL COMMAND INSYNCHRO–MODEOne of the following errors occurredduring synchronous operation (simplesynchronous control):(1) The program contains a move commandfor the slave axis.(2) A command for jog feed, manual handlefeed, or i...

  • Page 180

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL154NumberMessageDescription540SYNCHRO ERRORThe data represents the difference inposition error between the master andslave axes during synchronous control.(One master/slave axis pair under syn-chronous control)541SYNCHRO ERRORThe positional difference between them...

  • Page 181

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL155If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table,for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of thisfunction, two motors can be used to perform movement along a singleaxis. Positioning is carried out only for the ...

  • Page 182

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL156SpecifiedpulsePositionloopVelocityloop+--Built–in de-tectorSeparatedetectorScaleAver-age?Re-verse?PRM.1815#1PRM. 2008#2PRM. 2022Speed FBCurrentloopRotor positionServoamplifierPowerlineMasteraxisPRM. 2087Preload (M)+++Slave axisPWMPWM+Re-verse?PRM. 2022+PRM. 2...

  • Page 183

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL157To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedurebelow:(1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes.(2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two separateaxes. In terms of CNC–controlled axes ...

  • Page 184

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL158By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity)feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master andslave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for bothaxes. This function can reduce the effect of ...

  • Page 185

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL159The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connectedonly to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals neednot be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, mayhave to be connected depending on the applicati...

  • Page 186

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL160The classifications of the parameters are described below. Any parameterthat is not listed in the tables for the three classifications should beprocessed as a parameter of type i) and, specify identical values for themaster and slave axes.WARNINGNote that, if ...

  • Page 187

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL161Parameter No.Meaning of parameters0012#00012#71004#71005#41005#51005#710221220122112221223122412251226142314241425142714301815#11815#52008#2Mirror imageServo control offInput unit 10 timesExternal deceleration in plus directionExternal deceleration in minus dir...

  • Page 188

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL162Parameter No.Meaning of parameters1005#01005#11006#01006#11006#31006#51006#7124012411242124312601420142116201621162216231624162516261627182018XX20XXMovement before reference position returnDogless reference position settingRotary axisMachine coordinate of rotar...

  • Page 189

    /(Motor inertia) 256B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1632087Preload of each axis (Tcmd offset)[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] (Preamplifier limit) /7282[Valid data range] –1821 to 1821An offset is added to a torque command to reduce backlash.Set a slightly large value than that of the fri...

  • Page 190

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL164This function enables synchronous control, in which an axis can besynchronized with another axis.An axis can be moved in synchronization with another axis. This is doneby issuing a move command for one axis (synchronous master axis) toanother axis so that both...

  • Page 191

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL165When synchronous control is started for a workpiece coordinate system,it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically.When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system isterminated, it is possible to return the workpiece coordin...

  • Page 192

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL166(2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation(Master axis workpiece coordinate value) = (parameter No. 1250 for the master axis) + (master axis machine coordinate value)S If many slave axes are synchronized with one master axis, the masteraxis is set w...

  • Page 193

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL167[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to synchronouscontrol.[Operation] These signals become “1” under the following condition:S The corresponding axis is under synchronous control.These signals become ...

  • Page 194

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL168#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08162PKUxSMRx[Data type] Bit axisSMRx Synchronous mirror–image control is:0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)PKUx In the parking state,0...

  • Page 195

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL169SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in thecoordinate system in synchronous control are:0 : Identical.1 : Opposite.The value set in this parameter is referenced when the workpiececoordinates of the master axis are set up automatica...

  • Page 196

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL170WARNING1 When synchronous control is started or terminated, thetarget axes must be at a stop.2 All axes subjected to synchronous control must have thesame least command increment, detection unit, anddiameter/radius specification. Otherwise, the amount ofmoveme...

  • Page 197

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL171FunctionDuring synchronous controlAcceleration/deceleration controlThe same type of acceleration/decelera-tion control is performed for the synchro-nous axes, but different time constants areused.Feedrate clampingThe axes are clamped at the feedrate of themaste...

  • Page 198

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL172WARNINGIf a reference position return command is issued for asynchronous master axis during synchronous control, it isexecuted normally for the master axis, but the slave axisdoes not return to their reference position (the slave axisonly moves in synchronizati...

  • Page 199

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL173Synchronous control is terminated not only when the correspondingsynchronization signal becomes off but also when one of the followingconditions occurs.(1) Emergency stop(2) Reset(3) Servo alarm(4) Servo off(5) Overtravel(6) Alarm related to synchronous control...

  • Page 200

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL174The T series CNC has two independent control paths. For example, it canbe used to control two turrets of a multiple–turret lathe independently.The axes (such as X1–and Z1–axes) belonging to path 1 are controlled bycommands in path 1, and the axes (such a...

  • Page 201

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL175(1) Synchronous controlS Synchronization of an axis in one path with an axis in the other path(Example)Synchronization of the Z1–axis with the Z2–axisÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀTurret 1X1WorkpieceZ1Z2 (sy...

  • Page 202

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL176(2) Composite controlS Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those foran axis in the other path.(Example)Interchanging commands between the X1– and X2–axes→ Control both X2– and Z1–axes by commands in a path 1 programControl both X1...

  • Page 203

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL177(3) Superimposed controlS Superimposing move commands for an axis in one path on an axis inthe other path(Example)Superimposing the movement of the Z1–axis on the Z2–axisÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ...

  • Page 204

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL178Parameter No. 8180 specifies which axis is to be synchronized with whichaxis.(Example)To synchronize the Z1–axis with the Z2–axis:Parameter No. 8180z of path 1 = 2To synchronize the Y2–axis with the X1–axis: Parameter No. 8180y of path 2 = 1To synchron...

  • Page 205

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL179(Example 2)Synchronizing the X2– and Z2–axes with the X1– andZ1–axes (balanced cutting)ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀZ1Turret 1X1X2Turret 2Z2(Example 3)Synchronizing the B1–axis (tail stock axis) with th...

  • Page 206

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL180ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀTurret 1X1The X2– and Z1–axes are moved bycommands in a path 2 program (bysynchronizing the Z1–axis with theZ2–axis). At this point, the Z2–axis iskept in a parking state. The coo...

  • Page 207

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL181If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous masteraxis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the masteraxis, but the slave axis does not return to its reference position (the slaveaxis only moves in synchronization with ...

  • Page 208

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL182If synchronous control is terminated during automatic operation, do notissue a move command or coordinate system setting for the synchronousslave axis in the current block and one or two (during tool–nose radiuscompensation) subsequent blocks. This restricti...

  • Page 209

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL183(2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system automaticallywhen terminating synchronous controlSet parameter SPSx (parameter No. 8163) to “1”.Set parameter No. 1250 with the master axis coordinates in theworkpiece coordinate system when the master ...

  • Page 210

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL184NOTE1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one masteraxis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinatesystem that corresponds to the current position of the firstslave axis that is synchronized with the master axis.2 The tool offset is take...

  • Page 211

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL185Suppose that a machine has the X1– and Z1–axes belonging to path 1 andthe X2– and Z2–axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece movesalong the Z1– and Z2–axes as directed by move commands. Thefollowing examples interchange commands between the X...

  • Page 212

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL186The composite control function does not switch the spindle speedcommand or the feed per rotation command based on feedback pulsesfrom the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command andfeedback pulses should be switched using the following signals. (...

  • Page 213

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL187The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of anaxis (superimposed control master axis) in one path to an axis(superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinarymove commands are being executed. This function is similar to...

  • Page 214

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL188Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1–axis) that moves along theaxis is to be cut with a tool in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously.This example superimposes the amount of movement of the Z1–axis onthat of the Z2–axis.Turret 1X1Machining is ...

  • Page 215

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL189These special parameters are used for both master and slave axes duringsuperimposed control. Appropriate values should be specified with theresulting feedrate taken into account. When superimposed control beginsor ends during automatic operation, it is imposs...

  • Page 216

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL190If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parkingstate immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parkingsignal is set to “1” without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored.[Classification] Input signal[Func...

  • Page 217

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL191These signals become “0” under the following condition:S The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, orsuperimposed control.CAUTIONWhether each axis is under synchronous, composite, orsuperimposed control does not always match whether thecor...

  • Page 218

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL192XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the X–axis for the otherpath subject to mixed control are fetched:0 : With the sign as is1 : With the sign invertedZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Z–axis for the other pathsubject to mixed cont...

  • Page 219

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL193SERx The synchronization deviation is:0 : Not detected.1 : Detected.NOTEWhen both master and slave axes move in synchronization,the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes arecompared with each other. If the difference is larger than orequal to the va...

  • Page 220

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL194MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have thecoordinate systems placed:0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axesof paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.)1 : In opposite directions. Mirror–...

  • Page 221

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL195#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08163SCDxSCMxSPSxSPMxMDXx[Data type] Bit axisMDXx In mixed control, the current position (absolute/relative coordinates)display indicates:0 : Coordinates in the local system.1 : Coordinates in the other system under mixed control.SPMx When synchr...

  • Page 222

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL196#78167#6#5#4#3#2#1#0NLS[Data type] Bit axisNLS For an axis under composite control, acceleration/deceleration with aconstant time for linear interpolation type rapid traverse (bit 4 (PRT) ofparameter No. 1603) is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.Example:When composite ...

  • Page 223

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL197(Example 1)Synchronizing the Z2–axis with the Z1–axis Path 1Path 2Parameter No. 8180x 0Parameter No. 8180x 0Parameter No. 8180z 0Parameter No. 8180z 2Parameter No. 8180c 0Parameter No. 8180c 0Parameter No. 8180y 0Parameter No. 8180y 0S Exercising synchronou...

  • Page 224

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL1988183Axis under composite control in path 1 corresponding to an axis of path 2[Data type] Byte axis[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axesThis parameter specifies an axis of path 1 to be placed under compositecontrol with each axis ...

  • Page 225

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL199(Example)Exercising composite control to replace the X1–axis with theX2–axisÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÄÄÄÄÄÄX1m∆Z2mZ1m∆X2mX1Z1Z2∆X1mX2∆Z1mZ2mX2mZero point of theworkpiece coordinate...

  • Page 226

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL200If bit 5 of parameter No. 8162 MPSx is set to 1 when composite control isterminated, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the followingconditions is specified: X1 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 1 + Machine coordinate of X1X2 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 2 ...

  • Page 227

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2018190Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min30 to 24000030 to 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min30 to 9600030...

  • Page 228

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL202If one of the alarms listed below occurs, it terminates synchronous,composite, and superimposed control for all axes.NumberMessageDescription225Synchronous or compositecontrol errorThis alarm occurs under either of thefollowing conditions (detected whensynchron...

  • Page 229

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL203NumberMessageDescription407Servo alarm: ExcessiveerrorA positional deviation for a synchro-nous axis exceeded the specified val-ue. (Only during synchronous control).Servo alarms1.9.8Definition of Warning,Caution, and Note

  • Page 230

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL204WARNING1 When synchronous, composite, or superimposed controlbegins or ends, the target axes must be at a stop.2 All axes subjected to synchronous, composite, orsuperimposed control must have the same least command,detection increment, and diameter/radius speci...

  • Page 231

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL205NOTE1 More than one axis can be subjected to synchronous,composite, or superimposed control. On the other hand, anaxis cannot be synchronized with more than one axissimultaneously. Moreover, an axis under composite controlcannot be synchronized with another a...

  • Page 232

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL206FunctionDuring synchronouscontrolDuring compositecontrolDuring superimposedcontrolAcceleration/decelerationcontrolThe acceleration/decelera-tion control for the masteraxis is performed also for thesynchronous slave axes, butdifferent time constants areused.The ...

  • Page 233

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL207FunctionDuring superimposedcontrolDuring compositecontrolDuring synchronouscontrolInterlockThe signals for the synchro-nous master axis are effec-tive for the synchronousslave axes (*2).Signals originally specifiedfor one path are effective forthe other path (*...

  • Page 234

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL208The following list summarizes how positional information such ascustom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMCwindow are read during synchronous, composite, or superimposedcontrol.Positional informationDuring synchronouscontrolDuring composi...

  • Page 235

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL209Status output signalDuring synchronouscontrolDuring compositecontrolDuring superimposedcontrolAxis moving signal MVnF0102/F1102(See Section 1.2.5.)S The master axis movingsignal becomes ”1” whenthe master or slave axis ismoving.S The slave axis moving sig-n...

  • Page 236

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL210(1) Machine configuration(a) Independent controlÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀTurret 1Turret 2Spindle S2Spindle S1X1X2Z1Z2Path 1 (X1– and Z1–axes)performs machining sepa-rately from path 2 (X2– andZ2–axes).(b) Synchronous control of th...

  • Page 237

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL211S To apply mirror–image synchronization (because initially thepositive direction of one axis is opposite to that of the other axis),set SMRz (bit 0 of parameter No. 8162) of path 2 to “1”.S To detect out–of–synchronization (because both axes should mo...

  • Page 238

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL212In this example, assume that M61 clamps the workpiece and sets signalG1138#1 SYNC2 to “1” and that M62 resets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to“0” and unclamps the workpiece.NOTEIt is necessary to make the speed of spindle S1 equal thatof spindle S2. For example...

  • Page 239

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2131. The path 2 program directs the X2– and Z2–axes, synchronizes theX1–axis with the X2–axis, and causes the X2–axis to park. Thepath 1 program issues no move command.2. Composite control is performed in which move commands areswitched between the X1...

  • Page 240

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL214N2050 T0212 ; Specifies an offset for turret 1.N2060 S1000 M4 ; Reverses the spindle.N2070 G0 X30. Z55. ;N2080 G1 F0. 2 W- 15. ;N2090 ·······N2100 M56 ; Terminates synchronization and parking.N1110 M201 ; N2110 M201 ; Wait...

  • Page 241

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL215ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀReference positionof turret 1150.0mmZ2X2(2) Signal operationS Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control beginsfor the X2– and X1–axes.S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “0” wh...

  • Page 242

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL216N2110 M56 ;Terminates composite control (the position of turret 1 is set up asworkpiece coordinates in path 1.)N1120 M201;N2120 M201 ; Waits for composite control to beterminated.N1130 ; N2130 ; Dummy block (performing no move command)N1140 ··...

  • Page 243

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL217(1) Machine configuration(a) Independent controlÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀX1Turret 1Z2Spindle S2Spindle S1Turret 2X2Z1Workpiece 1 and turret 1are controlled by a path1 program.Workpiece 2 and turret 2are controlled by a path2 p...

  • Page 244

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL218(b) Interpolation between the X1– and Z2–axes and between the X2– andZ1–axesÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀX1Turret 1Z2Spindle S2Spindle S1Turret 2X2Z1Workpiece 1 and turret 2 arecontrolled by a path 1 program.Workpiece 2 and turret 1...

  • Page 245

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL219Reference position for turret 2ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀReference positionfor turret 1Z2180.0mm120.0mm200.0mmX2Z1X1(3) Signal operationS Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control beginsfor the X2– and X1–axes.S Reset...

  • Page 246

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL220N1050 T0313 N2050 T0212 ; Selects a tool forcomposite control and sets the offset.N1060 G50 W120. ;N2060 G50 W120. ;Shifts the Z–axisworkpiece coordinate system.N1070 S1000 M4 ; N2070 S1500 M4 ; N1080 G0 X20. Z15. ;N2080 G0 X15. Z3...

  • Page 247

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL221(1) Machine configuration(a) Independent controlÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀX1Turret 1Z1Path 1 (X1– and Z1–axes)performs machining sepa-rately from path 2 (X2– andZ2–axes).Spindle S1Spindle S2Turret 2X2Z2(b) Superimposed control for the ...

  • Page 248

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL222S Set the feedrate along each Z–axis for superimposed control inparameter Nos. 8190z, 8191z, and 8193 of both paths. Each valueto be set must be about half the one for independent control.S Set the rapid traverse time constant for each Z–axis undersuperimp...

  • Page 249

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL223N1120 ·······N2120 ········Machining under control independent of the other pathWARNINGWhen using constant surface speed control, be carefulabout which path has the spindle command that is effectivefor spindle S1.NOTEThe speed of spindle S1 (fe...

  • Page 250

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2241.Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot be started,but no alarm is issued.(1) The synchronous or composite control option has not beenspecified.⇒ The synchronous and composite control must be specified.(2) The G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128, G113...

  • Page 251

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2252. The P/S225 alarm occurs when a signal for synchronous, composite,or superimposed control is initiated if:(1) An attempt was made to perform synchronous, composite, orsuperimposed control for an axis that was already undersynchronous, composite, or superimpos...

  • Page 252

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL226(2) A move command was issued to an axis under composite controlfor which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter No. 8162) is “1”.⇒ No move command (either automatic or manual) can be issuedto an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx(bit 7 of ...

  • Page 253

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2278. An axis does not move to a specified position after synchronous orcomposite control switching if:(1) A move command was issued within two blocks after synchronousor composite control switching.⇒ The coordinate system in the CNC must be re–set at synchron...

  • Page 254

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL228This function sets an axis (B–axis) independent of the basic controlledaxes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machiningalong the B–axis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlledaxes. The X2 and Z2 axes can be used in ...

  • Page 255

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL229G101–G100 : Starts registering the first program.G102–G100 : Starts registering the second program.G103–G100 : Starts registering the third program.G100: Ends registering of the programs.Three operations (programs) on the B–axis can be registered. (In ...

  • Page 256

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL230Parameter 8251:M code used to start operation of the first programParameter 8252:M code used to start operation of the second programParameter 8253:M code used to start operation of the third programO1234 ; M** ;M30 ;To start an operation, the miscellaneous f...

  • Page 257

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL231One of the following three two–path control modes can be selected:1 B–axis control is executed for either tool post 1 or 2.2 B–axis control is executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2.3 Identical B–axis control is executed for tool posts 1 and 2.The a...

  • Page 258

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL232G80 to G86 (canned drilling cycle)Of the canned drilling cycles supported by the CNC for machiningcenters, those cycles equivalent to G80 to G86 can be executed.Data can be specified in the same way as for the CNC for machiningcenters, except for the following ...

  • Page 259

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL233NOTE1 Range of commands of M, S, and T codes2 An M, S, or T code must not be specified in a blockcontaining another move command. The M, S, and T codesmust not be specified in an identical block.3 Usually, normal NC operation and B–axis operation areindepend...

  • Page 260

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL234Example) :G01 X10. F1000 ;G101 (G102, G103) ;B10. ;G01 B–10. F500 ;G100 ;X–10. ; :Irrespective of the modal information for normal operation (G01specified in block), block specifies G00 if the MDG bit (bit 1 ofparameter 8241) is set to 0, or G01 if ...

  • Page 261

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL235The amount of travel along the B–axis can be specified in either absoluteor incremental mode. In absolute mode, the end point of travel along theB–axis is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel alongthe B–axis is programmed directly.The A...

  • Page 262

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL236Example) :G101 ;G00 B10. ;One block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G04 P1500 ;One block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G81 B20. R50. F600 ;Three blocks. . . . . . . . G28 ;One block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M15 ;One block. . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 263

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL237Absolute or incremental mode0100200300400500600(1)(2)(200)(350)(450)(200)(350)(550)(200)(100)(3)()⋅ Dwell⋅ DwellIncremental mode G101 (G102, G103) ;(1) G01 B200. F100 ;(2) G82 B100. R150. P5000 F200 ;(3) B200. R150. P5000 ;(4) G00 B–100. ;G100 ; :M*...

  • Page 264

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL23801020304050(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(10)(350)(30)(5)(25)(20)(0)ProgramG101 (G102, G103) ;(1) G01 B10. F100 ;(2) T51 ;(3) G00 B20. ;(4) T52 ;(5) B0. ;(6) T50 ;G100 ; :M**; :Example)When parameter 8257 is set to 50 Auxiliary function used to cancel the offset: ...

  • Page 265

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL239#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MST8240ABSSOVTEMREF[Data type] BitREF Reference position return operation by G28:0 : Always uses deceleration dogs in the same way as a manual referenceposition return operation.1 : Uses deceleration dogs when a reference position has not yet be...

  • Page 266

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL240#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08242COF[Data type] BitCOF For tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under two–path control):0 : A separate B–axis offset value is set.1 : A common B–axis offset value is set.8250Axis number used for B–axis control[Data type] Byte[Valid data range...

  • Page 267

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2418251M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation8252M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation8253M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation[Data type] 2–word[Valid data range] 6 to 99999999T...

  • Page 268

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL242NumberMessageContents5030ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100)The end command (G110) was specified before the registration startcommand (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the B–axis.5031ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102,G103)While a registration start command (G101, G102, or...

  • Page 269

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL243Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.11.2.7Displaying the B–axis Opera-tion State160is/180isIII.11.4.15Setting and Displaying B–axisTool CompensationSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63604E...

  • Page 270

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL244When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with theperpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distancetraveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For theordinary angular axis control function, the X–axis is a...

  • Page 271

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL245The angular and perpendicular axes to which angular axis control is to beapplied must be specified beforehand, using parameters (No. 8211 and8212).Parameter AAC (No. 8200#0) enables or disables the angular axis controlfunction. If the function is enabled, the d...

  • Page 272

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL246#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08200AZRAAC[Data type] BitAAC 0 : Does not perform angular axis control.1 : Performs angular axis control.AZR 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manualreference position return along the angular axis under angular axisc...

  • Page 273

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL247NOTE1 For arbitrary angular axis control, if the same axis numberhas been specified in both parameters No. 8211 and 8212,or if a value outside the valid data range has been specifiedfor either parameter, the angular and perpendicular axeswill be as follows:Angu...

  • Page 274

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL248When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be usedto grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, whilethe grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being movedvertically, a contour program can be executed to init...

  • Page 275

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL249Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position,upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be setusing the parameter screen (or the chopping screen).Chopping is started once chopping start signal CHPST has been set to 1...

  • Page 276

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL250Set the following chopping data:D Chopping axis:Parameter No. 8370D Reference point (point R):Parameter No. 8371D Upper dead point:Parameter No. 8372D Lower dead point:parameter No. 8373D Chopping feedrate:Parameter No. 8374D Maximum chopping feedrate: Paramete...

  • Page 277

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL251(2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from theupper dead point to the lower dead pointPrevious upper dead pointNew lower dead pointPrevious lower dead pointThe tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the upperdead point, an...

  • Page 278

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL252When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servodelay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent thetool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unitmeasures the difference between the specified p...

  • Page 279

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL253Servo delay compensation during a chopping operation can graduallyincrease the chopping speed. If the chopping speed is about to exceed themaximum allowable chopping feedrate, it is clamped to the maximumallowable chopping feedrate. In this case, the chopping...

  • Page 280

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL254Permissible error for restarting speed increase [1 mm, 0.1 inch, 1 degree] = parameter No. 8375 [1 mm/min, 0.1 inch/min, 1 degree/min] 1/7500Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used for chopping axis.If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does ...

  • Page 281

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL255If a move command is specified for the chopping axis while chopping isbeing performed, a P/S 5050 alarm is issued.This function does not support the advanced preview control function.When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) andstopping chop...

  • Page 282

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL256[Classification] Input signal[Function] Suspends chopping.[Operation] Once this signal has been set to 0, the tool is moved from the currentposition to point R, thus suspending chopping. Again setting this signalto 1while chopping is suspended causes chopping t...

  • Page 283

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL257[Classification] Input signal[Function] Overrides the chopping feedrate.[Operation] The actual feedrate during chopping becomes the specified feedratemultipled by the override value specified with this signal. The followingtable lists the correspondence between...

  • Page 284

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL258[Classification] Output signal[Function] Posts notification of a chopping cycle being performed between the upperand lower dead pionts.[Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:· Upon a chopping cycle being started between the upper and lower d...

  • Page 285

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL259#78361#6#5#4#3#2#1#0CMX[Data type] BitCMX When the amount of shortage at the lower dead point becomes smallerthan the value set in parameter No. 8378, clamping at the maximumchopping feedrate:0 : Continues.1 : Is not performed.NOTEBecause clamping at the maximu...

  • Page 286

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2608375Maximum chopping feedrate[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMetric machine1 mm/min30 to 24000030 to 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min30 to 9600030 to 48000Rotation axis1 deg/min30 to 240000...

  • Page 287

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL261Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.20.6Chopping function (G80,G81.1)160is/180is(B–63534EN)III.11.4.13Displaying and setting chop-ping dataSeries 20iOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Manual Milling Machine) (B–6...

  • Page 288

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL262Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with therotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob.Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in syncwith the motion of the Z–axis (axial feed axis).SpindleC–ax...

  • Page 289

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL263G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ;T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 5000)L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: 1 to 30 with a sign)S The sign of L specifies the direction of rotation of the C–axis.S If L is positive, the C–axis rotates in th...

  • Page 290

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL264When a helical gear is to be cut, compensation for the C–axis, accordingto the amount of travel along the Z–axis (axial feed) and gear helix angle,is required.Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation pulses,calculated using the followin...

  • Page 291

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2651 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1(a)C : +Z : +P : +Compensationdirection: ++C+Z– Z(b)+C+Z– Z(c)+C+Z– Z(d)+C+Z– ZC : +Z : +P : –Compensationdirection: –C : +Z : –P : +Compensationdirection: –C : +Z : –P : ...

  • Page 292

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL266The servo delay is proportional to the speed of the hob axis. Therefore,in a cycle where rough machining and finish machining are performed atdifferent hob axis speeds, compensation for the servo delay is required.The servo delay is calculated as follows:E = {...

  • Page 293

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL267D Method by which the delay before change is recordedG82.4/G82 : Cancels C–axis servo delay compensation.G83.4/G83 : Applies compensation for the difference between theC–axis servo delay, observed when G83.4/G83 isspecified, and the delay recorded by G84.4/...

  • Page 294

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL268D C–axis handle interruptDuring synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis, manualhandle interrupt can be performed for the C–axis. The C–axis isshifted by the amount of the handle interrupt.D Synchronous shift by programmingDuring synchronization...

  • Page 295

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL269D The control unit detects the positive–going edge of this signal, and cancause retraction along an axis specified using bit 0 (RTR) of parameterNo. 7730 on that positive–going edge. The amount and speed ofretraction are those specified in advance using pa...

  • Page 296

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL270[Classification] Input signal[Function] Shifts the one–rotation signal position of the position coder.[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows:D The position of the position coder when the signal becomes 1 isrecorded as the ...

  • Page 297

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL271[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates that the hob axis is in sync with the C–axis.[Operation] The signal is 1 when:D The hob axis is in sync with the C–axis (during G81.4/G81 mode).The signal is 0 when:D The hob axis is not in sync with the C...

  • Page 298

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL272NOTE1 Just T series allows the second, third, or fourth spindle to beset as a hob axis.2 This parameter is valid only when the optional multi–spindlecontrol function is added.#77700#6DPS#5#4#3MLT#2HDR#1CMS#0HBR[Data type] BitHBR Specifies whether to cancel sy...

  • Page 299

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL273JHD Specifies whether to enable C–axis jog and handle feed duringsynchronization between the C–axis and hob axis (G81.4/G81 mode).0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.DLY Specifies whether to enable C–axis servo delay compensation based onG84.0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled...

  • Page 300

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2747712Acceleration/deceleration time constant applied to the C–axis when it is in syncwith the hob axis[Data type] Word[Unit of data] ms[Valid data range] 0 to 4000This parameter specifies an acceleration/deceleration (exponentialacceleration/deceleration) time...

  • Page 301

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL275#77730#6#5#4#3#2#1#0RTRx[Data type] Bit axisRTRx Specifies whether to apply the retract function for each axis.0 : Not applied.1 : Applied.7740Retract speed for each axis[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit...

  • Page 302

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL276D If a servo alarm or retract–axis overtravel alarm occurs duringretraction, the retraction is interrupted. If this occurs, the retractcompleted signal does not go 1. An alarm other than the overtravelalarm or servo alarm will not cause the retraction to be...

  • Page 303

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL277D Always set a rotation axis as the workpiece axis (C–axis).(Set RoTx (bit 0 of parameter No.1006) to 1.)Set the parameter No. 7705#5 to 0, and set installation ratio with thespindle (hobbing axis) and position coder in parameter No. 7711.D When using a spind...

  • Page 304

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL278NumberDescriptionMessage184ILLEGAL COMMAND ING81.4/G81An invalid command was issued duringG81.4/G81–based synchronization.1. C–axis commands based on G00,G27, G28, G29, and G302. G20– or G21–based commands forswitching between inch and metricinputs3. Th...

  • Page 305

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL279To machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axisconnected to a servo motor is synchronized with the rotation of the toolaxis (grinding wheel/hob) connected to the spindle motor. Tosynchronize the tool axis with the workpiece axis, an electric ...

  • Page 306

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2801 Start of synchronizationWhen synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronizationswitch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between thetool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronizationmode signal SYNMOD is turned on. Dur...

  • Page 307

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL281Synchronization start com-mand (G81)Synchronization modeEGB mode confirmationsignal SYNMOD<F065#6>Tool axis rotation com-mand (S–M03)Tool axis stop command(M05)Tool axis rotation speedWorkpiece axis rotationcommandSynchronization termina-tion command (G...

  • Page 308

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL282whereCompensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg)Z : Amount of travel on the Z–axis after the specification of G81(mm or inch)P : Signed gear helix angle (deg)T : Number of teethQ: Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch–1)The values of P, T, and Q are to b...

  • Page 309

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2832 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 0 (Items (a) to (d) arethe same as for 1.)(e)–C+Z– Z(f)–C+Z– Z(g)–C+Z– Z(h)–C+Z– ZC : –Z : +P : +Compensationdirection: +C : –Z : +P : –Compensationdirection: –C : –Z : –...

  • Page 310

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL284During synchronization, a move command can be programmed for theworkpiece axis and other servo axes. Note, however, that incrementalcommand programming for cutting feed must be used to specify aworkpiece axis move command.For retract movement, the feed hold ca...

  • Page 311

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL285[Classification] Input signal[Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter.[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following:· Performs retraction on the axis specified with bit 0 (RTRx) of parameterNo. ...

  • Page 312

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL286#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G066RTRCTF065SYNMODRTRCTF#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0When setting the parameters for the simple electric gear box, note thefollowing:(1) Set SYNMOD (bit 0 of parameter No. 2011) to 1 for the workpieceaxis and EGB axis.(2) If FFALWY (bit 1 of parameter No. 2...

  • Page 313

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2872) Re–set the parameters related to the EGB.Parameter No. 2011 bit 0 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGBaxes)Parameter No. 2011 bit 1 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGBaxes)(Note)NOTESet this parameter when applying feed–forward control torapid traverse al...

  • Page 314

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2887709Number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear[Data type] Byte[Valid range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axesThis parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. Ifthe value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3rd axi...

  • Page 315

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2897741Retracted distance for each axis[Data type] 2–word axis[Valid range] –99999999 to 99999999Unit of dataValid rangeUnit of dataIS–BIS–CMillimeter input0.001 mm0.0001 mmInch input0.0001 inch0.00001 inchThis parameter sets the retracted distance for eac...

  • Page 316

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2907773Number of position detector pulses per rotation about workpiece axis[Data type] 2–word[Data unit] Detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about theworkpiece axis (on the fourth axis side), f...

  • Page 317

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL291A gear can be shaped (grind/cut) by the synchronization of the workpieceaxis rotation to the tool axis (grinding axis /hob) rotation by using twospindles as a tool axis and a workpiece axis. To synchronize these twoaxes, the Electronic gear box (EGB) is used. I...

  • Page 318

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL292CNC+++++++––––α sK2K12nd spindle (Slave)Position feedbackVelocity feedbackCs commandPosition controlPosition gainVelocity control (PI)Built–inmotor &DetectoWork–piece(Gear)K2/K1 : Synchronous ratioa : Feedforward ratioEGB modeCs commandPosition...

  • Page 319

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL293The following parameters should be set for the Spindle EGB control.(1) Master axis number (Parameter No.7771) * Only Cs contour axis(2) Slave axis number (Parameter No.7710)(3) Number of position detector pulses per rotation about master axis(Parameter No.7772)...

  • Page 320

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL294Synchronization startcommand (G81)Synchronization modeTool axis rotationcommandTool axis stopcommandTool axis rotationspeedWork axis rotationspeedSynchronizationmode signalSYNMOD<F65#6>Synchronization cancelcommand (G80)Fig. 1.14.2(b) Example timing for ...

  • Page 321

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL295Axis configurationX,Y,Z,B (Cs axis: tool axis/master axis),C (Cs axis: workpiece axis/slave axis)O1000 ;N00010 G80 ;N00020 G28 G91 B0 C0 ;Performs reference position returnoperation of the tool and the workpiece axis.N00030 G81 T20 L1 ;Starts synchronization.N0...

  • Page 322

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL296The direction of helical gear compensation is determined by bit 2 (HDR)of parameter No.7700 (1 is usually specified). The compensationdirection is shown in figure 1.14.2(c).(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)(g)(h)(e)(f)(g)(h)C: +Z: +P: +Cmp. direc.: ++Z–Z+C+Z–Z+C+Z–Z+C+Z...

  • Page 323

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL297The synchronous ratio of the Spindle EGB control is internallyrepresented using a fraction. The fraction is calculated from T and Lcommand in G81 block and the number of position detector pulses perrotation about the tool and the workpiece axis (parameter setti...

  • Page 324

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL298*CMR(*1)3600036000EGB*K2/K1*(1/10)360000360000360000+++––00*CMR(*1)Slave axis Cs commandPosition feedbackMotorWorkpieceDetectorK2/K1 : Synchronous ratioMaster axis Cs commandMotorDetectorTool axisFig. 1.14.2(d) Pulse distributionAs Fig. 1.14.2(d), when 360...

  • Page 325

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL2994036Feed forward coefficient for serial spindle[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 to 10000Feed forward coefficient for Cs contour control axis is set.Specified value is smaller than or equal to 100 : In units of 1%Specified value is greater than 100 : In unit...

  • Page 326

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL300#77700#6#5#4#3#2HDR#1#0HBR[Data type] Bit axisHBR The synchronization is :0 : Canceled by reset.1 : Not canceled by reset.1 is usually specified.HDR Setting of the direction for compensating a helical gear(1 is usually specified.)7709Axis number of the axial fe...

  • Page 327

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL301NOTEAfter setting this parameter, the power must be turned offthen on again.7772Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis[Data type] 2–Word[Data unit] Detection unit[Valid data range] Set 360000 to this parameter.This parameter specifies...

  • Page 328

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3027741Retracted distance for each axis[Data type] 2 Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataIncrement systemIS–BIS–CMetric input0.001 mm0.0001 mmInch input0.0001 inch0.00001 inch[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999This parameter sets the retracted distance...

  • Page 329

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL303[Classification] Output signal[Function] Posts notification of the completion of retraction.[Operation] The signal becomes ”1” when :S Upon the completion of retraction.The signal becomes ”0” when :S Upon the completion of retraction, when the axis is s...

  • Page 330

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3041) The EGB synchronization is not canceled by RESET when bit 0(HBR) of parameter No.7700 is set to 1. Set 1 to this parameter usually.2) The EGB synchronization performed even under the followingoperation of the slave axis. – Interlock– Feed hold – Machin...

  • Page 331

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL30512) The synchronization is not maintained in servo off status of the slaveaxis.13) When the EGB control is used, the drilling canned cycle cannot beused.14) The actual feedrate is displayed without the flexible synchronouspulse.CONNECTION MANUAL(This manual)1.1...

  • Page 332

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL306SpindlespeedWorkpiece–axis speedSynchronization start commandSynchronization cancellation commandAccelerationSynchronization stateDecelerationG81R1 commandexecutionAccelerationSynchronization–setG80R1 command executionDeceleration1. Specify G81R1 to start s...

  • Page 333

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL307G81 T _ L _ R2 ;Synchronization startG80 R2 ;Synchronization endT : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1–1000)L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –200 to +200,excluding 0)When L is positive, the direction of rotation about th...

  • Page 334

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3082. Specify G81R2 to start synchronization.When G81R2 is specified, the workpiece axis is accelerated with theacceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter(No.2135, 2136 or No.4384, 4385). When the synchronization speedis reached, phase s...

  • Page 335

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL309NOTE1 The one–rotation signal used for automatic phasesynchronization is issued not by the spindle position coderbut by the separate pulse coder attached to the spindle andused to collect EGB feedback information. This means thatthe orientation position base...

  • Page 336

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL310M03 :Clockwise spindle rotation commandG81 T_ L_ R1 ;Synchronization start commandG00 X_ ;Positions the workpiece at the machining position.Machining in the synchronous stateG00 X_ ;Retract the workpiece from the tool.G81 T_ L_ R1 ;Synchronization ratio cha...

  • Page 337

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL311[Classification] Output signal[Function] Confirmation of the EGB synchronization[Operation] The signal becomes ”1” when :S The EGB synchronization is active.The signal becomes ”0” when :S The EGB synchronization is canceled.#7F065#6SYNMOD#5#4#3#2#1#0#7P...

  • Page 338

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL312NOTEAfter setting this parameter, the power must be turned offthen on again.7776Speed for workpiece–axis automatic phase synchronization[Data type] 2–Word[Valid data range] 0 to 24000Increment systemUnit of dataIncrement systemIS–BIS–CDeg/min10.01.0When...

  • Page 339

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL313#74002#6#5#4CSDRCT#3#2#1#0(This parameter is for spindle EGB.)[Data type] BitCSDRCT SFR/SRV function in the Cs contouring modeIf you use the spindle EGB function, this bit must be set to ”1”.In this case, the signal SFR/SRV only turn on/off the excitation ...

  • Page 340

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3144385Time constant related to the maximum speed in workpiece–axisacceleration/deceleration for the electronic gear box automatic phasesynchronization function for the function of Spindle EGB.(This parameter is for spindle EGB.)2136Time constant related to the ...

  • Page 341

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL315The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in syncwith a rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece.With this function, the high–precision machining of gears, threads, andthe like can be implemented. A desired synch...

  • Page 342

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL316NOTEA sampling period of 1 ms is applied when feedback pulsesare read from the master axis; the synchronization pulsesfor a slave axis are calculated according to synchronizationcoefficient K; and the pulses are specified for positioncontrol of the slave axis.W...

  • Page 343

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL317NOTE1 A manual handle interruption can be issued to the slave axisor other axes during synchronization.2 The maximum feedrates for the master axis and the slaveaxis are limited according to the position detectors used.3 An inch/metric conversion command (G20 or...

  • Page 344

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL318A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used asa synchronization command.Such a command cannot be used when a canned–cycle option is provided.Specify which axes starts synchronization with such a command by usingparameter No. 7710.(1) Sync...

  • Page 345

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL319Synchronization of all synchronized axes is canceled.When a synchronization cancellation command is issued, the absolutecoordinates for the slave axis are updated according to the amount oftravel during synchronization.For a rotation axis, the value obtained by...

  • Page 346

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL320Parameter HDR (bit 2 of No. 7700)(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)(g)(h)(e)(f)(g)(h)+Z–Z+Z–Z+Z–ZC : +, Z : +, P : +Compensation direction : +C : +, Z : +, P : –Compensation direction : –C : +, Z : –, P : +Compensation direction : –C : +, Z : –, P : –Compensa...

  • Page 347

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL321(1) When the master axis is the spindle, and the slave axis is the C–axis1. G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ;Synchronization between the master axis and C–axis is started atthe ratio of one rotation about the C–axis to ten rotations about themaster axis.2. G81.5 T10...

  • Page 348

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL322(3) When two groups of axes are synchronized simultaneouslyBased on the controlled axis configuration described in Item“Configuration examples of controlled axes”, the sample programbelow synchronizes the spindle with the V–axis while the spindle issynchr...

  • Page 349

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL323(4) Command specification for hobbing machinesBased on the controlled axis configuration described in Item“Configuration examples of controlled axes”, the sample programbelow sets the C–axis (in parameter 7710) for starting synchronizationwith the spindle...

  • Page 350

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL324When Kn or Kd exceeds its allowable range above, an alarm is issued.In conversion to the detection unit, when the CMR (commandmultiplication: parameter 1820) is a fraction or when inch/millimeterconversion is used, the fraction is directly converted without mod...

  • Page 351

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL325KnKd = –360000 5 172000 10 = –52Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output.(c) Command : G81.5 T1 C3.263 ;Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and C–axis isstarted at the ratio of a 3.263–degree rotation aboutthe C...

  • Page 352

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL326Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and V–axis isstarted at the ratio of a 1.00 mm movement along theV–axis per spindle rotation.Pm: (Number of pulses per spindle rotation) 1 rotation→ 72000 1Ps: (Amount of V–axis movement) CMR → 100...

  • Page 353

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL327Then, the C–axis detection unit is 0.002 degree. The V–axis detectionunit is 0.002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) isrelated with a command as indicated below. Here, let Pm and Ps be theamounts of movements represented in the detecti...

  • Page 354

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL328NOTE1 When the retract signal goes on during automatic operation,retract operation is performed, and automatic operation isstopped.2 Automatic operation cannot be performed in retraction.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Retracts along the axis specified ...

  • Page 355

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL329[Classification] Output signal[Function] Reports that synchronization is being executed by EGB (G81).[Operation] This signal is set to ”1” in the following case.S During synchronization caused by EGBThis signal is set to ”0” in the following case.S When...

  • Page 356

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL330The following table lists the parameters related to EGB.DatanumberDescription1006 # 01006 # 1To specify a speed with L in a slave–axis amount of travel in a synchronization command, the slave axisneeds to be set to a rotation axis (a parameter ROT, bit 0 of N...

  • Page 357

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL331Note the following points when specifying parameters for the electronicgear box.1. Arrange the controlled axes such that a slave axis appears before adummy axis.Servo axis Axis namenumber(No.1023)X1Y2C (dummy axis)3C (slave axis)4Example of correct settingServo...

  • Page 358

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3321023Number of the servo axis for each axis[Data type] Byte axis[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axesSpecify the number of the servo axis that corresponds to each control axis.Normally, set each servo and control axis to the same numbers....

  • Page 359

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL333HDR Specifiy the direction for compensating a helical gear. (Usually, set 1.)Example: When the rotation direction of the C–axis is the negative (–) direction, anda left–twisted helical gear is cut:0 : Set a negative (–) value in P.1 : Set a positive (+)...

  • Page 360

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3347709Axial–feed axis number in helical compensation[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axesThis parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. Ifthe value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3r...

  • Page 361

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3357740Retract feedrate[Data type] 2–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS–BIS–CMillimeter machine1 mm/min30 to 24000030 to 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min30 to 9600030 to 48000This parameter sets the feedrate dur...

  • Page 362

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3367783Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation[Data type] 2–word axis[Data unit] detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axisrotation.Specify the number of p...

  • Page 363

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL337This function is provided for machines that require synchronizing two ormore different gear ratios, such as a hobbing machine.The function can simultaneously place up to four sets in synchronizationindependently. For example, it is possible to realize special ...

  • Page 364

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL338The flexible synchronization control parameters are listed below:(1) Denominators determining gear ratios (parameter Nos. 5681, 5683,5685, and 5687)(2) Numerators determining gear ratios (parameter Nos. 5680, 5682,5684, and 5686)(3) Indexes to gear ratio denomi...

  • Page 365

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL339Axis configuration of X, Y, Z, B (Cs axis), C, U, and VGroup A: Master axis B, slave axis C, gear ratio of 1:50, M50 for turningon, M51 for turning offGroup B: Master axis Z, slave axis C, gear ratio of 1:5, M52 for turningon, M53 for turning offGroup C: Master...

  • Page 366

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3405) Issuing G28, G30, G30.1 or G53 during synchronization controlresults in the PS010 (IMPROPER G CODE) alarm being issued.Before issuing G28, G30, G30.1 or G53, cancel synchronizationcontrol.6) This function is disabled when the machine is in the RISC–basedHP...

  • Page 367

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL34115) If the spindle is synchronized with the servo motor, it is necessary tocause the loop gain of the servo motor to match that of the spindle inorder to make their positional deviations equal.16) The actual speed display does not take synchronization pulses in...

  • Page 368

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL3425680 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group A)5681Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group A)5682Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group B)5683Denominator determining gear ...

  • Page 369

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL343[Classification] Input signal[Function] Select flexible synchronization control.[Operation] 1) Synchronization is started by setting these signals to 1.2) Synchronization is canceled by resetting these signals to 0.MTA: Selects synchronization for group A.MTB:...

  • Page 370

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL344NOTEIn flexible synchronization mode, reference position returncannot be performed.If REF mode is set, the warning message MODE ERRORis displayed.Note

  • Page 371

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL345When the retract signal RTRCT is turned to ”1” (the rising edge isdetected) in auto mode or manual mode, the axis set in bit 0 (RTR) of theparameter No.7730 moves (retracts) by the amount set in the parameterNo.7741. Upon the completion of retraction, the r...

  • Page 372

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL346(2) The stopping of retract by the resetRTRCTRTRCTFRSTMovingRetract movementstopping[Classification] Input signal[Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter.[Operation] When this signal turns to ”1”, the control unit performs the ...

  • Page 373

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL347#7G066#6#5#4RTRCT#3#2#1#0#7F065#6#5#4RTRCTF#3#2#1#0#77730#6#5#4#3#2#1#0RTRx[Data type] Bit axisRTRx The retract function is :0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.7740Feedrate during retraction for each axis[Data type] 2 Words axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rang...

  • Page 374

    B–63523EN–1/031. AXIS CONTROL348(1) Feedrate override is not supported for retracting.(2) Interlock is supported for retracting.(3) Machine lock is supported for retracting. Retract completion signalis output when retract operation is completed in the machine lockcondition.(4) Feed hold is no...

  • Page 375

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION3492 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

  • Page 376

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION350If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, themachine movement stops in a moment.EMERGENCY STOPRedFig. 2.1 (a)EMERGENCY STOPThis button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with themachine tool builder, the ...

  • Page 377

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION351+X=X+Y=Y+Z=Z+4=4EMGSKEmergency stop limit switchRelay powersupplyEmergency stop temporary releaseEmergency stopSpark killerFig. 2.1 (b)Connection of emergency stop limit switchThe distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied to th...

  • Page 378

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION352#7X008#6#5#4*ESP#3#2#1#0#7G008#6#5#4*ESP#3#2#1#0FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONSB–65142EFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONSB–65262ENSignal addressReference item

  • Page 379

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION353When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNCready signal is set to 1.[Classification] Output signal[Function] The CNC ready signal indicates that the CNC is ready.[Output condition] When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready...

  • Page 380

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION354[Classification] Output signal[Function] Signal SA turns to “1” when the servo system is ready to operate. For anaxis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is “1” and applythe brake when this signal is “0”. Time ch...

  • Page 381

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION355When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine toollimit switch, the tool decelerates and stops as a result of tripping the limitswitch, and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Indicates that t...

  • Page 382

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION356The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel.(i) Rapid traverseTRt2t1VRÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄtVServo system delayCommand pulsedeceleration*+La limit switchL1=VR(t1+t2+ TR2 +TS) · 160000 [mm or inch...

  • Page 383

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION357First, move the tool into a safe zone under manual operation. Then pressthe reset button to reset the alarm.#7*+L8G114#6*+L7#5*+L6#4*+L5#3*+L4#2*+L3#1*+L2#0*+L1*–L8G116*–L7*–L6*–L5*–L4*–L3*–L2*–L1#73004#6#5OTH#4#3#2#1#0[Data type]...

  • Page 384

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION358When the tool tries to moved beyond a stored stroke check limit, an alarmis displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped.When the tool enters a forbidden zone and an alarm is generated, the toolmay only be moved in the direction from which th...

  • Page 385

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION359[Classification] Input signal[Function] Switches between stroke limit 1–I (parameter No. 1320 and No. 1321)and stroke limit 1–II (parameter No. 1326 and No. 1327) for each axisdirection.[Operation] When this signal goes 1 while DLM (bit 0 of p...

  • Page 386

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION360[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notify that the tool is about to enter the forbidden area of stored strokecheck 1. Each direction of each controlled axis has one stroke limitreached signal. The algebraic sign +/– in the signal name co...

  • Page 387

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION361#7BFA1300#6LZR#5#4#3#2LMS#1NAL#0[Data type] BitNAL Specifies whether to issue an alarm related to stored stroke check 1, asfollows:0 : To issue an alarm.1 : Not to issue an alarm; the stroke limit reached signal F124 or F126 isoutput (for a manual...

  • Page 388

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION362CAUTIONIn the cases below, the automatic release function isdisabled. To release an alarm, a reset operation is required.1 When a setting is made to issue an alarm before a storedstroke limit is exceeded (bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No.1300)2 When a...

  • Page 389

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION3631326Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis1327Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric inpu...

  • Page 390

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION364NOTE1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether eachcheck becomes effective after the power is turned on andmanual reference position return or automatic referenceposition return by G28 has been performed or immediatelyafter the power is t...

  • Page 391

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION365Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored stroke check 3.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ...

  • Page 392

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION366The stored stroke check 2 values are set either by parameters (Nos. 1322,1323) or by command. The foribidden area may be defined as the areaexternal to the limits, or internal to the limits. This is determinal by thevalue in parameter OUT (No. 1...

  • Page 393

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION367B(X2, Y2, Z2)ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇA(X1, Y1, Z1)ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇX1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2X1–X2> ζ (In least command increment)Y1–Y2> ζ (In least command incre...

  • Page 394

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION368ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇABabThe position of thetool after referenceposition returnForbidden area boundaryFig. 2.3.3 (h)Setting the forbidden area (M series)Forbidden areas can be set to o...

  • Page 395

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION369When G23 is switched to G22 while the tool is in a forbidden area, thefollowing results.(1) When the forbidden area is internal to the limits, an alarm is generatedin the next move.(2) When the forbidden area is external to the limits, an alarm is...

  • Page 396

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION370BFA When a command is issued where the resulting motion would exceed thevalue of a stored stroke check 1, 30: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.#71301#6...

  • Page 397

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION371WARNINGFor axes with diameter specification, a diameter value mustbe set.1324Coordinate value of stored stored check 3 in the positive direction on each axis1325Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negatice direction on each axis[Data ...

  • Page 398

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION372WARNING1 Whenever the two check limits are set to the same value, thefollowing results are seen.(1)In the case of stored stroke check 1, all areas areprohibited.(2)In the case of stored stroke check 2 or 3, no areas areprohibited.2 Whenever the va...

  • Page 399

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION373The chuck/tailstock barrier function prevents damage to the machine bychecking whether the tool tip interferes with either the chuck or tailstock.Specify an area into which the tool may not enter (entry–prohibition area).This is done using the s...

  • Page 400

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION374#7*TSBG060#6#5#4#3#2#1#01330Profile TY of a chuck[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 or 10 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface1 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface(*) See Fig. 2.3.4 (a) for the figures.1331Dimens...

  • Page 401

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION375LL1W1XCXZACZLAW1XCXCZZWWL1Zero point ofthe workpiececoordinatesystemChuck which holds a workpiece onthe outer surface (TY=1)Chuck which holds a workpiece onthe inner surface (TY=0)Zero point ofthe workpiececoordinatesystemFig. 2.3.4 (a)SymbolDescr...

  • Page 402

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION3761341Length of a tailstock (L)1342Diameter of a tailstock (D)Length of a tailstock (L1)13431344Diameter of a tailstock (D1)Length of a tailstock (L2)13451346Diameter of a tailstock (D2)Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3)1347[Data type] Two–w...

  • Page 403

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION377SymbolDescriptionTZZ–axis coordinate of a tailstockLLength of a tailstockDDiameter of a tailstock (diameter input)L1Length of a tailstock (1)D1Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input)L2Length of a tailstock (2)D2Diameter of a tailstock (2) (...

  • Page 404

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION378WARNING1 Invalid settings will result in the absence of a prohibitedarea, as follows:1) In the setting of the chuck shape, if the jaw length(parameter No. 1331) is less than the grasp length(parameter No. 1333) or if the jaw width (parameter No.13...

  • Page 405

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION379When two tool posts machine the same workpiece simultaneously, thetool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool postsinterfere with each other due to a program error or any other setting error,serious damage such as a tool or m...

  • Page 406

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION380[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates that the tool post interference alarm is activated.[Output condition] This signal goes “1” when:(i) The control unit judges that the two tool posts will interfere with eachother during the exe...

  • Page 407

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION381#7TIALMF064#6TICHK#5#4#3#2#1#0#78140#6#5ZCL#4IFE#3IFM#2ITO#1TY1#0TY0[Data type] BitTY0, TY1 This parameter specifies the relationship between the coordinate systemsof the two tool posts.XXXXZZZZ(3) When TY1=1 and TY0=0(4) When TY1=1 and TY0=1Too...

  • Page 408

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION382IFE Specifies whether interference between tool posts is checked.0: Checked1: Not checkedZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checkinginterference between tool posts.0: Checked1: Not checked (Only interference along...

  • Page 409

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION383NumberMessageDescription169ILLEGAL TOOL GEOME-TRY DATAInvalid tool figure data in interferencecheck.508INTERFERENCE : +XINTERFERENCE : +ZAn interference alarm has been gen-erated when X or Z axis is moving inthe positive direction.509INTERFERENC...

  • Page 410

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION384Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.20.3Tool post interference checkIn automatic operation, before executing the move command by a givenblock, the position of the end point is determined. It is calcula...

  • Page 411

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION385Example 2)Start pointEnd pointThe tool is stopped at point (a) stipulatedby stored stroke check 2 or 3.Immediately upon movement commencingfrom the start point, the tool is stopped, sincethe end point is determined to be within theprohibited zonea...

  • Page 412

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION386In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made.In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made.When the angular axis control option is selected, no check is made.In simple synchronous control, only the master axis is checked; no slav...

  • Page 413

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION387NumberMessageContents510OVER TRAVEL : +nThe stroke limit check made prior to perform-ing movement reveals that the end point of ablock is located within the stroke limit prohib-ited area in the positive direction of the n–axis. Correct the prog...

  • Page 414

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION388This function checks for interference among the tool post and chucks andstops the machine safely. Three major interference check areas can be set,each of which is specified by using rectangles. Two of the threeinterference check areas can be mov...

  • Page 415

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION389There are three possible interference check patterns as follows.A check is made to see whether an interference between areas A and Boccurs as a result of the movement and rotation of area A and themovement and rotation of area B.ÉÉÉÉÉÉInterf...

  • Page 416

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION390A check is made to see whether the movement and rotation of area Binterferes with area C.ËËËËËËInterferencecheck area AInterference checkInterference check area CInterference check area BEach interference check is performed as required. It ...

  • Page 417

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION391Axes along which interference check area A is displaced in parallel:X–axis, Z–axisRotation axis: B–axisWhen a movement along the X–axis in the negative direction causes aninterference with interference area CËËËInterference checkInterf...

  • Page 418

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION392NOTE1 Alarms cannot be issued before an interference check areais exceeded. Therefore, you need to define areas withenough allowance according to the feedrate. The distanceof movement along an axis until an interference isdetermined (the distanc...

  • Page 419

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION393#7IC414900#6IC3#5IC2#4IC1#3IRB#2IRA#1IB2#0IB1[Data type] BitIB1 Movement direction of group B (the first axis)0 : The direction of movement along the first axis of the group–Bmovement plane is the same as the direction of movement along thefirst...

  • Page 420

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION394The processing time is a multiple of 8. If the calculated value of theprocessing time is smaller than 8, the processing time is assumed to be 8msec.SettingIC4IC3IC2IC1160000400018001012001116010020010124011028011132100036100140101044101148110052(...

  • Page 421

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION39514911Axis number of the second axis of the plane on which group A is moved[Data type] Byte[Unit of data][Valid data range] 0 to the number of controlled axesThis parameter sets the axis number of the second axis of the group–Amovement plane. Se...

  • Page 422

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION39614915Axis number of the rotation axis on which group B is rotated[Data type] Byte[Unit of data][Valid data range] 0 to the number of controlled axesThis parameter sets the axis number of a rotation axis used for rotatinggroup B. If there is no re...

  • Page 423

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION39714922Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group A in the second axis14923Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group A in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 424

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION39814926Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group A in the second axis14927Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group A in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 425

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION39914930Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group A in the second axis14931Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group A in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 426

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40014934Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group A in the second axis14935Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group A in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 427

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40114940Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group B in the first axis14941Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group B in the first axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid da...

  • Page 428

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40214944Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group B in the first axis14945Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group B in the first axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid da...

  • Page 429

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40314948Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group B in the first axis14949Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group B in the first axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid da...

  • Page 430

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40414952Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group B in the first axis14953Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group B in the first axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid da...

  • Page 431

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40514956Rotation center in the first axis when group B is rotated14957Rotation center in the second axis when group B is rotated[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid d...

  • Page 432

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40614962Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group C in the second axis14963Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group C in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 433

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40714966Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group C in the second axis14967Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group C in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 434

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40814970Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group C in the second axis14971Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group C in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 435

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION40914974Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group C in the second axis14975Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group C in the second axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.0010.0001mmInch machine0.00010.00001inch[Valid ...

  • Page 436

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION410D CNC axis configuration1st axisX–axisAxis along which check area A is moved2nd axisZ–axisAxis along which check area A is moved3rd axisC–axis4th axisY–axis5th axisB–axisAxis on which check area A is rotated6th axisA–axisAxis along whi...

  • Page 437

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION411After positioning the B–axis at the reference angular displacement andperforming reference position return for the X– and Z–axes, set rectanglesthat make up interference check area A. Interference check area A is represented by the followin...

  • Page 438

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION412Similarly, measure the distances for rectangles 2 and 3.Parameter No. 14924 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 2 in 1st axisParameter No. 14925 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 2 in 1st axisParameter No. 14926 = Distance of maximum p...

  • Page 439

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION413In the same manner as interference check area A, set interference checkarea B as follows. After performing reference position return along theA–axis, measure the rectangle data that makes up the interference checkarea, then set measured values ...

  • Page 440

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION414Parameter No. 14952 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axisParameter No. 14953 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axisParameter No. 14954 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axisParameter No. 14955 = Dis...

  • Page 441

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION415In the same manner as interference check area A, set interference checkarea C as follows. Measure the rectangle data that makes up theinterference check area, then set measured values in parameters. Likeinterference check area A, measure distanc...

  • Page 442

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION416Parameter No. 14973 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axisParameter No. 14974 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axisParameter No. 14975 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axisÌÌÌÌÌÌZYAInterferen...

  • Page 443

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION417Rotate the A–axis so that the sides of the rectangles of interference checkarea B are parallel to the Y– and Z–axes.O.K.N.G.ZYAfter determining the reference angular displacement of the A–axis, setthe reference angular displacement in a pa...

  • Page 444

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION418Parameter No. 14920 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 1 in 1st axisParameter No. 14921 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 1 in 1st axisParameter No. 14922 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 1 in 2nd axisParameter No. 14923 = Dis...

  • Page 445

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION419Parameter No. 14946 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 2 in 2ndaxisParameter No. 14947 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 2 in 2ndaxisIn the same manner as rectangle data measurement, measure the centerpoint of interference check area ...

  • Page 446

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION420NumberMessageDescription514INTERFERENCE : +nThe rotation area interference checkfunction found interference on theplus side of the n axis.515INTERFERENCE : –nThe rotation area interference checkfunction found interference on theminus side of the...

  • Page 447

    2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03421When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is displayed on thescreen, and the alarm signal is set to 1.If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specifiedlevel while the CNC is turned off, the battery alarm signal is...

  • Page 448

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION422#7NPA3111#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitNPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message isentered0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.Parameter

  • Page 449

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION423These signals disable machine movement along axes. When any of thesesignals is activated during movement, tool movement along the affectedaxis (or axes) is decelerated, then stopped.[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal disables mac...

  • Page 450

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION424[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effectiveregardless of the selected mode.[Operation] When the *IT signal is “0”, the axis movement is decelerated and stopped.In automatic o...

  • Page 451

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION425[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axis–by–axis basis.A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. Thenumber at the end of each signal name denotes the number of thecorresp...

  • Page 452

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION426NOTEIn the T series, when bit 4 (DAU) of parameter No. 3003 is0, a directional interlock for each axis is applied only duringmanual operation. To allow a directional interlock for eachaxis also during automatic operation, set bit 4 (DAU) ofparame...

  • Page 453

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION427NOTEThis signal is effective for any blocks including blocks forcycle operation internally created by a canned cycle and soon.#7G007#6#5#4#3#2#1STLK#0#7G008#6#5#4#3*BSL#2#1*CSL#0*IT#7*IT8G130#6*IT7#5*IT6#4*IT5#3*IT4#2*IT3#1*IT2#0*IT1#7+MIT8G132#6+...

  • Page 454

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION428#73004#6#5#4#3#2#1BCY#0BSL[Data type] BitBSL The block start interlock signal *BSL and cutting block start interlocksignal *CSL are:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.BCY When more than one operation is performed by one block command suchas a canned cycle, ...

  • Page 455

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION429The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1,MD2, and MD4.The following seven modes can be selected.D Memory edit (EDIT)D Memory operation (MEM)D Manual data input (MDI)D Manual handle/incremental feed (HANDLE/INC)D Man...

  • Page 456

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION430For this example mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1.However if a transient signal status change were to occur in a signal otherthan MD2 during mode switching, another mode (manual continuousfeed mode, for example) would be set betw...

  • Page 457

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION431[Classification] Output signal[Function] The currently selected operation mode is output.[Operation] The following lists the relationship between the mode selection signalsand check signals:ModeInput signalOutput signalModeMD4MD2MD1DNCIZRNOutput s...

  • Page 458

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION432NOTEPrecautions on modes and mode switching1 In MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC stopsas soon as the commands entered via the MDI have beenexecuted. But the SPL signal does not turn to “1”. Therefore,another command can be...

  • Page 459

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION433NOTE4 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG modea) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0Only jog feed is possible.b) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible,provided the manual ha...

  • Page 460

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION434NOTE6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode isselected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDImode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signalturns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, andthe CNC enters ...

  • Page 461

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION435NOTE7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected duringRMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, theSTL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turnsto “1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOGmode. Under these ...

  • Page 462

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION436NOTE8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the timechart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)).H / SSTLSTLSTL*SPSTSTSTSTSTSTSTSPLSTLSTLSPLMEM mode selectionMDI mode selectionHANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode selectionJOG or TEACH IN JOG mode selectionH /...

  • Page 463

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION437Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDIpanel are for path 1 or path 2. The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items(such as tool compensation values), entering command programs in MDImode, an...

  • Page 464

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION438#78100#6#5#4#3#2#1IAL#0RST[Data type] BitRST Reset key on the MDI panel0 : Effective for both paths1 : Effective only for that path selected by the path select signalIAL When an alarm is raised in one tool post in automatic operation mode,0 : The ...

  • Page 465

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION439The table below lists the status output signals. They indicate the state ofthe CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal.Signal nameSymbolReference sectionAlarm signalAL2.4Battery alarm signalBAL2.4Reset signalRST5.2Rew...

  • Page 466

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION440NOTE1 Rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapidtraverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic referencepoint return, etc., as well as the move command G00. Rapidtraverse in manual operation also includes rapid traverse inreferenc...

  • Page 467

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION441The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivatedwhen the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF Alarm Ignoresignal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if thesafety guard has been opened.[Classifi...

  • Page 468

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION442#7G066#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IGNVRYIGVRY8G192IGVRY7IGVRY6IGVRY5IGVRY4IGVRY3IGVRY2IGVRY1#71804#6SAK#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitSAK When the VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when any ofthe VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore signals IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 are 1:0 : S...

  • Page 469

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION443Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large loadtorque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapidtraverse or cutting feed. This function detects the load torque on themotors and sends this value as an estimate...

  • Page 470

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION444The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for theabnormal load detection function.(1) Servo axisAbnormal load detectionfunction is available.NoAbnormal load detectionfunction to be used?YesNo. 2016#0 = 0No. 2016#0 = 1, No. 210...

  • Page 471

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION445[Classification] Output signal[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis.[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” if:S An abnormal load is detected for a servo axis, Cs axis, spindlepositioning axis, or spi...

  • Page 472

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION446[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals disable the abnormal load detection function forcorresponding axes. These signals correspond to the controlled axes. Thesuffixed number of each signal corresponds to the number of a controlle...

  • Page 473

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION447#72016#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ABNTDT[Data type] Bit axisABNTDT Output of the estimated load torque (for each axis)0 : Disabled1 : EnabledThis parameter must be specified when using the estimated load torqueoutput function or the abnormal load detection alar...

  • Page 474

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION4482104Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Torque command unit (Refer to the digital servo operator’s manual fordetails.)[Valid data range] 0 to 7282(The maximum motor torque is 7282, regardless of the mot...

  • Page 475

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION4494248Spindle load torque monitor constant[Data type] Word axis[Valid data range] 0 to 32767[Standard setting] Depends of the motor model.This constant is determined by the maximum output torque and inertia ofthe motor. It is used for observer proc...

  • Page 476

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION450The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function.(1) Servo axis[Input data structure](M = 1 to n: Specifies separatelyfor each axis whetherdata for the axis is tobe read; n is an axisnumber.Top address +0246810(Function code)2...

  • Page 477

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION451[Output data structure]Top address + 0(Function code)211(Completion code)?(Refer to the above descriptionabout the completion code.)(Data length)L(L = 2*n, where n is the num-ber of specified axes)(Data number)0(Data attribute)M(M: Data at inp...

  • Page 478

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION452(2) Spindle[Input data structure](M = 1 to n: Specifies separatelyfor each axis whetherdata for the axis is tobe read; n is an axisnumber.Top address +0246810(Function code)211(Data number)1(Data attribute)M(M = 1 to n or –1)(Data area)(Completi...

  • Page 479

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION453[Output data structure]Top address + 0(Function code)211(Completion code)?(Refer to the above descriptionabout the completion code.)(Data length)L(L = 2*n, where n is the num-ber of specified axes)(Data number)1(Data attribute)M(M: Data at inp...

  • Page 480

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION454The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed ofan axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), thecorresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by parametersetting) of the PMC.(1) Setting a Y a...

  • Page 481

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION455[Classification] Input signal[Function] Enables the motor speed detection function.[Operation] When this signal is 1, the motor speed detection function is enabled.The servo/spindle motor speed detection function allows the CNC tooutput a detected...

  • Page 482

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION456(n is the value set in parameter No. 1891.)[Classification] Output signal[Function] Report the motor speed status of each of the axes controlled by spindlemotors.[Operation] Each signal is set to 1 when:· The spindle motor speed exceeds the maxim...

  • Page 483

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION457#7G016#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MSDFONDSV8Y (n+0)DSV7DSV6DSV5DSV4DSV3DSV2DSV1#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0Y (n+1)DSP3DSP2DSP1Reserved1890Servo motor speed for detectionNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff before operation is continued.[Data t...

  • Page 484

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION458The spindle motor speeds and servo motor speed of each axis aremonitored and motor speed detection signals are output to the Y addressspecified in this parameter and (Y address +1) to indicate whether speedsexceed the values set in the parameters....

  • Page 485

    B–63523EN–1/032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION459NOTE1 Spindle motor speed detection is enabled only for serialspindles.2 The relationship between servo motor speed detectionsignals DSV1 to DSV8 and the servo motors depends onthe servo axis number (servo connector number) set inparameter No. 102...

  • Page 486

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4603 MANUAL OPERATION

  • Page 487

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION461In jog mode, setting a feed axis and direction selection bit to “1” on themachine operator’s panel moves the tool along the selected axis in theselected direction.Manual operation is allowed one axis at a time. 3 axes can be selected at a time by sett...

  • Page 488

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION462The following signals determine that way the jog feed or incremental feedis executed.SelectionJog feedIncremental feedMode selectionMD1, MD2, MD4, MJMD1, MD2, MD4, MINCSelection of the axis tomove+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, ...Selection of the direc...

  • Page 489

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION463[Operation] When the jog bit is “1”, the control unit operates as described below.D When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit movesthe specified axis in the specified direction.D In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the a...

  • Page 490

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION464Incremental feed mode (TEACH IN HANDLE mode)Reset+J11st axis move+J1 is inef-fective dur-ing this period.Axis is fed againafter signals haveturned to “0” once.Move is stopped byresetting[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects a feedrate in jog f...

  • Page 491

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION465The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0to *JV15) are set to “1” or “0”. When this occurs, the feed is stopped.The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in unitsof 0.01%. Same examples are list...

  • Page 492

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION466NOTEThe JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dryrun in automatic operation mode.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed.[Operation] When the signal turns to “1”, the control...

  • Page 493

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION467#71002#6#5#4#3#2#1#0JAX[Data type] BitJAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapidtraverse and manual reference position return0 : 1 axis1 : 3 axes#71401#6#5#4#3#2#1#0RPD[Data type] BitRPD Manual rapid traverse during the period fr...

  • Page 494

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4681424Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min30 –24000030 –100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min30 –9600030 –48000Rota...

  • Page 495

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION469WARNINGFor incremental feeding along an axis under diameterprogramming, the tool moves in units of the diameter.NOTE1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00in programmed command.2 If a m...

  • Page 496

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION470In manual handle feed mode, the tool can be incrementally moved byrotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the toolis to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal.The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual puls...

  • Page 497

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION471[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B,C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to threegenerators can be used.) (For two–path, these signals are provided foreac...

  • Page 498

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION472<Two–path control>Manual handle feed axis selectionFeed axisHSnD#1 HSnC#1 HSnB#1 HSnA#1Feed axis00000001001000110100010101100111No selection (no axis is used for path 1)1st axis of path 12nd axis of path 13rd axis of path 14th axis of path 15th axis...

  • Page 499

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION473WARNING1 Because the least input increment is used as the units formanual handle and incremental feed, the same valuerepresents a different distance depending on whether themetric or inch input system is used.2 For an axis under diameter programming, the to...

  • Page 500

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION474The following table lists the relationships between each manual handlefeed travel distance select signal and the travel distance specified by thesignal.Manual handle feed traveldistance select signalTravel distanceMP2MP22MP32MP42MP1MP21MP31MP41Manual handle...

  • Page 501

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION475THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode0: Invalid1: ValidHPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulsescorresponding to the excess are ignored. (The ...

  • Page 502

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4767113Manual handle feed magnification m[Data type] Word[Unit of data] One time[Valid data range] 1 to 127This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feedmovement selection signal MP2 is on.7114Manual handle feed magnification n[Data type] Word[U...

  • Page 503

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION477NOTEParameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series20i.WARNINGRotating the handle quickly with a large magnification suchas x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stopimmediately after the handle is no longer rotated or thedistance the to...

  • Page 504

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION478Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation canincrease the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handlefeed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected usingthe manual handle interrupt axis select signa...

  • Page 505

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION479In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handlepulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle interruptselect signals are also valid for the Series 20i.HS3IA to HS3ID <G042#0 to #3> (T series)HS4IA to HS4ID ...

  • Page 506

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION480WARNINGThe distance travelled by handle interruption is determinedaccording to the amount by which the manual pulsegenerator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1,x10, xM, xN).Since the movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it isvery dangero...

  • Page 507

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION481The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be movedthrough a specified distance by handle feed in the axis direction of thetool, tilted by rotating the rotation axes.Tool axis direction handle feed function B provides two functions: to...

  • Page 508

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION482(1) A–C axis type (2) B–C axis type(Tool axis)ZCXAY(Tool axis)BCZXY(3) A–B axis (A–axis master) type (4) A–B axis (B–axis master) type(Tool axis)ZXAY(Tool axis)BZXYBAOutput pulse (Hp) distribution by th...

  • Page 509

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION483For tool axis direction handle feed B, the coordinates (angulardisplacements) of the rotation axes that determine the direction of the toolaxis can be set. These coordinates are set using bits 3 and 4 (3D1 and 3D2)of parameter No. 7104, and parameter Nos. ...

  • Page 510

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION484CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handlefeed is performed with:0 : 5–axis machine.1 : 4–axis machine.3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendiculardirection handle feed function is used, th...

  • Page 511

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4857121Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axesThis parameter sets an axis number for the manual handle feed axisselection signal, for the first manual pulse generator to enable too...

  • Page 512

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION486Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.3.6Tool axis direction handle feed /Tool axis direction handle feed BThis function moves the tool by an amount corresponding to the rotationof the manual pulse gene...

  • Page 513

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION487(1) A–C axis type (2) B–C axis type(Tool axis)ZCXAY(Tool axis)BCZXYOutput pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to theX–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis for the four types is expressed below.(1) A...

  • Page 514

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION488[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal selects tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode.When the following conditions are all satisfied, tool axis direction handlefeed mode is set:1.This signal is 1.2.The value of the manual handle f...

  • Page 515

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4893D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendiculardirection handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotationaxis are:0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feedmode or tool axis perpendicular d...

  • Page 516

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4907141Direction of the X–axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis7142Direction of the Y–axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1 to 8Specify the status of th...

  • Page 517

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION491NOTE1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No.1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C aredetermined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name).2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set based on theaxis configuration does not e...

  • Page 518

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION492In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operationsare enabled along with conventional single axis feed operation.D Feed along a tilted straight line in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane(T series) based on simultaneous 2–axis contr...

  • Page 519

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION493(a) Input data (PMC –> CNC)Lines and circles are defined by setting the data listed below.(5)R9741(1)R9611(6)R97510123Neither linear or circular feed is performed.Linear feed is carried out.Clockwise circular feed is performed. (CW)Counterclockwise cir...

  • Page 520

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION494(1) Setting for linear feedAssume that P is the length of a line segment starting at the origin andperpendicular to a given line, and θ is the angle between theperpendicular and the positive X–axis. The given line can be definedas:X@ cosθ + Y@ sinθ...

  • Page 521

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4951) Select linear feed. (R961)Set R961 to 1.2), 3)Specify the approach direction. (R962 to R969)Specify the X and Y components (Ix, Iy) of a unit vector (+cosθ,+sinθ ) or (–cosθ , –sinθ ), which is parallel to perpendicular op,with four bytes. The...

  • Page 522

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4967) Notify changes in the setting (R979).Reset R979 to 0.CAUTION1 Line and circle definitions (data items 1 to 6) can be set orchanged during manual operation mode (manual handle orjog feed mode). This data notifies the CNC when thedefinitions are changed.A...

  • Page 523

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4971) Specify circular feed and the direction of circle rotation. (R961) Set R961 to 2 or 3.If R961 is 2, the tool moves along the circle clockwise, when theguidance handle is rotated in the forward direction. If R961 is 3,the tool moves along the circle cou...

  • Page 524

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION498Where (inside or outside of the circle) the prohibited area is set isdetermined according to the setting of R974 (which is to bemachined, the inside or outside of the circle). If the inside of thecircle is to be machined, the prohibited area is outside the...

  • Page 525

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION4997) Notify changes in the setting (R979).Reset R979 to 0.8) The values of R980 to R983 (distance to a given line or circle) areoutput as 0.In manual handle feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis(X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, ..., or the 8th axis)...

  • Page 526

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION500(3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2–axis control)By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved from the currentposition along a concentric circle that has the same center as a specifiedcircle on a simultaneous 2–axis control basis. This manual handle...

  • Page 527

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION501(1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1–axis control)While a feed axis and its direction are specified with the feed axisdirection select switch, the tool moves in the specified axis directionat the feedrate specified in parameter No. 1423. The f...

  • Page 528

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION502To perform jog feed, select the feed axis and the direction in which thetool is to be moved, using the feed axis and direction selection signals(+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ... +J8, –J8). While the feed axis and direction areselected, the tool is moved along...

  • Page 529

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION503[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed.The sign (+ or –) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. Thenumber following J indicates the number of the controlaxis.1First axis...

  • Page 530

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION504[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B,C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to threegenerators can be used.) (For two–path, these signals are provided foreac...

  • Page 531

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION505In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handlepulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle feed axisselect signals are also valid for the Series 20i.HS3A to HS3D <G019#0 to #3> (T series)HS4A to HS4D <...

  • Page 532

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION5061423Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis[Data type] Word axis(1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, isset to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute withan override of 100%.Increm...

  • Page 533

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION5077110Number of manual pulse generators used[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.For Series 20i, varid data range is below:1, 2, 3 (T series)1, 2, 3, 4 (F series)7113Manual handle feed magnific...

  • Page 534

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION508NOTEParameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series20i.Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.3.7Manual linear/circular interpolationOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.3.6Manual lin...

  • Page 535

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION509Generally, tools are fed at a program–specified feedrate or at a feedratethat matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linearinterpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) duringautomatic operation. However, this function...

  • Page 536

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION510[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal selects handle–synchronous feed. To put another way, itcauses the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to besynchronized with the rotation of the manual handle (manual pulsegenerator).[Opera...

  • Page 537

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION5111 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feedThe following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, andD) with feed axes.Manual handle feed axis select signalFeed axisHSnDHSnCHSnBHSnAFeed axis0000Not selected (no feed axis)0001First axis0010...

  • Page 538

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION512[Classification] Input signal[Function] Each of these signals selects the tool’s travel distance per pulse from amanual pulse generator for handle–synchronous feed or manual handlefeed. The tool is advanced through the travel distance selected using am...

  • Page 539

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION513D A block not containing a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 isexecuted during automatic operation.D For the F series, the cutting feedrate (except 0) specified in parameterNo. 1411 is made valid when the power is switched on or a resetoccurs.D Paramet...

  • Page 540

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION5147114Manual handle feed magnification n[Data type] Word[Unit of data] One time[Valid data range] 1 to 1000This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feedmovement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 1.Movement selection signalMovement(Manua...

  • Page 541

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION515 To execute rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode andmove the tapping axis with a manual handle.Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No.5203 to 1.1Stop the spindle and servo axes, then set MDI mode by usin...

  • Page 542

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION516By setting bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tappingaxis can be selected. In this case, specify a G code for plane selection andtapping axis address when rigid mode is commanded in MDI mode.In an MDI program for setting rigid mode, G84 c...

  • Page 543

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION517Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.3.8MANUAL RIGID TAPPINGCONNECTION MANUAL (This manual)9.11RIGID TAPPINGSeries 20iOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Manual Milling Machine) (B–64204EN)III3.7MANUAL RIGID TAP...

  • Page 544

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION518The manual numeric command function allows data programmedthrough the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system isready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. Thefollowing eight functions are supported:(1) Positioning (G00)(2) L...

  • Page 545

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION519NOTEWhen the manual rapid traverse selection signal RT is 0, thejog feedrate for each axis is clamped by a parameter–setfeedrate, determined by bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401as shown below:LRP = 0 : Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis (parameter N...

  • Page 546

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION520The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position withoutpassing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specifiedamount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3, or P4 inaddress P. If address P is omitted, a...

  • Page 547

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION521After address B, specify a numeric value no more than the number ofdigits specified by parameter No. 3033.NOTE1 B codes can be named U, V, W, A, or C by setting parameterNo. 3460. If the new name is the same as an axis nameaddress, B is used. When B is us...

  • Page 548

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION522#77001#6#5#4#3#2JSL#1#0[Data type] BitJSL Specifies whether to output automatic operation signal STL duringautomatic operation based on a manual numeric command.0 : Not output.1 : Output.#77002#6#5#4#3JBF#2JTF#1JSF#0JMF[Data type] BitJMF Specifies whether t...

  • Page 549

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION523This function feeds the tool until the absolute coordinate value reaches around number at the termination of jog feed or manual rapid traverse.This function operates only at the falling edge of the relevant feed axisdirection selection signal <+J1 to +J8...

  • Page 550

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION524[Classification] Input signal[Function] Sets a factor by which to multiply the least input increment to obtain theunit to be used by the function of setting the stop position for jog feed.[Operation] When the relevant feed axis direction selection signal is...

  • Page 551

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION525Generally, tools are fed at a program–specified feedrate or at a feedratethat matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linearinterpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) duringautomatic operation. However, this function...

  • Page 552

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION526[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal selects handle–synchronous feed. To put another way, itcauses the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to besynchronized with the rotation of the manual handle (manual pulsegenerator).[Opera...

  • Page 553

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION5271 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feedThe following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, andD) with feed axes.Manual handle feed axis select signalFeed axisHSnDHSnCHSnBHSnAFeed axis0000Not selected (no feed axis)0001First axis0010...

  • Page 554

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION528[Classification] Input signal[Function] Each of these signals selects the tool’s travel distance per pulse from amanual pulse generator for handle–synchronous feed or manual handlefeed. The tool is advanced through the travel distance selected using am...

  • Page 555

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION529[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that the feedrate command (F command) is 0.[Output condition] Outputting the feed zero signal (FEED0) requires that parameter FC0 (bit7 of parameter No. 1404) be set to 1. If FC0 = 0, FEED0 is ...

  • Page 556

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION530#77100#6#5MPX#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitMPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are tobe used, as follows:0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manualpulse generator are used for the first to fourth ...

  • Page 557

    B–63523EN–1/033. MANUAL OPERATION531The following table lists the relationships between each manual handlefeed travel distance select signal valid for an individual manual pulsegenerator and the parameter No. for specifying its magnification.State of bit 5 ofparameter Manual pulse generatorVa...

  • Page 558

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/035324 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT

  • Page 559

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT533The tool is moved in the direction specified by parameter ZMI (bit 5 ofNo. 1006) setting the feed axis and direction select signal to “1” duringmanual reference position return mode. Movement will continue until thereference position is...

  • Page 560

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03534(1) Select JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and the manual referenceposition return selection signal ZRN to “1”.(2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by setting anappropriate feed axis and direction selection signal (+J1, ...

  • Page 561

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT535When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual referenceposition return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:*DEC1Grid FeedrateRapid traverse rate (VR)Deceleration limitoperation positionFL rate (VL). . . . . . . ...

  • Page 562

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03536By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrateF needed to obtain a servo position error of 128, when the servo loop gainG is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm:F=128 601000 30= 230 [mm/min]Therefore, when the...

  • Page 563

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT537[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that manual reference position return has beenselected.[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when:⋅ Manual reference position return has been selected.The signal turn...

  • Page 564

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03538NOTEWhen reference position return is selected, an axis who hasalready completed referencing movement along that axis isdisabled while the reference position return selection signal(ZRN) is “1”. To perform movement again, ZRN must be se...

  • Page 565

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT539[Output condition] These signals are set to “1” when:D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the axis positionis in the in–position area.D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the axisposition is in...

  • Page 566

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03540#71002#6#5#4#3#2#1#0JAX[Data type] BitJAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapidtraverse and manual reference position return0 : 1 axis1 : 3 axes#71005#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ZRNx[Data type] Bit axisZRNx When a command spec...

  • Page 567

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT5411240Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machinecoordinate systemNOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off, then onagain so that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Two–word axis[Unit of data]Incre...

  • Page 568

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03542NOTEThis parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is setto 1.#71300#6LZR#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitLZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power–on to themanual reference position return0 : The stroke limit 1 is c...

  • Page 569

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT543< Conditions >D When there is a remaining distance to travel.D When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speedfunction, tool function) is being executed.D When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being execut...

  • Page 570

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/035441850Grid shift for each axis[Data type] Two–word axis[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999A grid shift is set for each axis.To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set inthis...

  • Page 571

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT545NumberMessageDescription090REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE1. The reference position return can-not be performed normally be-cause the reference position re-turn start point is too close to thereference position or the speed istoo slow. Separate ...

  • Page 572

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03546This function moves each axis in the manual continuous feed mode nearthe reference position. It then sets the reference position in the referenceposition return mode without the deceleration signal for referenceposition return. This is don...

  • Page 573

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT547+J1 or –J1GridZP1ZRF1Feedrate.Manual referenceposition returnmodeFL rate.....The following figure shows the positional relation between the referenceposition and the point to which the tool is positioned by manualcontinuous feed.Grid– di...

  • Page 574

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03548#71002#6#5#4#3#2#1DLZ#0JAX[Data type] BitJAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed,manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return0 : 1 axis1 : 3 axesDLZ Function for setting the reference position wit...

  • Page 575

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT549[Data type] Bit axisZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initialbacklash at power–on0 : Positive direction1 : Negative direction#71201#6#5#4#3#2ZCL#1ZPI#0ZPR[Data type] BitZPR Automatic setting of a coordina...

  • Page 576

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03550Increment systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitLinear axis(input in mm)0.010.0010.0001mmLinear axis(input in inches)0.0010.00010.00001inchRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999Set the coordinate value for each axis ...

  • Page 577

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT551Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position returnis performed for each axis.#71800#6#5#4#3#2OZR#1#0[Data type] BitOZR When manual reference position return is attempted in feed hold duringautomatic operation under ...

  • Page 578

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03552WARNINGWhen bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value tentimes greater than the value set in this parameter is used tomake the check.Example: When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit 0 ofparameter No. 2000 is set to 1, refe...

  • Page 579

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT553NumberMessageDescription090REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE1. The reference position return can-not be performed normally becausethe reference position return startpoint is too close to the referenceposition or the speed is too slow.Separate the ...

  • Page 580

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03554When reference position return is performed using the grid method, thereference position can be shifted by a parameter–set distance withouthaving to move the deceleration dog.This function is enabled by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 1002 ...

  • Page 581

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT555(3) Perform reference position return again. The tool stops when itreaches the reference position.|Direction of reference position returnDeceleration dog|↑Reference position(stop position)Grid point||↑| LSFT #71002#6#5#4#3#2SFD#1#0[Da...

  • Page 582

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/035560302Distance from the position where the deceleration dog is turned off to the first grid point[Data type] Two–word axis[Unit of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999NOTE1 The r...

  • Page 583

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT557The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via thespecified intermediate point, then sets the completion signal for referenceposition return (see Section 4.1) to 1.The reference position must be set in parameter No. 1240 (...

  • Page 584

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03558NumberMessageDescription405SERVO ALARM: (WRONG ZRN)Position control system fault. Due toan CNC or servo system fault in thereference position return, there is apossibility that reference position re-turn could not be executed correctly.Try ...

  • Page 585

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT559Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.6REFERENCE POSITIONOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.6REFERENCE POSITIONSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B...

  • Page 586

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03560The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th referenceposition, via the specified intermediate point. It then sets the completionsignal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return to 1.Before issuing the G30 command, The 2n...

  • Page 587

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT5611 : Return end signal for the first axis2 : Return end signal for the second axis3 : Return end signal for the third axis : :2 : Second reference position return3 : Third reference position return4 : Fourth reference position returnZP 2 1[Ou...

  • Page 588

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03562NumberMessageDescription046ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE-TURN COMMANDOther than P2, P3 and P4 are commandedfor 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re-turn command.Correct program.CAUTION1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, thecomple...

  • Page 589

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT563It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position bycommanding the G30.1. The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be areference position for some sort of machine operation. It is not always afix...

  • Page 590

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03564[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notify the system that the tool is at the floating reference position on acontrolled axis.A floating reference position return end signal is provided for each axis.The number appended to each signal n...

  • Page 591

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT565#71201#6#5#4#3FPC#2#1#0[Data type] BitFPC When the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on thecurrent position display screen0 : The value of the displayed relative position is not preset. (In otherwords, the value does ...

  • Page 592

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03566This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against amechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose ofthis function is to eliminate the variations in reference position setting thatarise depending on th...

  • Page 593

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT567When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No.1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically toset a reference position.MechanicalstopperCurrent position(A)The tool is moved along a specified ax...

  • Page 594

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03568MechanicalstopperThe direction, feedrate, and torqueare all specified with parameters.(E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, thetool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction,along the axis fo...

  • Page 595

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT569When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 ofparameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butt–type reference position settingcauses the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the rapidtraverse rate without the...

  • Page 596

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03570[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals are used to post notification of the torque limit having beenreached for each corresponding axis during cycle operation for butt–typereference position setting.[Operation] Each signal ...

  • Page 597

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT571[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, thisparameter sets a distance on an axis, along which withdrawal is performedafter the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the m...

  • Page 598

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03572When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, thisparameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a secondtime.7185Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) in butt–type ...

  • Page 599

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT573By using optional function ”Linear scale I/F with absolute addressreferenced mark”, we can use ”Linear scale I/F with absolute addressreferenced mark (A/B phase)”, and ”Linear scale with distance–codedreference marks (serial)”T...

  • Page 600

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03574The basic structure of Linear scale with distance–coded reference marks(serial) is same as A/B–phase scale (Linear scale with absolute addressreferenced mark). But this scale differs from A/B–phase in point ofcircuit. High–resolution...

  • Page 601

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT575(1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position returnselection signal ZRN to ”1”.(2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,–J1,+J2,–J2,…) for a target axis.(3) The axis is fed at a constant low speed (reference posit...

  • Page 602

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03576The function is available for only FS16i/18i/21i–MB,18i–MB5.When the function is applied for simple synchronous axis, the followingcondition should be kept.(1) Linear scale I/F with absolute address referenced mark (A/B phase)with the sa...

  • Page 603

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT577[Synchronization]By setting bit 7 (for one simple synchronization pair) of parameter No.8301 for synchronization or bit 7 (for multiple simple synchronizationpairs) of parameter No. 8303 to 1, compensation pulses are output to theslave axis ...

  • Page 604

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03578(1) In the following case, P/S090 alarm occurs.(a) The actual interval of reference marks is different from parametersetting value.(2) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until three or four referencemarks are detected. If this proced...

  • Page 605

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT579(b) When the reference point return procedure is executed, thecoordinate value are rounded in 0 to 360 degree, even if a parameterNo. 1006#1(ROS) is set to ”1” (Machine coordinate values arelinear axis type).(c) In case of rotary encoder...

  • Page 606

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03580(b) Because an incorrect value is set in parameter No.1883 and 1884when setting parameter SCP is incorrect when the automaticsetting of parameter No.1883 and 1884 was executed. It is verydangerous. In this case, please execute automatic sett...

  • Page 607

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT581The function is available for only FS16i/18i/21i–MB,18i–MB5.When the function is applied for simple synchronous axis, the followingcondition should be kept.(1) Linear scale with distance–coded reference marks (serial) with thesame refe...

  • Page 608

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03582(1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved byturning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,–J1,+J2,–J2,...) to ”1” inREF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is executed.(2) When the reference...

  • Page 609

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT583(d) During the reference point establishment operation of the angularaxis, the command in the perpendicular axis is invalid in themanual reference point return.(e) On angular axis control, if you use automatic setting of parameterNo.1883,188...

  • Page 610

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03584#71802#6#5#4#3#2DC2#1DC4#0[Data type] BitDC4 When the reference position is established on the linear scale withreference marks:0 : An absolute position is established by detecting three referencemarks.1 : An absolute position is established...

  • Page 611

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT585WARNINGIf you set parameter 1818#3 (SDCx), please don’t forget toturned off before operation is continued. This parameterdoesn’t generate P/S alarm 0 (Power–off alarm).#71819#6#5#4#3#2DAT#1#0[Data type] Bit axisDATx When manual referen...

  • Page 612

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03586CAUTIONThis parameter is unavailable on linear scale withdistance–coded reference marks (serial).1883Distance 1 between the scale origin and reference position (for a linear scale withabsolute addressing reference marks) or distance 1 betw...

  • Page 613

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT587ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ41.88.242.08.0PRM.1821PRM.1882PRM.1884 100,000,000 ) PRM.1883 Scale zeroScale endMark1=Mark2Mark1Mark2Mark1Mark2Reference point(For a linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks) ÈÈÈ...

  • Page 614

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03588ParameterNo.1821 (Mark1 interval) = ”20000”No.1882 (Mark2 interval) = ”20020”No.1883 (Reference position) = Position of point A + 5.000= (Distance of A to B) / ( Mark2 interval – Mark1 interval)* Mark1 interval + 5.000= 9960 / (200...

  • Page 615

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT589(4) Set an actual machine coordinate value (DGN.301) to the parameterNo.1883 after conversion of least command increment to detectionunit. (Multiply DGN.301 and CMR)(5) Set a parameter No.1240 if necessary.NOTEWhen the setting value is grea...

  • Page 616

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03590When the parameter SCP is set to ”1”,+ –Reference pointMachine coordinate systemÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ9.9409.9609.980 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1M1 M2M1 M1 M2Mark1=Mark20.020Scale zero0.040#7SOF8301#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitSOF The synch...

  • Page 617

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT591CAUTION1 When a reference position is established on the M series byusing the simple synchronous manual feed axis selectsignal <G140>, and this parameter is set for one of themaster axis and slave axis, the setting is automaticallyappl...

  • Page 618

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03592NumberDescriptionMessage5327SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC CTRL)Master/slave axes of simple synchro-nized control, one of them is the linearscale with distance–coded referencemarks (serial), and the other of them isnot the linear scale with dis...

  • Page 619

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT593The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has referencemarks at intervals that change at a constant rate. By determining thereference mark interval, the corresponding absolute position can bededuced. When a G00 command or a...

  • Page 620

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03594The reference position establishment procedure is explained below.<1> The tool is fed along a specified axis at the reference position returnFL feedrate (parameter No. 1425).<2> Upon detection of a reference mark on the scale, th...

  • Page 621

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT595(2) When all axes require the reference position establishment operationSuppose that the reference position is not established for the X–, Y–,and Z–axes and that G00 Xxx Yyy Zzz; is specified. The operationin this case is shown in the...

  • Page 622

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03596← Operation 1 →← Operation 2 → X–axisRapid traverse rateY–axisFL feedrateZ–axisNo movement TimeFig. 4.9 (d) When an axis does not require the reference position establishment operation and others require theestablishment opera...

  • Page 623

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT597(2) When an incremental command is specifiedMovement is made along each axis by a specified distance. (Themovement is indicated with the bold line in the figure below. Note thatthe intermediate tool path is not always of the linear interpo...

  • Page 624

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03598If a correct reference mark interval cannot be detected for a cause, the toolis positioned to the end point without establishing the reference position.Therefore, the machine position, absolute coordinates, and machinecoordinates of the end ...

  • Page 625

    B–63523EN–1/034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT599When the feed axis direction selection signal is set to 0 during steps <2>to <4>, feed operation stops. When the feed axis direction selection signalis set to 1 again, the reference position is established.A time chart for the a...

  • Page 626

    4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENTB–63523EN–1/03600CAUTION1 PMC axis controlIn rapid traverse (axis control command 00h) andcontinuous feed (axis control command 06h) under PMCaxis control, the reference position is not established.2 Rapid traverse by other than G00In rapid traverse operatio...

  • Page 627

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION6015 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

  • Page 628

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03602When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 while the CNCis in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual datainput (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic operation start state thenstarts operating.Signal ST, however, is ign...

  • Page 629

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION603When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, theCNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time,cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL isset to 1. Re–setting signal *SP to 1...

  • Page 630

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03604[Classification] Input signal[Function] Starts automatic operation.[Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNCoperation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC entersthe cycle start state and starts operation.⋅...

  • Page 631

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION605[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed inTable 5.1.Signals OP, STL, and SPL are the signals to inform PMC of ...

  • Page 632

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03606During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show nomovement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may beperforming processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The stateof the CNC can be obtained using the CNC self–diag...

  • Page 633

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION607The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 02. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 13. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 14. When MDI RESET key is presse...

  • Page 634

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03608The following parameters are also used to select how to handleprocessing for CNC data when the CNC is reset.S Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or storedS Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001Whether custom macr...

  • Page 635

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION609[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for resetprocessing on the PMC.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set ...

  • Page 636

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/036103017Output time of reset signal RST[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] 16 ms[Valid data range] 0 to 255To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added isspecified in this parameter.RST signal output time = time required for reset + paramet...

  • Page 637

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION611Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)APPENDIX ESTATUS WHEN TURNINGPOWER ON, WHENCLEAR AND WHENRESETOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)APPENDIX ESTATUS WHEN TURNINGPOWER ON, WHENCLEAR AND WHENRE...

  • Page 638

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03612Before machining is started, the automatic running check can beexecuted. It checks whether the created program can operate the machineas desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine orviewing the position display change without runnin...

  • Page 639

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION613[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the all–axis machine lock signal.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:– When all–axis machine lock signal MLK is set to 1This signal is set to 0 ...

  • Page 640

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03614NOTE1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T,and B commands)Machine lock applies only to move commands alongcontrolled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting acoordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B(2nd auxilialy functi...

  • Page 641

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION615Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.5.1MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCKOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.5.1MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCKSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATO...

  • Page 642

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03616JVmax Maximum value of manual feedrate override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . *1:Dry run feedrate JV when parameter RDR (bit 6 of No. 1401) is 1.Rapid traverse rate when parameter RDR is 0.*2 Clamped by max. cutting feedrate.[Classification] Input signal[F...

  • Page 643

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION617#71401#6RDR#5TDR#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitTDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigidtapping)0 : Enabled1 : DisabledRDR Dry run for rapid traverse command0 : Disabled1 : Enabled1410Dry run rate[Data type] WordIncrement systemU...

  • Page 644

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03618NOTETo specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, useparameter No. 1430 instead.Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.5.4Dry runOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.5.4Dry runSeri...

  • Page 645

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION619When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single blockoperation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manualhandle feed (HNDL), incremental feed (INC), or jog feed (JOG), by usingthe mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD...

  • Page 646

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03620If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements usingsystem variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1,the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled usingsystem variable #3003. To contro...

  • Page 647

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION621Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.5.5Single blockOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.5.5Single blockSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)III.5.5Si...

  • Page 648

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03622Forward movement is to execute a program in the forward directionregardless of the rotation of the manual pulse generator (with the check modehandle valid signal MCHK set to 0) or by rotating the manual pulse generatorin the positive direction (with the ...

  • Page 649

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION623The machine travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulsegenerator is determined by parameter No. 6410 and handle magnification.The machine travel distance when the manual pulse generator is actuallyrotated is obtained from the following expr...

  • Page 650

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03624Executing an M2 or M30 block stops program checking. Backwardmovement cannot be performed from the M2 or M30 block. Afterprogram execution ends, set the RESET signal to 1, and set the checkmode signal and check mode handle valid signal MCHK to 0.When t...

  • Page 651

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION625In the inversion inhibition state, the program execution direction cannotbe changed. When the manual pulse generator is rotated in the directionopposite to the direction of the previous rotation in the inversioninhibition state, the rotation in the oppo...

  • Page 652

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03626When a block contains a move command and an M, S, or T code, the timewhen the M, S, or T code is output differs between forward movement andbackward movement. Therefore, at the time of backward movement,some measures are sometimes required. For example...

  • Page 653

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION627During execution of threading blocks (G32, G76, G84, G88, and G92),handle pulses are ignored, and these blocks are always executed at afeedrate with an override of 100%. In a threading cycle, pulses areignored only when threading is being performed; for...

  • Page 654

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03628[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal enables and disables backward movement in check mode.[Operation] When this signal is set to 0, backward movement is enabled.When this signal is set to 1, backward movement is disabled.[Classification] O...

  • Page 655

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION629#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MMODG067F091MCHKMRVMMRVSPMRVMDMNCHG#76400#6#5#4HMP#3HM8#2HM5#1HFW#0HRP[Data type] BitHRP With the manual handle retrace function, the rapid traverse rate isclamped, assuming that:0 : An override of 10% is used.1 : An override of 100% is u...

  • Page 656

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/036306410Travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator for themanual handle retrace function[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] 1%[Valid data range] 0 to 100This parameter sets the travel distance per pulse generated from themanual pulse gene...

  • Page 657

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION6316425M code (3) in group D for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6426M code (4) in group D for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6427M code (1) in group E for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction64...

  • Page 658

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/036326443M code (1) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6444M code (2) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6445M code (3) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction64...

  • Page 659

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION6336461M code (3) in group M for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6462M code (4) in group M for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6463M code (1) in group N for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction64...

  • Page 660

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/036346479M code (1) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6480M code (2) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction6481M code (3) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retracefunction64...

  • Page 661

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION635CAUTIONThe above explanation of M code groups assumes that thestandard setting is made. The number of M codes for eachgroup and the number of M code groups vary depending onbits 2 (HM5) and 3 (HM8) of parameter No. 6400.CAUTION1 This function is optiona...

  • Page 662

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03636This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manualoperation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted forcalculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. Acheck signal is also output to indicate whether the...

  • Page 663

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION637The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on theworkpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRTincludes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial value(before manual operation) when the control i...

  • Page 664

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03638[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the manual absolute signal.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:– When the manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to 0This signal is set to 0 in the fol...

  • Page 665

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION639When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified atthe head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 areset to 1 during automatic operation, the information contained in the blockfor which /n, corresponding to signal ...

  • Page 666

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/036402. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing/n, the block is not ignored.BDTn ”1””0”Reading by CNC³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....Not ignored3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is readinga ...

  • Page 667

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION641[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notify the PMC of the states of the optional block skip signals BDT1 toBDT9. Nine signals are provided, corresponding to the nine optionalblock skip signals. Signal MBDTn corresponds to signal BDTn.[Output condi...

  • Page 668

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03642Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.12.2Program section configurationOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.12.2Program section configurationSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machi...

  • Page 669

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION643During program execution, this function causes a single block stop rightafter a block with a specified sequence number is executed.To use this function, first specify the program number (1 to 9999) of aprogram that contains a sequence number where operat...

  • Page 670

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03644A program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequence numberof the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken toolor for holidays. This function can also be used as a high–speed programcheck function.There are two types...

  • Page 671

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION645#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G006SRNF002SRNMV7310Movement sequence to program restart positionSetting entry is accepted.[Data type] Byte axis[Valid data range] 1 to no. of controlled axesThis parameter sets the axis sequence when the machine moves to therestart poin...

  • Page 672

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03646WARNINGAs a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct positionunder the following conditions.Special care must be taken in the following cases sincenone of them cause an alarm:⋅ Manual operation is performed when the manualabsolute mode is OFF.⋅...

  • Page 673

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION647The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damagedduring machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool canbe returned to restart machining efficiently.XYZ:Position in which the tool escape signal is turned to “...

  • Page 674

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03648D In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measureworkpieces, the tool can be moved manually, such as by manualcontinuous feed, or manual handle feed. This operation is calledmanual retraction. The path along which the tool retra...

  • Page 675

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION649[Classification] Input signal[Function] Tool retraction mode is selected.[Operation] When this signal is turned to 1, the control unit retracts the tool by apre–programmed distance.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal reports that tool ...

  • Page 676

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03650#7G059#6#5#4#3#2#1TRRTN#0TRESC#7F092#6#5TRSPS#4#3TRACT#2#1#0WARNINGThe retraction axes and retraction distances specified withG10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks dependingon the figure to be machined. An incorrectly specifiedretraction distan...

  • Page 677

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION651NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feedblocks as described below.The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–positioncheck (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls in–position, the toolis moved b...

  • Page 678

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03652Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.5.4.1Exact Stop (G09, G61)Cutting Mode (G64)Tapping Mode (G63)Series21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)II.5.4.1Exact Stop (G09, G...

  • Page 679

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION653When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown in fig. 5.10, a precisionmachining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece witha tool simultaneously;this function can prevent the workpiece fromdistortion that results when only one side i...

  • Page 680

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03654CAUTION1 If feed hold operation is performed during balance cuttingusing both tool posts, balance cut processing is notperformed at restart time, it is performed when the nextmove command is specified for both tool posts.2 Balance cutting is not performe...

  • Page 681

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION655By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT),it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program isbeing read from the remote buffer or memory card.If the floppy cassette directory display option is available, it is...

  • Page 682

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03656#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G043F003DNCIMRMT#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00100ND3Setting entry is accepted.[Data type] BitND3 In DNC operation, a program is:0 : Read block by block. (A “DC3” code is output for each block.)1 : Read continuously until the buffe...

  • Page 683

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION657NumberMessageDescription086DR SIGNAL OFFWhen entering data in the memory byusing Reader / Puncher interface, theready signal (DR) of reader / puncherwas off.Power supply of I/O unit is off or cableis not connected or a P.C.B. is defec-tive.123CAN NOT USE...

  • Page 684

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03658If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold duringautomatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as toolexchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention beforeautomatic operation is resumed.This function is...

  • Page 685

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION659When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop ora reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently bedrawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically storesinformation relating to the tapping exec...

  • Page 686

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03660(4) ResumeOnce rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed byperforming the same operation as that used for starting rigid tappingretraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however,the start operation does not restart r...

  • Page 687

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION661Tapping retraction start signal RTNTSpindle enable signal ENBRigid tapping signal RGTAPSpindle excitationRetract movementWhen tapping retraction is stopped, spindle enable signal is set to 0, in thesame way as for ordinary rigid tapping. Therefore, perf...

  • Page 688

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03662Example:D Machining program––––––––––M29 S1000 ;G84 X20. Y20. R–10. Z–30. F500 ;X50. Y50. ;X100. Y100. ;G80––––––––––D Retraction program––––––––––G30 P99 M29 S1000 ;G00 Z–10. ;–––...

  • Page 689

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION663#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05200DOV[Data type] BitDOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.#75201#6#5#4#3OVU#2#1#0[Data type] BitOVU The increment unit of the override parameter (No.5381) for rigid tappingretraction is:0 : 1...

  • Page 690

    5. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63523EN–1/03664NOTE1 This parameter is enabled only when the parameter used toenable tool extraction override (DOV:bit 4 of No.5200) is setto 1.2 If bit 3(OVU) of parameter No.5201 is set to 1, 10% is set asthe unit of data. Thus, an override of up to 2000% can beappli...

  • Page 691

    B–63523EN–1/035. AUTOMATIC OPERATION665NOTE1 Setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to “1” startsrigid tapping retraction only when the CNC is placed in boththe reset state and MDI mode.2 The machining data for rigid tapping retraction is maintaineduntil a rigid tapping comman...

  • Page 692

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/036666 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

  • Page 693

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION667The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece systemspecified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverserate.In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point isprogrammed.In the incremental command the dis...

  • Page 694

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/036681420Rapid traverse rate for each axis[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min30 – 24000030 – 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min30 – 9600030 – 48000...

  • Page 695

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION669Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.4.1POSITIONING (G00)OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.4.1POSITIONING (G00)Series21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614E...

  • Page 696

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03670Tools can move along a lineA tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedratespecified in F.The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. Itneed not be specified for each block.The feedrate commanded by the...

  • Page 697

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION6711411Cutting feedrate when the power is turned onThis parameter can be set in “Setting screen”.[Data type] WordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min6 – 327676 – 32767Inc...

  • Page 698

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03672NOTE1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circularinterpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involuteinterpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified inparameter No. 1422 is effective.2 If the setting for each axis is 0,...

  • Page 699

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION673The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the definedplane.“Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewedin the positive–to–negative direct...

  • Page 700

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03674The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arccan be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ areconsidered.For T series,...

  • Page 701

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION675r=50mmEnd pointStart pointr=50mmYX(Example) (M series)For arc (1) (less than 180_)G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;For arc (2) (greater than 180_)G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R–50.0 F300.0 ;(1)(2)When the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digits...

  • Page 702

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03676NOTE1 Specifying an arc center with addresses I, K, and JWhen the distance from the arc start point to the arc centeris specified with addresses I, K, and J, a P/S alarm (No.5059) is issued if:Example: When IS–B and metric input are selected, issui...

  • Page 703

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION6771022Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate systemNOTEWhen this parameter is set, power must be turned off beforeoperation is continued.[Data type] Byte axisTo determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cuttercompensation C (...

  • Page 704

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/036783410Tolerance of arc radius[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, thetolera...

  • Page 705

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION679NOTE1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basicaxis) can be used with G–code system B and C.2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, thearc specified by address R takes precedence and the otherare ignored.3 If an ...

  • Page 706

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03680Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cuttingthreads.The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coderattached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedrate (feedper minute) to feed the tool.LStrai...

  • Page 707

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION681[Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress.[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” in the following cases:S Thread cutting mode in progressS Thread cutting cycle for turningThis signal turns to “0” in the following...

  • Page 708

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03682#73708#6#5#4#3#2#1SAT#0SARSAR[Data type] BitSAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is:0 : Not checked1 : CheckedSAT: Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing thethread cutting block0 : The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 ...

  • Page 709

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION6831627FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis[Data type] Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min6 – 150006 – 12000I...

  • Page 710

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/036845141Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999This parameter sets the finishi...

  • Page 711

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION685WARNINGDuring threading, stopping feed without stopping thespindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptlyincrease. Feed hold is, therefore, disabled duringthreading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in thesame way as single bl...

  • Page 712

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03686Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.4.15THREAD CUTTINGOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.4.9CONSTANT LEAD THREADCUTTINGII.4.10VARIABLE LEAD THREADCUTTINGII.4.11CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTI...

  • Page 713

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION687When the automatic operation stop signal *SP <G008#5> is set to 0during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts whileperforming chamfering, then returns to the start point of the current cycle,first along the X–axis, then...

  • Page 714

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03688CAUTIONWhile the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal*SP <G008#5> is ignored.NOTEThe chamfering distance for retraction is determined by thesetting of parameter No. 5130.Series16i/18i/160i/180i/OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–...

  • Page 715

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION689For accurate positioning without play of the machine (lost motion),positioning is performed in one direction finally.+Start pointOverrun distanceStart pointEnd pointTemporary stopExample where positioning is performed in the minus directionG60 IP_;IP_...

  • Page 716

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03690XZOverrun distance in theX–axis directionOverrun distance in the Z–axis directionProgrammed end pointProgrammed start pointIn the case of positioning of non–linear interpolation type (bit 1 (LRP) ofparameter No. 1401 = 0)As shown above, single d...

  • Page 717

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION691#75431#6#5#4#3#2#1PDI#0MDL[Data type] BitMDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) isincluded in one–shot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group)0: One–shot G codes (00 group)1: Modal G codes (01 group)PDI When...

  • Page 718

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/036921. Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for whichno overrun distance is set in parameter No. 5440.2. Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for whichtravel distance 0 is specified.3. The mirror image functio...

  • Page 719

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION693The direction of the compensation command Xa is determined by theinclination angle q of the angular axis and the direction of the movecommand Yp for the orthogonal axis. When tan q is plus, the directionof the move command for the angular axis is opp...

  • Page 720

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03694+X (orthogonal axis)+Y (angular axis)Actual move coordinate system q (inclination angle)Program coordinate systemMove command in the minus directionX–axis: Compensation in the plus directionY–axis: Positioning in theminus directionMove command i...

  • Page 721

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION695 q (inclination angle)Program coordinate system+X (orthogonal axis)+Y (angular axis)Actual move coordinate systemY–axis: Positioning in the minus directionX–axis: Compensation in the minus directionMove command in the minus directionMove command...

  • Page 722

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03696Helical interpolation is enabled by specifying up to two other axes whichmove synchronously with the circular interpolation by circularcommands.The command method is to simply add one or two move command axeswhich are not circular interpolation axes. ...

  • Page 723

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION697<Parameters used for clamping>When HFC is 0No. 1430:Maximum cutting feedrate for each axisSince the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clampedto the smaller parameter value...

  • Page 724

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03698With the involute interpolation function, an involute curve can bemachined. Cutter compensation C is also possible. The use of involuteinterpolation eliminates the need to use short lines or arcs to approximatean involute curve. Pulse distribution ...

  • Page 725

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION699(b) Override in the neighborhood of a basicIf a programmed cutting feedrate is directly used in the neighborhoodof a basic circle where the curvature of an involute curve changesrelatively sharply, the cutter may be overloaded, resulting in a failuret...

  • Page 726

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/037005616Override value (OVR2) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 25617Override value (OVR3) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 35618Override value (OVR4) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 45619Override value (OVR5) ...

  • Page 727

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION701Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour controlin converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate systemto the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movementof a rotary axis (rotation of a workpie...

  • Page 728

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/037021422Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min6 – 2400006 – 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min6 – 960006 – 48000Specif...

  • Page 729

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION703No.MessageDescription145ILLEGAL CONDITIONSIN POLAR COORDINATEINTERPOLATIONThe conditions are incorrect when the polarcoordinate interpolation starts or it is can-celed.1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1was specified.2) An error is found in the pl...

  • Page 730

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03704The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is internallyconverted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface so that linearinterpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with another axis.After interpolation, suc...

  • Page 731

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION7051022Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system[Data type] Byte axisTo determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cuttercompensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for theT series), etc., each control...

  • Page 732

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03706Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.4.9Cylindrical InterpolationOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.4.7Cylindrical InterpolationSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Ce...

  • Page 733

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION707The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls themovement of the tool center so that the tool axis moves along a specifiedpath on the cylindrical surface to always face toward the rotation axis ofthe workpiece (cylindrical axis).On the ...

  • Page 734

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03708[G05 P10000 ; AI high–precision contour control mode ON]:G07.1 IPr ; Starts the cylindrical interpolation mode (enables cylindrical interpolation).::G07.1 IP0 ; Cancels the cylindrical interpolation mode.[G05 P0 ; AI high–precision contour control...

  • Page 735

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION709Set valueMeaning0Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis1X axis of the basic three axes2Y axis of the basic three axes3Z axis of the basic three axes5Axis parallel to the X axis6Axis parallel to the Y axis7Axis parallel to the Z axis1260Amoun...

  • Page 736

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0371019532Tool offset axis number for the Z–X plane[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axesSpecify a tool offset axis that is normal to the cylindrical rotation axis.19533Tool offset axis number for th...

  • Page 737

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION71119535Limit travel distance value for executing cylindrical interpolation cutting pointcompensation of the previous block without modification[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Two–word[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Valid data range] 1 to ...

  • Page 738

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03712Polygonal turning means machining a polygonal figure by rotating theworkpiece and tool at a certain ratio.WorkpieceToolWorkpieceFig. 6.11 (a)Polygonal turningBy changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpiece and tool andnumber of cutters,th...

  • Page 739

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION713One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a toolrotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as aworkpiece axis (spindle).Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in the operator’s manual(for la...

  • Page 740

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03714(With the above setting, the reference counter capacity is 36000.)Parameter No. 1820 = 2 (CMR)Parameter No. 1821 = 36000 (reference counter capacity)Parameter No. 2084 = 36 (DMR numerator)Parameter No. 2085 = 1000 (DMR denominator)For the other servo ...

  • Page 741

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION715No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000 36010)Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units.D Commands from the NC programWhen the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machiningprogram can issue move commands to the polygon axis.Such commands can...

  • Page 742

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03716#7PLZ7600#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitPLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manualreference position return.1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rapid traverse.The ...

  • Page 743

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION717NumberMessageDescription217DUPLICATE G251 (COM-MANDS)G51.2 (or G251) is further comman-ded in the polygonal turning mode.Modify the program.218NOT FOUND P/Q COM-MAND IN G251P or Q is not commanded in theG51.2 (or the G251) block, or thecommand value i...

  • Page 744

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03718In a configuration where two or more serial spindles are used, spindlerotation control is applied to the workpiece rotation axis (master axis) andthe tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) with a certain ratio.The polygonal turning with two...

  • Page 745

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION719(R is omissible. If it is not specified at all, the phase difference isassumed to be 0. If bit 5 (PCOF) of parameter No. 7602 = 1 to disablephase control, the R command is ignored, but no alarm condition isassumed.)The G51.2 command is modal. Once ...

  • Page 746

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03720If the specified polygon synchronization axis speed (S Q/P for thefirst spindle at S rpm) exceeds the clamp speed specified in parameter No.7621, the polygon synchronization axis speed is clamped, and P/S alarmNo. 5018 is issued.Each time the spindle...

  • Page 747

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION721G50. 2 ;M∆j ; T∆∆ jj ; .Step 9.Release the polygon synchronization mode.Change to a finishing tool.G51. 2 P1 Q2 ;S2000; ..Step 10. Change the spindle speed for finishing(master axis at 2000 min–1 and polygonsynchronization axis at 4000 m...

  • Page 748

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03722CAUTION1 DGN indicates the loop gain because this function requiresthat both spindles be controlled with the same loop gain.However, no alarm is issued even if the loop gain is differentbetween the spindles.(For the serial spindle control unit, the pa...

  • Page 749

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION723#4 to #7 Causes for P/S alarm No. 218When P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, the polygon synchronization mode isreleased, but the indication of its causes remains until the alarm is clearedby a reset.#0 The specified speed is too low during spindle–spindle p...

  • Page 750

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03724Indication of values specified during the spindle–spindle polygonsynchronization mode474Rotation ratio for the master axis during the spindle–spindle polygon synchronization mode (P command value)DGNThis indication is the current rotation ratio (P...

  • Page 751

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION725[Classification] Output signal[Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode.[Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) sets this signal tological “1”. It stays at “1” as long as the...

  • Page 752

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03726[Classification] Output signal[Function] Informs the PMC that the spindle has reached its constant–speed forpolygon synchronization during polygonal turning with two spindles.[Output condition] During polygonal turning mode with two spindles, whethe...

  • Page 753

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION727When a G51.2 is issued to put the system in the polygon synchronizationmode, the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN<F063#7>turns on.Set up a PMC sequence for the polygon synchronization mode bymonitoring this signal with a PMC ladder....

  • Page 754

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03728Sequence common to methods (A) and (B)Regardless of whether the method you use is (A) or (B), set up the PMCsequence as follows:D Do not use the SFR/SRV signal to switch the rotation direction of thefirst spindle. Instead, fix the energizing method o...

  • Page 755

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION729#77602#6#5COF#4HST#3HSL#2HDR#1SNG#0MNG[Data type] BitMNG The rotational direction of the master axis (first spindle) in thespindle–spindle polygon turning mode is:0: Not reversed.1: Reversed.SNG The rotational direction of the polygon synchronizatio...

  • Page 756

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03730COF In spindle–spindle polygon turning mode, phase control is:0: Used.1: Not used.CAUTIONWhen the use of phase control is not selected, the steadystate is reached in a shorter time because phasesynchronization control is not applied. Once steady ...

  • Page 757

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION7317621Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] For polygon turning with two spindles:Set a value between 0 and 32767, but which does not exceed themaximum a...

  • Page 758

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/037327640Master axis in spindle–spindle polygon turning7641Polygon synchronous axis in spindle–spindle polygon turning[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0, 1 to Number of spindles, or m × 10 + n (m:1 to Number of paths, n:1to Number of spindles)These ...

  • Page 759

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION733NumberMessageDescription218NOT FOUND P/Q COM-MAND IN G251The G51.2 block does not contain P or Q,or a specified value is invalid.The causes of this alarm are detailed inDGN No. 471. (See below.)DGN No. 471#7 NPQ→When P and Q are not specified at al...

  • Page 760

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03734⋅ To the contrary to P/S alarm No. 221, P/S alarm No. 194 occurs ifanother NC control spindle function is specified during the two–spindlepolygon synchronization mode.CAUTION1 The maximum spindle speed for each gear stage (No. 3741to 3744) must be...

  • Page 761

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION735CAUTION6 During polygon synchronization mode, speed change andphase adjustment are performed each time the spindlespeed is changed. Therefore, this mode cannot be usedtogether with a function that causes continuous spindlespeed change (such as G96 co...

  • Page 762

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03736When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane duringcutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so thatthe C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.12).ToolToolProgrammed tool pathNormal ...

  • Page 763

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION737[Data type] Bit axis[Valid data range] ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axisROSxROTxDescription00Linear axis@ Inch/metric conversion is done.@ All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Not rounded in 0 to 360_)@ Stored pitch error compensatio...

  • Page 764

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/037385482Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999The rotation block of a normal direction con...

  • Page 765

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION739#75484#6#5#4#3#2ANM#1CTI#0SDC[Data type] BitSDC In normal direction control:0 : A C–axis movement is automatically inserted between blocks so thatthe C–axis is directed at right angles to the direction of motion at thestart point of each block. (...

  • Page 766

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03740NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 1, no interference check ismade in cutter compensation C.ANM In AI contour control mode, the normal direction control function is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.5485Limit imposed on the insertion of a single block for rotat...

  • Page 767

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION7411422Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min6 – 2400006 – 100000Inch machine0.1 inch/min6 – 960006 – 48000Specif...

  • Page 768

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03742Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of aworkpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore,exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect toanother axis. This allows tapered groove machi...

  • Page 769

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION7435643Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999This parameter sets the ...

  • Page 770

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03744Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on theprogram command.D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such asat corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the programcommand.D For those porti...

  • Page 771

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION745Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.4.12Smooth interpolationReference item

  • Page 772

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03746In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of thecircular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation isenable. When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical axis,pulse distribution cau...

  • Page 773

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION747Helical interpolation B moves the tool helically. This interpolation canbe executed by specifying the circular interpolation command togetherwith up to four additional axes in AI contour control mode.Basically, the command can be specified by adding ...

  • Page 774

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03748Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolationcommand together with a desired number of revolutions or a desiredincrement (decrement) for the radius per revolution.Conical interpolation is enabled by specifying the spiral int...

  • Page 775

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION7493471Allowable difference between the specified end point and that calculated from the increment (or decrement) and number of revolutions for spiral or conical interpolation[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0...

  • Page 776

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03750NumberMessageDescription5122ILLEGAL COMMAND INSPIRALAn invalid command has been speci-fied for spiral or conical interpolation.The most likely causes are as follows:1) L = 0 specified2) Q = 0 specified3) R/, R/, C specified4) Height increment of 0 spe...

  • Page 777

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION751Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal diesfor automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline(NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies.This function allows NURBS curve expression ...

  • Page 778

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03752NURBS interpolation must be specified in high–precision contourcontrol mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executesNURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating themovement so that the acceleration on each axis will not ...

  • Page 779

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION753When positioning operation of linear interpolation type is specified (bit1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1), the following operations can also beset as operations of linear interpolation type by setting bit 4 (ZLN) ofparameter No. 1015 to 1:D Movement...

  • Page 780

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/037541 Manual interventionPositioning of non–linear interpolation type is performed if theautomatic operation stop state is set by feed hold or mode switchingduring movement then the subsequent operation of the program isperformed after the machine is mo...

  • Page 781

    B–63523EN–1/036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION755By specifying an intermediate point and end point for an arc, circularinterpolation can be performed in three–dimensional space.As shown below, three points, namely, a start point (current position), aspecified intermediate point, and a specified en...

  • Page 782

    6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03756NumberMessageDescription5430ILLEGAL COMMAND IN3–DIn modal state where three–dimension-al circular interpolation must not be spe-cified, three–dimensional circular inter-polation (G02.4/G03.4) was specified.A code that must not be specified in th...

  • Page 783

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7577 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION ANDDECELERATION CONTROL

  • Page 784

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL758The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feedfunctions are available:1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves ata rapid traverse rate set in the CN...

  • Page 785

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL759NOTE1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapidtraverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic referencepoint return, etc., as well as the move command G00. Themanual rapid traverse also includes th...

  • Page 786

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7601424Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min30 – 24000030 – 100000Inch machi...

  • Page 787

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL761A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axiswith parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an overrideapplied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit....

  • Page 788

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL762NOTE1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circularinterpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involuteinterpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified inparameter No. 1422 is effective.2 If...

  • Page 789

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL763Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.5.3Cutting FeedOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.5.3Cutting FeedSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machin...

  • Page 790

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL764For M series G94;G code for feed per minute (Group 05)F_;Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)For T series G98;G code for feed per minute (Group 05)F_;Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)#71403#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MIF[Data type] BitMIF Cut...

  • Page 791

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL765NOTE1 When FCD = 1:If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does notinclude an F command, the last F command specified isassumed to be specified in the G command mode of theblock.Example 1:N1 G99 ;N2 Faaaa G98 ;- ...

  • Page 792

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL766After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution mode),the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be directlyspecified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for T series) is a modalc...

  • Page 793

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7671423Feedrate in jog feed for each axis[Data type] Word axisWhen JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) inT series, specify a feedrate in jog feed (feed per revolution) with anoverride of 100...

  • Page 794

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL768When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate setfor that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 isspecified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.The feedrate corresponding...

  • Page 795

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7691450Number of revolution of manual pulse generator to reach maximum feedrate[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1 to 127Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulsegenerator is rotated one ...

  • Page 796

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7701460Upper limit of feedrate for the F1–digit feed command (F1 to F4)1461Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9)[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement sys...

  • Page 797

    FRN= =1Time (min)SpeedDistanceFRN= =1Time (min)SpeedCircle radiusB–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL771Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block andinverse time (FRN). Speed: mm/min (metric input)inch/min (inch input)Distance:...

  • Page 798

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL772An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to therapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421).Also, 1% rapid traverse override select signal allows rapid traverseoverride every 1% in ...

  • Page 799

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL773[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate[Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows:Rapid traverse overrideOverride valueROV2ROV1Override value00100 %0...

  • Page 800

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL774⋅ Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals.To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001.ROV1ROV2#7G014#6#5#4#3#2#1#0HROVG096*HROV6 *HROV5 *...

  • Page 801

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL775Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.5.3Rapid traverse overrideOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.5.3Rapid traverse overrideSeries21i/210i/210isOPERAT...

  • Page 802

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL776[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signalscorrespond to override values as follows:Override value = Σ | 2i×Vi | %7 i=0Vi=0 when *FVi is “1” andV...

  • Page 803

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL777Same examples are listed below.*FV0 – *FV7Override value(%)40Override value(%)111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0111 0111 0110 1110 1110 1110 0110 0101 1101 0101 0100 1011 0001 1000 0000 0111 1111 0110 1110 ...

  • Page 804

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL778Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.5.3Cutting feedOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.5.3Cutting feedSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machin...

  • Page 805

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL779#7*AFV7G013#6#5*AFV6#4*AFV5#3*AFV4#2*AFV3#1*AFV2#0*AFV0*AFV1The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Feedrate override is fixed to 100%.[Operation] When the ...

  • Page 806

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL780When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensationapplied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overriddenat both ends of the corner. There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 7.1.8).2°x...

  • Page 807

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL781An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override valueis valid even for dry run and F1–digit feed specification.In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:F × (inner corner automatic...

  • Page 808

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL782In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specifiedfeedrate (F) becomes as follows:F RcRpRc: Radius of the path of the cutter’s centerRp: Programmed radiusAs the actual feedrate becomes th...

  • Page 809

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7831713Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override[Data type] WordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitInput in mm10.10.01mmInput in inches0.10.010.001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 3999Set distanc...

  • Page 810

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL784These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speedwhich has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427.[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals are used to apply deceleration, and prov...

  • Page 811

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL785#71005#6#5EDMx#4EDPx#3#2#1#0[Data type] Bit axisEDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis0 : Valid only for rapid traverse1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feedEDMx External decele...

  • Page 812

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL786During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviationamount at all times. When the amount exceeds the “feed stop positiondeviation amount” set by the parameter (No. 1832), the function suspendspuls...

  • Page 813

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL787When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial errorexists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. Anapproximation of this error can be obtained from the followingexpression:0YXrDr:...

  • Page 814

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL788When a given arc radius R and the maximum permissible speed V for thatarc radius are set as parameters, the maximum permissible speed v for anarc with a programmed radius r can be obtained from expression 3. Then,if a ...

  • Page 815

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL789Expressions 1, 2, and 4 are approximate expressions. This means that, asthe arc radius becomes smaller, the approximate precision lowers.Therefore, even when the feedrate is clamped to the maximumpermissible speed v ob...

  • Page 816

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL790This function automatically controls the feedrate during cornermachining according to the angle of a corner made by machining blocksor according to the feedrate difference for each axis.This function is enabled when G64...

  • Page 817

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL791@ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation forcutting feed is enabledIf the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified inparameter No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrat...

  • Page 818

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL792θθBlock A (G01)Block B (G01)Angle made by two linesBlock A (G02)Block B(G01)If a circular path is included, the anglebetween the tangent of the arc andanother line is considered.1741Feedrate for assuming the terminat...

  • Page 819

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL793CAUTION1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with thatspecified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane.The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No.1741 are compared only for the first ...

  • Page 820

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL794@ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation forcutting feed is enabledIf the difference between the feedrates of blocks A and B for each axisexceeds the value specified in parameter No. 1780, the feedra...

  • Page 821

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL795N2 N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 Y100. ;N1Tool path if cornerdeceleration is notapplied← Tool path when corner deceleration was appliedF1000 Without corner deceleration With corner decelerationF500F500F500N...

  • Page 822

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL796#71601#6ACD#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automaticcorner deceleration function)0 : The function is not used.1 : The function is used.#71602#6#5#4CSD#3#2#1#0[...

  • Page 823

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7971781Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic cornerdeceleration function (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)[Data type] Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeI...

  • Page 824

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL798Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.5.4.3Automatic corner decelerationOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63524EN)II.5.4.3Automatic corner decelerationTh...

  • Page 825

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7991431Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min0 – 2...

  • Page 826

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL800NOTE1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circularinterpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involuteinterpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified inparameter No. 1431 is effective.2 If...

  • Page 827

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL801#71602#6LS2#5#4CSD#3BS2#2#1#0FWB[Data type] BitFWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration ...

  • Page 828

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL802CSD In the function for automatically reducing a feedrate at corners,0 : Angles are used for controlling the feedrate.1 : Differences in feedrates are used for controlling the feedrate.LS2 Acceleration/deceleration afte...

  • Page 829

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL803NOTE1 For linear acceleration/deceleration, the function of linearacceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation isrequired.2 For bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, the function ofbell–shaped acceler...

  • Page 830

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8041771Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation in the advanced preview control mode (time used to reach the maxi-mum machining speed during linear acceleration/dece...

  • Page 831

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL805Block A (G01)θθAngle formed by two straightlinesBlock A (G02)Block B (G01)Block B (G01)Angle formed an arc tangent andstraight line1780Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration func...

  • Page 832

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL806Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in theparameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached)during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By usingthis parame...

  • Page 833

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL807@ Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before in-terpolationParameter descriptionParameter No.Parameter descriptionNormal modeAdvanced previewcontrol modeAcceleration/deceleration type (A type/B typ...

  • Page 834

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL808NOTEThe optional functions usable in the advanced previewcontrol mode are listed below. When using an optionalfunction other than those listed below, turn off the advancedpreview control mode before using the function,...

  • Page 835

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL809NOTES Workpiece coordinate systemS Figure copy (M series)S Workpiece coordinate system presetS Cutter compensation B (M series)S Cutter compensation C (M series)S Tool–nose radius compensation (T series)S Corner arcS ...

  • Page 836

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL810Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors includemachining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at highspeed by an ...

  • Page 837

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL811NameFunctionAbsolute/incremental com-mandCombined use possible in the blockSequence number5 digitsTape codeEIA, ISOTape formatWord address formatControl in/outYesOptional block skipYesCircle radius R specificationYesAut...

  • Page 838

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL812G18: Plane selection (ZpXp plane)where, Yp is the Y–axis or its parallel axis;G19: Plane selection (YpZp plane)where, Zp is the Z–axis or its parallel axis.G38: Cutter compensation C with vector heldG39: Cutter comp...

  • Page 839

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL813When feed per minute is specified, this function reads several tens ofblocks ahead to perform acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,that is, to apply acceleration/deceleration to the specified feedrate.When acc...

  • Page 840

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL814To ensure that the feedrate specified for a block is reached when the blockis executed, deceleration is started in the previous block.Specified feedrate Feedrate after accel-eration/decelerationbefore interpolation isa...

  • Page 841

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL815To use this function, set bit 7 (BDO) and bit 1 (NBL) of parameter No.8402 to 1, and also set the following parameters:Parameter No. 8400: Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration used for ac-celeration/deceleration bef...

  • Page 842

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL816D When maximum acceleration is not reached+AccelerationTimeFeedrateTime–The tool is accelerated to a specified feedrate, starting at the beginning ofa block.The tool can be accelerated over multiple blocks.Feedrate co...

  • Page 843

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL817When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrateis less than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, thefeedrate is automatically clamped to a feedrate from which the tool ...

  • Page 844

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL818D At the end of accelerationÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇFeedrateTimeClamp feedrateTotal travel of theto...

  • Page 845

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL819When the feed hold function is used during acceleration, control isperformed as described below.D While applying constant or increasing accelerationStarting at the point where the feed hold function is specified, theacc...

  • Page 846

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL820If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, thecorner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determinationfunction, look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation t...

  • Page 847

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL821When the single block function is specified while look–aheadbell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used,control is performed as described below.(1) A + Bx Remaining travel for the tool in the ...

  • Page 848

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL822(1) Ax Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed whenthe single block function is specifiedThe tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrate is 0 uponcompletion of the execution of the block that wa...

  • Page 849

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL823The tool is decelerated (or accelerated) over multiple blocks until thefeedrate becomes 0.FeedrateTimeSingle block function specifiedCAUTION1 Depending on the stop point and remaining blocks, two ormore acceleration/dec...

  • Page 850

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL824CAUTION1 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrateoverride function is changed, the acceleration/decelerationcurve must be recalculated while the tool is actually movingalong an axis. For this reason, ...

  • Page 851

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL825(3) The acceleration/deceleration change time is constant. If decelerationbecomes necessary during acceleration, an acceleration/decelerationchange occurs for the constant time specified in parameter No. 8416.This mean...

  • Page 852

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL826This function reads several tens of blocks ahead to exercise automaticfeedrate control.A feedrate is determined on the basis of the conditions listed below. If aspecified feedrate exceeds a calculated feedrate, acceler...

  • Page 853

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL827In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate for the tool is controlledas described below.- The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the specifiedfeedrate difference at the corner along each axis, the to...

  • Page 854

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL828Suppose that the specified feedrate for the tool is 1,000 mm/min, and thatthe direction of tool movement changes by 90 degrees (from along theX–axis to along the Y–axis). Suppose also that an allowable feedratediff...

  • Page 855

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL829As shown below, when a curve is formed by very short successive linesegments, there is no significant feedrate difference along each axis ateach corner. Consequently, the tool need not be decelerated to compen-sate for...

  • Page 856

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL830Feedrate alongthe X–axisN1N2YXN3N4N6N7N8Feedrate alongthe Y–axisFeedrate alongthe tangent tothe pathN1N5N9N1N5N9N9N5

  • Page 857

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL831When a block specifies circular feed per minute and bit 3 (CIR) ofparameter No. 8475 is set to 1, the feedrate of the tool is automaticallydetermined so that the acceleration along each axis does not exceed anallowable ...

  • Page 858

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL832This function can be used when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is setto 1.Fig. 7.1.14.2 (a)When the tool is moving up along the Z–axisFig. 7.1.14.2 (b)When the tool is moving down along the Z–axisθCutting the wor...

  • Page 859

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL833XY planeZ30 deg45deg60deg90degArea 1Area 2Area 3Area 4CAUTIONThe feedrate determination function that is based on cuttingload uses an NC command to determine the direction ofmovement along the Z–axis. This means that...

  • Page 860

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL834Involute interpolation automatic speed control overrides a specifiedfeedrate automatically, in the following two ways, during involuteinterpolation to obtain a high–quality surface with improved machiningprecision.D O...

  • Page 861

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL835(2) Override near the basic circleNear the basic circuit, the change in curvature of an involute curve isrelatively large. If such areas are cut at a programmed feedrate, a heavyload may be placed on the cutter, preven...

  • Page 862

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL836[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates that the system is set to high–precision contour control mode(HPCC mode).[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 if G05 P10000 (HPCC mode ON) is specified in aprogr...

  • Page 863

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8378400Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/m...

  • Page 864

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL838#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08402BDODSTBLKNBL[Data type] BitBDO, NBL Set the type of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.BDONBLMeaning00Acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is of lin-ear type11Acceleration/dec...

  • Page 865

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL839In case this parameter is set to 1, Fine acceleration/deceleration is disabledat the rapid travers in HPCC mode.Type of rapid traverseMSUSG0STGHG0Executed on CNC side100—Executed as G01 with the RISC board—10—Exec...

  • Page 866

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8408416The time required to the maximum acceleration in advanced preview bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation[Data type] Two–word[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999This parameter s...

  • Page 867

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8418410Allowable velocity difference in velocity determination considering the velocity difference at corners[Data type] Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-BIS-CMillimeter m...

  • Page 868

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8428456Area–2 override[Data type] Word[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 1 to 100 (Standard setting: 80)This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculationconsidering the cutting load.8457Area–3 over...

  • Page 869

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8438465Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min10 – 2400001 – 100000Inch ...

  • Page 870

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL844#78475#6#5#4#3CIR#2BIP#1#0[Data type] BitCIR The function of automatic feedrate control considering acceleration anddeceleration during circular interpolation is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.When 1 is set, parameter No. 8470 f...

  • Page 871

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8451768Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in HPCC mode[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] ms[Valid data range] 8 to 512NOTEThe function for linear acceleration/deceleration afterinterpol...

  • Page 872

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8465616Override value at the start of override 2 near the basic circle5617Override value at the start of override 3 near the basic circle5618Override value at the start of override 4 near the basic circle5619Override value...

  • Page 873

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL847NOTEWhen parameter No. 5621 or 5622 is set to 0, constant accelerationcontrol is not applied during involute interpolation inhigh–precision contour control mode.#76901#6#5#4#3PSF#2#1#0[Data type] BitPSF In high–prec...

  • Page 874

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL848LM2 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for the second storedstroke limit is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode:0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 is follow...

  • Page 875

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL849#78485#6#5CDS#4INV#3PRW#2G02#1G81#0G51[Data type] BitG51 In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, the scaling/coordinatesystem rotation functions are:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.G81 In high–precision contour cont...

  • Page 876

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL850NOTEIf there is a series of very short blocks, for each of which therate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is low,the actual feedrate may not reach the programmedfeedrate.NOTE1 If the upper limit for aut...

  • Page 877

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL851When executing a G00 command when bit 7 of parameter No. 8403 (SG0)is set to 1, note the following:WARNINGLinear interpolation positioning is performed.CAUTION1 The G00 command is replaced with the G01 commandupon being...

  • Page 878

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL852When a rapid traverse command is specified during automatic operation,the function positioning by optimal acceleration can be used to adjust therapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain, according to the amounto...

  • Page 879

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL853When rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is used, T1 inthe figure below and the rapid traverse rate are adjusted. T2 is notadjusted.Rapid traverse rateTimeT2/2T1T2/2When angular axis control is used,...

  • Page 880

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL854#76131#6#5#4#3#2#1#0OAD[Data type] Bit axisOAD The function for positioning by optimul acceleration is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.6141Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input, or rotation axis)6142Distance D2 for level 2 (me...

  • Page 881

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL855NOTE1 The settings must satisfy the relationship D1 < D2 < D3 < D4< D5 < D6.2 Up to seven levels can be used for adjustment. When usingfour levels, for example, set D4 to 99999999.3 For diameter programm...

  • Page 882

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8566181Level 1 servo loop gain6182Level 2 servo loop gain6183Level 3 servo loop gain6184Level 4 servo loop gain6185Level 5 servo loop gain6186Level 6 servo loop gain6187Level 7 servo loop gain[Data type] Word axis[Unit of ...

  • Page 883

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL857With AI nano contour control, a position command to be output to thedigital servo system is calculated in nanometers by nano interpolation, sothat the machine moves very smoothly for improved surface precision.G05.1 Q_...

  • Page 884

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL858A program conventionally used (IS–B command or IS–C command) canbe used, and a position command to be output to the digital servo systemis calculated in nanometers. As a result, a smooth position command isoutput t...

  • Page 885

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL859(Example of deceleration)To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is reduced from thatof the previous block.F3F2F1N1N2Point 1Point 2Specified feedrateFeedrate resultingfrom acceleration/deceleration befo...

  • Page 886

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL860Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feedrate in theAI contour control/AI nano contour control mode can be switched fromthe linear type to the bell–shaped type. The bell–shaped type can applys...

  • Page 887

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL861Acceleration/deceleration is performed as described below when thefeedrate is changed.Deceleration: In order to end deceleration before entering into a block thatchanges the feedrate, bell–shaped deceleration isperfor...

  • Page 888

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL862N2N1F1000F500F1000F500F1000F500N1N1N2N2N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;N2 Y100. ;FeedrateFeedrateFeedrateTimeTimeTimeWhen deceleration is notperformed at the cornerWhen deceleration is per-formed at the cornerTool path when t...

  • Page 889

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL863When a curve is made up of a series of short straight lines as shown in thefigure below, the difference in feedrate on each axis at each corner is notlarge. Therefore, deceleration by feedrate difference is not effecti...

  • Page 890

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL864N1N5N9N1N5N9Without feedrate clampingWithout feedrate clampingTongent direction feed rateFeedrate on YFeedrate on XThis function can suppress acceleration in an arc machining block to anallowable level by clamping the f...

  • Page 891

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL865NOTEAs the specified arc radius becomes smaller, the maximumallowable feedrate v falls. To prevent the maximumallowable feedrate from becoming too small, the lower limitfor feedrate clamping based on the arc radius can...

  • Page 892

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL866tbtbtbtbtatatctcFeedrateLinear acceleration/decelerationBell–shaped acceleration/decelerationta: Depends on linear acceleration/deceleration.tb: Bell–shaped time constanttc: Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleratio...

  • Page 893

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL867During involute interpolation, the following two overrides are applied toa specified cutting feedrate to produce a cutting surface of highermachining precision:(1) Override at the time of cutter compensation inside offs...

  • Page 894

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL868When the curvature radius at a cutting point reaches a value in the rangespecified by (Rlmt1) to (Rlmt5), an override is applied as describedbelow.When Rlmt1 > Rcp " Rofs y Rlmt2OVRb = 100 – OVR2Rlmt1 – Rlmt...

  • Page 895

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL869NOTE1 When an override in the neighborhood of a basic circle isenabled, an override at the time of cutter compensationinside offsetting is disabled. The two overrides cannot beenabled at the same time.2 When the distan...

  • Page 896

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL870NameDescriptionChopping Hobbing machine function Simple electric gear box Learning control Preview repetitive control Inch/metric switching(G20, G21)f*InterlockfSpecified–axis interlockf The movement of the tool on al...

  • Page 897

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL871NameDescriptionExact stop (G09)fExact stop mode (G61)fTapping mode (G63)fLinear interpolation (G01)fCircular interpolation (G02, G03)f (Multiple quadrants allowed)Exponential interpolation(G02.3, G03.3) Dwell (G04)f (Fo...

  • Page 898

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL872NameDescription2nd, 3rd, and 4th referenceposition return (G30)f*Floating reference positionreturn (G30.1)f*Normal direction control(G41.1, G42.1)f (AI contour control)Bit 2 (ANM) of parameter No. 5484 must beset to 1. ...

  • Page 899

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL873NameDescriptionFeedrate override0% to 254%Second feedrate override Feed by F command withone digit To enable feedrate changing by the manualhandle, bit 1 (AF1) of parameter No. 7055must be set to 1.Inverse time feed (G9...

  • Page 900

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL874NameDescriptionProgrammable data input(G10)f*Only the tool offset value, workpiece originoffset, and parameter can be modified.Custom macro Bf See the item of notes on using custom mac-ros.Custom macro common vari-able ...

  • Page 901

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL875NameDescriptionSimple spindle synchroniza-tionfRigid tappingf*Bit 5 (G8S) of parameter No. 1602 or bit 3(ACR) of parameter No. 7051 must be set to1. (AI contour control)f*Bit 3 (ACR) of parameter No. 7051 must beset to...

  • Page 902

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL876NameDescriptionProgram restartf As an acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for movement to a restart position,the following parameters are used:When exponential acceleration/decelera-tion is used: Parameter No. 1624 ...

  • Page 903

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL877Before G05.1 Q1, the following modal codes must be specified. If thiscondition is not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 will be issued.G codeDescriptionG00G01G02G03PositioningLinear interpolationCircular interpolation (CW)...

  • Page 904

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL878Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation1770[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS–A, IS–BIS–CMillimeter machi...

  • Page 905

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8791784Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/decelerationbefore interpolation[Data type] WordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS–A, IS–BIS–CMillime...

  • Page 906

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL880NOTE1 When 0 is set, the above control is not performed.2 When stroke check is invalid, the above control is alsoinvalid.3 The above control is valid only for stored stroke check 1.4 The above control is exercised on th...

  • Page 907

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8811731Arc radius for the upper limit imposed on feedrate[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 1000 to 99999999This parame...

  • Page 908

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8825611Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 1(Rlmt1)5612Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 2(Rlmt2)5613Radius of curvature a...

  • Page 909

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL883The curvature radiuses Rlmt1 through Rlmt5 and the override valuesOVR2 through OVR5 must have the relationships indicated below. If thefollowing relationships are not satisfied, overrides in the neighborhoodof a basic ...

  • Page 910

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL884NOTETo select bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, the optionfor rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration isrequired.BEL In AI contour control mode or AI nano contour control:0 : Linear acceleration/de...

  • Page 911

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL885#76901#6#5#4#3PSF#2#1#0[Data type] BitPSF In high–precision contour control mode (M series), AI contour controlmode (M series), AI nano–contour control mode (M series), or advancedpreview control mode, position swit...

  • Page 912

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL886When the serial spindle does not support advanced preview control ofrigid tapping, AI contour control mode or AI nano contour control modemust be turned off in rigid tapping.Setting this parameter and satisfying the fol...

  • Page 913

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL887#77054#6#5AIL#4#3AZR#2#1AIR#0HPL[Data type] BitHPL If HPCC mode is specified in AI contour control mode or AI nano contourcontrol mode and a command unavailable in HPCC mode is found, theNC processes the command:0 : In ...

  • Page 914

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL888NOTE1 When an index table indexing axis is specified, G27, G28,G30, G30.1, or G53 is executed with AI contour controlturned off, regardless of the setting of bit 3 (AZR) ofparameter No. 7054.2 When G27, G28, G30, G30.1,...

  • Page 915

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL889NOTE1 If an axis for which a reference position is established andan axis for which no reference position is established aresimultaneously specified with G28 when bit 2 (ALZ) ofparameter No. 7055 is set to 1, G28 is exe...

  • Page 916

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL890(In the tables below, the AI contour control mode and AI nano contourcontrol mode are referred to as AI contour control.)(1) Parameters related to linear acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolationParameter No.Paramet...

  • Page 917

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL891(4) Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radiusParameter No.ParameterStandardmodeAdvancedpreview controlAI contour controlArc radius for the upper limitof feedrate1731Upper limit imposed on fee-drate for arc r...

  • Page 918

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL892NumberMessageDescription5110IMPROPER G–CODE(G05.1 G1 MODE)An invalid G code is specified in AIcontour control mode or AI nano con-tour control mode.A command is specified for the indextable indexing axis in simple hig...

  • Page 919

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL8933 When the dry run signal is inverted from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 duringmovement along an axis, the speed of movement is increased orreduced to a specified speed without first being reduced to zero.4 When a no–movement...

  • Page 920

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL894When a system variable listed in the table below is used in a macroprogram, and the macro program needs to be executed after the blockimmediately preceding the macro program is executed, an M code(parameter No. 3411 to ...

  • Page 921

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL895Example)O0001O2000N1 X10.Y10.;(Mxx;) Inserts an M code block for suppressingbuffering.N2 M98P2000;N100 #1=#5041; (Reads the current positionalong the X–axis.)N3 Y200.0; N101 #2=#5042; (Read the current positionalong t...

  • Page 922

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL896G05.1 Q_ ;Q1: AI advanced preview control mode onQ0: AI advanced preview control mode offNOTE1 Always specify G05.1 in an independent block.2 AI advanced preview control mode is also canceled by areset.(1) Look–ah...

  • Page 923

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL897NOTEWhen a value of ”0” is set as the character code, ”AI APC”blinks.For other parameters, see the description of ”Parameter” in the subsectiondescribing AI contour control.NOTE1 Some parameters of functions...

  • Page 924

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL898The detection unit is normally used as the unit for output from the NC tothe servo system. The nano–interpolation function can perform output tothe servo system in thousandths of the detection unit to increase themac...

  • Page 925

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL899There are the following types of acceleration/deceleration: Linearacceleration/deceleration before interpolation and bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation.Deceleration is started in a prior block ...

  • Page 926

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL900Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate specified for the targetblock is reached at the execution.F3F2F1N1N2FeedrateSpecified feedrateFeedrate determined byacceleration/decelerationbefore interpolation TimeSet th...

  • Page 927

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL901Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the maximum tangentialacceleration which does not exceed the acceleration set for each axis.(Example)Allowable acceleration for the X–axis: 1000 mm/sec2Allowable accelerati...

  • Page 928

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL902Deceleration is started in a prior block so that the feedrate specified forthe target block is reached at the beginning of the block.Deceleration extending over multiple blocks can be performed.FeedrateDeceleration star...

  • Page 929

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL903B: Travel distance required until the feedrate after acceleration/deceleration terminates is decreased to feedrate 0(b) When A + B is longer than the remaining travel distance of theblock being executed when a single bl...

  • Page 930

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL904(b) When A is longer than the remaining travel distance of the blockbeing executed when a single block is specifiedDeceleration may extend over multiple blocks and be stopped.Deceleration is stopped with the method desc...

  • Page 931

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL905In fine HPCC mode, blocks are read in advance to automatically controlthe feedrate.The feedrate is determined according to the following conditions. If thespecified feedrate exceeds the determined feedrate, acceleratio...

  • Page 932

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL906(b) The feedrate in a block is obtained according to the condition for theacceleration for each axis at the corners at the start and end points ofthe block. Deceleration is performed so that the feedrate in the blockdo...

  • Page 933

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL907With look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, thetangential feedrate is smoothly changed. For this reason, no path error iscaused by acceleration/deceleration delays, but noacceleration/deceleration...

  • Page 934

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL908The method for deceleration according to the feedrate difference differsdepending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500.When this parameter is set to ”0”, the maximum feedrate at which theallowable fe...

  • Page 935

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL909When continuous minute straight lines form curves as shown in theexample in the figure below, the feedrate difference for each axis at eachcorner is not so large. For this reason, deceleration according to thefeedrate ...

  • Page 936

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL910The method for feedrate determination according to the accelerationdiffers depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500.When this parameter is set to ”0”, the maximum feedrate at which theallowable...

  • Page 937

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL911This function is valid when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to1.ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀFig. 7.1.18.2 (c) When the tool moves upwar...

  • Page 938

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL91290°60°30°45°X–Y planeRange 1CAUTION1 The function of determining the feedrate according to thecutting load is effective only when the tool is attached in thedirection parallel to the Z–axis. For this reason, th...

  • Page 939

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL913The following shows the override specifications for the feedratedetermined by the function of decelerating according to the feedratedifference in look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation orthat of dec...

  • Page 940

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9141768Time constant used for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation inmode in which look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Word[Unit...

  • Page 941

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL915Set the acceleration change time for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (time required for changing from theconstant feedrate status (A) to the constant acceleration/decelerationstatus (C) in w...

  • Page 942

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9168456Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting loadin AI high–precision contour control8457Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting loadi...

  • Page 943

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9178465Maximum feedrate for automatic feedrate control[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] 2–wordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min1 to 6000001 ...

  • Page 944

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL918When this parameter is set to 1, the feedrate decreased by feedratedetermination according to the feedrate difference and acceleration isreduced by up to about 30% as compared with the feedrate determinedwhen the parame...

  • Page 945

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL919NOTEIn AI high precision contour control mode or AI NANO highprecision contour control mode, when very small linearinterpolation blocks which have the following 1) condition,are commanded continuously, since these comma...

  • Page 946

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL920NOTE(2) Parameter No.19503#7 (FLP)This parameter is available in case both CNC software andRISC software are the following series and edition.In this condition, this parameter No.19503#7 (FLP) shouldbe set to ”0”. A...

  • Page 947

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL921If the override is enabled for the function of decelerating according to thecutting load, the feedrate may be lower than the lowest feedrate.When AI high–precision contour control is not used, the lowest feedratefor d...

  • Page 948

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL922For the following functions, high–speed operations are executed on theRISC processor:S AI high–precision contour controlS AI nano high–precision contour controlS Tool tip controlS Tool length compensation alon...

  • Page 949

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL923When execution of the above commands on the CNC is specified, AIhigh–precision contour control, AI nano high–precision contour control,tool tip control, tool length compensation along the tool axis,three–dimension...

  • Page 950

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL924FunctionRemarksSpecificsLeast input increment0.001 mm, 0.001 deg,0.0001 inchOne–tenth input increment0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, 0.00001 inchInch/metric conversionSwitching between inch and metric modes cannot be per-forme...

  • Page 951

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL925FunctionRemarksSpecificsInterpolation functionsPositioningG00The advanced preview control function, multibuffer function, AIhigh–precision contour control function excluding nano–inter-polation, and AI nano high–p...

  • Page 952

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL926FunctionRemarksSpecificsLook–ahead linear accelera-tion/deceleration before inter-polationLook–ahead bell–shaped ac-celeration/deceleration beforeinterpolationConstant accelerationchange time typeAI high–precisi...

  • Page 953

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL927FunctionRemarksSpecificsCoordinate system rotationG68, G69By setting the related parameter, AI high–precision contourcontrol or AI nano high–precision contour control mode can beturned on and off in coordinate syste...

  • Page 954

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL928FunctionRemarksSpecificsTool tip controlG43.4, G43.5A command which automatically cancels AI high–precision con-tour control or AI nano high–precision contour control modetemporarily cannot be specified. An indepen...

  • Page 955

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL929D When bit 0 (R_SCL) of parameter No. 19600 is set to 1, G51 isspecified in the program. (Scaling)D When bit 1 (R_MIR) of parameter No. 19600 is set to 1, G51.1 isspecified in the program. (Programmable mirror image)D...

  • Page 956

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL930X–, Y–, Z–, and A–axes Axes for which control on the RISC processoris enabledB– and C–axes Axes for which control on the RISC processoris disabled#78480#6RI2#5RI1#4RI0#3#2#1#0[Input type] Parameter input[Da...

  • Page 957

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL931R_ROT The coordinate system rotation function is:0 : Executed on the CNC.1 : Assumed to be 5–axis control mode and executed on the RISCprocessor.R_3DC The three–dimensional coordinate conversion function is:0 : Exec...

  • Page 958

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL932S AI contour controlG05.1Q1, G5.1Q0S Hypothetical axis interpolationG07S Advanced preview controlG08 (Use AI high–precisioncontour control.)S Polar coordinate interpolationG12.1, G13.1S Polar coordinate commandG15, G1...

  • Page 959

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL933S Feed per revolutionG95S Constant surface speed controlG96, G97S In–feed controlG160, G161In AI high–precision contour control, AI nano high–precision contourcontrol, and 5–axis control modes, the following fun...

  • Page 960

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL934The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move commandrelated to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but byhigh–speed linear interpolation. This function enables the high–speedex...

  • Page 961

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL935In high–speed linear interpolation mode, the NC interpolation period canbe changed. As the interpolation period decreases, the machining speedand precision increase.IT2, IT1, and IT0 bits (bits 6, 5, and 4 of paramet...

  • Page 962

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL936#77501#6IT2#5IT1#4IT0#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitIT2 IT1 IT0000: The interpolation period in high–speed linearinterpolation mode is 8 ms.010: The interpolation period in high–speed linearinterpolation mode is 4 ms.001: T...

  • Page 963

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL937In Look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as shown inthe figure below.T1: Time determined from the specified speed and the specified accel...

  • Page 964

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL938T1T2SpeedLinear acceleration/deceleration not reachingspecified acceleration/decelerationTimeSpecifiedspeedT1Fig. 7.1.21(b)If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified accelerationoccurs in AI contour...

  • Page 965

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL939The acceleration/deceleration reference speed is the feedrate used as thereference for calculating optimum acceleration. In Fig. 7.1.21(c), it isequivalent to the specified speed used to determine T1′ and T2′.There...

  • Page 966

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL940Even if the feedrate is changed during the execution of the machiningprogram, the acceleration/deceleration reference speed specified with theabove command remains in effect. If this occurs, the machining time maybecom...

  • Page 967

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL941(1) If the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation timeconstant T2’ is calculated under the condition that the bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation must not have a linearpor...

  • Page 968

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9427066Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration time constant change function inAI Contour control mode or AI Nano contour control mode[Input type] Parameter input[Data type...

  • Page 969

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL943To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automaticallyapplied when the tool starts and ends its movement (Fig. 7.2.1.1).FRRapid traverse rateTimeTRTRFR : Rapid traverse rate: Acceleration/deceleration...

  • Page 970

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL944Rapid traverse:Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis isset by parameter 1620)Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant peraxis is set by parameter 1622)Jog feed :Exponential ...

  • Page 971

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL945NOTEThis parameter is effective only when the function ofbell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation incutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, thesetting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No...

  • Page 972

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL946Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration orlinear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis.Exc...

  • Page 973

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9471626Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] ms[Valid data range] 0 to 4000Set the time constant used for exponential accelerati...

  • Page 974

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL948[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal disables rapid traverse block overlap.#7G053#6ROVLP#5#4#3#2#1#0#71601#6#5#4RTO#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitRTO Rapid traverse block overlap is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performe...

  • Page 975

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL949N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ;Fh: Rapid traverse feedrateα: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio)Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh×α/ 100FhFdX–axis feedratetW...

  • Page 976

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL950This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traversebell–shaped acceleration/deceleration T1 and T2 are specified inparameter Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/dece...

  • Page 977

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL951D When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1used in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and setparameter No. 1621 to time constant T2.D When the function is not provided...

  • Page 978

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL952If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed isenabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleration isperformed as follows:Cutting feed: Linear acceleration/deceleration (con...

  • Page 979

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL953Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is anoptional function. This function is enabled when the CTL bit (bit 0 ofparameter No. 1610) is specified. If bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration ...

  • Page 980

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9541624Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.[Data type] Word...

  • Page 981

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL955NOTEIf the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration afterinterpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponentialacceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective ofthe setting.1 If linear acce...

  • Page 982

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL956The bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolationprovides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce stress and strainon the machine. If this function is enabled (bit 1 of parameter No. 1...

  • Page 983

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL957#71610#6#5#4JGLx#3#2#1#0CTLxCTBx[Data type] Bit axisCTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after...

  • Page 984

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9581622Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in cutting feed for each axis[Data type] ...

  • Page 985

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL959NOTE1 If bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolationduring cutting feed is enabled, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during adry run. Bell–shaped acceleratio...

  • Page 986

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL960The function of linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in-creases or decreases the feedrate specified in the tangential direction.If the feedrate command is changedD Type AAcceleration/deceleration is sta...

  • Page 987

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL961Deceleration is performed when the following condition issatisfied:Distance to stored stroke limit 1for each axisDistance needed to reduce the cur-rent feedrate (tangential feedrate)to that specified in parameter No.178...

  • Page 988

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL962FeedrateParameter 1Parameter 2TimeParameter 1: Parameter No. 1630Parameter 2: Parameter No. 1631NOTE1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631,linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isd...

  • Page 989

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9631784Feedrate when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation[Data type] WordIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter mach...

  • Page 990

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL964NOTE1 If a block without a move command is found duringacceleration/deceleration before interpolation, themovement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in theprevious block.2 If a one–shot G code is specified during...

  • Page 991

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL965Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range ischecked.If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the positionduring deceleration. If the position is found to exceed the speci...

  • Page 992

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL966.#7INP8F104#6INP7#5INP6#4INP5#3INP4#2INP3#1INP2#0INP1#71601#6#5NCI#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitNCI Inposition check at deceleration0 : Performed1 : Not performed1826In–position width for each axis[Data type] Word axis[U...

  • Page 993

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL967If separate in–position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse isexecuted, a small in–position check range can be specified between thosecutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A largein–p...

  • Page 994

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL9681826In–position width for each axis[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 0 to 32767The in–position width is set for each axis.When the deviation of the machine position from the specif...

  • Page 995

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL969Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of twoblocks during cutting feed. Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.FeedrateTimeThis part causes the corner ofthe tool path to be rou...

  • Page 996

    B–63523EN–1/037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL970NOTEIf the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executeduntil the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cuttingblock has been completed.This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due todelay cau...

  • Page 997

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION9718 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

  • Page 998

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03972When an M code address is programmed, a code signal and a strobe signalare sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or offits functions.Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,however, up to three M code...

  • Page 999

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION9733. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output 1000 or 10000when the decimal point input is omitted in the inch input system, usingthe parameter AUX (No.3405#0). When DPI=1.Command Output valueWhen AUX is 1: B110000When AUX is 0: B11000Th...

  • Page 1000

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03974(6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN,specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNCsets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal hasbeen received.(7) When the strobe signal is ...

  • Page 1001

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION9752b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion(1)(2)(3)(*2)TMFTFINM commandMxxMove commandCode signals M00–M31Strobe signalMFPMC side actionEnd signalFINDistributionend signalsDEN(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)(9)[Classification] Output signal[...

  • Page 1002

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03976[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. Themiscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to outputsignals as indicated below.Command programOutput signalM00M01M02M30DM00DM0...

  • Page 1003

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION977[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basicprocedure” above.[Classification] Input signal[F...

  • Page 1004

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03978The DEN signal turns to “0” when:· The execution of one block is completedNOTEA parameter NCI (No.1601#5) can specify, whether to onlycheck if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, orto also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced...

  • Page 1005

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION9793010Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF[Data type] Word[Unit of data] 1 ms[Valid data range] 16 to 32767The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S,T, and B codes are sent, respectively.M, S, T, B codeMF, SF, TF, B...

  • Page 1006

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03980NOTEThe time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is nota multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.Example: When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.3030Allowable number of digits for the M code3031Allowable number of digits for th...

  • Page 1007

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION981#73405#6#5#4#3#2#1#0AUX[Data type] BitAUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous functionspecified with a decimal point0 : Assumed to be 0.0011 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 isassumed, or for input in...

  • Page 1008

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03982[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 to 65535When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameterNos. 3421 and 3422, 3433 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed...

  • Page 1009

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION983NOTE1 When a move command and miscellaneous function arespecified in the same block, the commands are executed inone of the following two ways:i) Simultaneous execution of the move command andmiscellaneous function commands.ii) Executing miscellaneous fu...

  • Page 1010

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03984Series16i/18i/160i/180i/OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)II.11.1Miscellaneous function (M code)16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.11.42nd Auxiliary function (B code)OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.11....

  • Page 1011

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION985Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued. This function is used to check a program.[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, th...

  • Page 1012

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03986[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL.[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when:· The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “1”This signal turns to “0” when:· ...

  • Page 1013

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION987So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, thisfunction allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block.Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to themachine. This means that compared with the...

  • Page 1014

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03988TFINTMFM command (MaaMbbMcc;)Code signalM00-M31Strobe signalMFCode signalM200-M215Strobe signalMF2Code signalM300-M315Strobe signalMF3PMC side operationEnd signalFIN[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates that second and third auxiliary functio...

  • Page 1015

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION989#7M3B3404#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitM3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block0 : One1 : Up to threeCAUTION1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not bespecified together with another M code.2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M0...

  • Page 1016

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03990Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.11.2Multiple M commands in a singleblockOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.11.2Multiple M commands in a singleblockSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MAN...

  • Page 1017

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION991To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high–speed M/S/T/Binterface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signalsof the M/S/T/B functions.Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for strobe signaland completion sig...

  • Page 1018

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03992MxxMyyNext blockCode signalStrobe signal MFPMC side operationMiscellaneous function completion signal MFINFig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high–speed systemMxxMyyNext blockCode signalStrobe signal MFPMC side operationCompletion signal FINFig. 8.4 (b) ...

  • Page 1019

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION993[Classification] Input signal[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using thehigh–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turnsto “1” and “0...

  • Page 1020

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03994[Operation] Refer to the description of the output conditions and procedure describedin “basic procedure.”[Classification] Input signal[Function] Indicates that the external operation function has been completed for thehigh–speed M, S, T, or B inter...

  • Page 1021

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION995Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the otherduring machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program foreach path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. Whenan M code for waiting is specified in a...

  • Page 1022

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03996#7G063#6#5#4#3#2#1NOWT#0#7F063#6WATO#5#4#3#2#1#0#18110Waiting M code range (minimum value)[Data type] Two–word[Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999This parameter specifies the minimum value of the waiting M code.The waiting M code range is specified ...

  • Page 1023

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION997This function checks whether combinations of M codes (up to three)specified in one block are correct.The function has two purposes. One of the purposes is to alarm if an Mcode which must not be combined with any other M codes is combinedwith another. Th...

  • Page 1024

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03998For M codes which must be used separately from other M codes, alwaysset their group number to “1”. Such M codes include M00, M01, M02,M30, M98, and M99. For M codes for which the CNC performs internalprocessing in addition to sending them to the mac...

  • Page 1025

    B–63523EN–1/038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION999(iii) No. 3441 = 234, No. 3442 = 345, No. 3443 = 456, No. 3444 = 567In this case, item numbers 100 to 199 correspond to M234 to M333,200 to 299 correspond to M345 to M444, 300 to 399 correspond toM456 to M555, and 400 to 499 correspond to M567 to M666. T...

  • Page 1026

    8. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031000Now pressing the [READ] key displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6(d).>MDI* * * * * * * * * *00 : 00 : 00CANCELEXECFig. 8.6 (d)To execute the read operation, just press the [EXEC] key.Pressing the [PUNCH] key on the screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (...

  • Page 1027

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10019 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

  • Page 1028

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1002When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobesignals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The codesignals are retained until another S code is issued.One S code is used for each block. Parameter No. 3031 can b...

  • Page 1029

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1003There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serialoutput and spindle analog output.The spindle serial output interface can control up to two serial spindles.The spindle analog output interface can control one analog spindle.The t...

  • Page 1030

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1004The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.f=Available ×=UnavailableSpindleSerial spindleAnalog spindleSpindleFunctionFirst serialspindleSecond serialspindleWhen used as thefirst spindle (withno serial SP)When used as ...

  • Page 1031

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1005NOTE1 The multispindle function is necessary. The function cannotbe used for the first and second spindles simultaneously.2 The multispindle function can control the speed of threespindles and switch the feedback signal between twoposition coders. ...

  • Page 1032

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1006· Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle<G0070 to G0073> (input), <F0045 to F0048>(output) → for the first serial spindle<G0074 to G0077> (input), <F0049 to F0052> (output) → for the second serial spindleThes...

  • Page 1033

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1007#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03701SS2ISI[Data type] BitISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used.0 : Used1 : Not usedNOTE1 This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindleinterface option is provided. The parameter is used whenthe CNC is s...

  • Page 1034

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1008NumberMessageContents749S–SPINDLE LSI ERRORIt is serial communication error while system is executing after powersupply on. Following reasons can be considered.1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cableis cut.2) MAIN CP...

  • Page 1035

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1009 #7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0400SAISS2SSRPOSSICSIC 0: No module is present for spindle serial output.1: A module for spindle serial output is present.POS 0: No module is present for spindle analog output.1: A module for spindle analog output is present.SSR 0: Sp...

  • Page 1036

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1010410First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)411First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min–1)412Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)413Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min–1)To display the load and speed meter readin...

  • Page 1037

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1011This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the positioncoder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR).9.3SPINDLE SPEEDCONTROLGeneral

  • Page 1038

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1012The following chart summarizes spindle speed control.Output to the PMC(used for ladders)Switching in the machine←From the PMCMachining program, etc.↓⋅ Processing for gear change(S command→ spindle motor speed con-version)Clamp the speed accor...

  • Page 1039

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1013The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machiningprograms, etc. for the CNC.For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC convertsthe specified surface speed to the spindle speed.In the M series with bit 4 (GTT) of para...

  • Page 1040

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1014Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that isactually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must havesome provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindlemotor.There are two types of gear selecti...

  • Page 1041

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1015The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows:⋅ For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit.⋅ For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the a...

  • Page 1042

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1016NOTEIf a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than theacceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system,calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V usinga proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now,in response to the...

  • Page 1043

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1017GR3OGR2OGR1O10VVCVHVLABCSpindle speedcommand(S code input)A×Vmin4095C×Vmax4095B×Vmaxh4095A×Vmaxl4095VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spin...

  • Page 1044

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1018· Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (min–1) with low-speed gearswhen the command voltage is 10V· Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (min–1) with high-speed gearswhen the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage)· Spindle speed ...

  • Page 1045

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1019D When Gear select signal changeGear select signalSFS code read0VTFINTMFTMFTo next blockFINVLSpindle speed commandVHGR3O/GR2O/GR1OFig. 9.3 (e)Time chart when gear select signal changesIn this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of th...

  • Page 1046

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1020In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analogvoltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if youconsider them code signals from 0 ...

  • Page 1047

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1021Reference→ Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Outputmin–1/10VX–axis pres-ent valuePower magnetics cabinetGear change commandSpeedcontrolD-AconverterConstant surfacespeed controlMotor speed conversionFull scale conversionGear changer[Surface speed...

  • Page 1048

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1022Keep the following in mind: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issuedM03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speedcommand has been specified.According to...

  • Page 1049

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1023ENB2ENB Enable signalSpindle speedanalog voltageoutputSVCESESSVCENB1Control unitmax+10V2mAOutput impedance100ΩName Connector/PinSVCJA8A/7ESJA8A/5ENB1JA8A/8ENB2JA8A/9WARNINGSince the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay itthrough contacts.T...

  • Page 1050

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1024[Classification] Input signal[Function] The command output to the spindle is disabled.[Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0Vand the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is not output). When thissi...

  • Page 1051

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1025low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the commandoutput is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1,the command output is output regardless of ...

  • Page 1052

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1026→ When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%;otherwise, an override of 0% becomes effective, thus disabling thespindle from rotating.[Classification] Input signal[Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, ...

  • Page 1053

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1027[Classification] Output signal[Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command.[Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to thespindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the signal is logical 1.During ana...

  • Page 1054

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1028[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by theCNC to code signals 0 to 4095.[Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculatedby the CNC) and the va...

  • Page 1055

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1029#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0CONG027*SSTP3*SSTP2*SSTP1SWS3SWS2SWS1G028GR2GR1G029*SSTPSORSARSOV7G030SOV6SOV5SOV4SOV3SOV2SOV1SOV0R08IG032R07IR06IR05IR04IR03IR02IR01ISINDG033SSINSGNR12IR11IR10IR09I#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F001ENBF007SFS07F022S06S05S04S03S02S01S00S15F023S14S1...

  • Page 1056

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1030GST: The SOR signal is used for:0 : Spindle orientation1 : Gear shiftSGB: Gear switching method0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindlespeed at each gear are used for gear selection.)1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752...

  • Page 1057

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1031NOTE1 Type M:The gear selection signal is not entered externally. Inresponse to an S command, the CNC selects a gearaccording to the speed range for each gear specified inparameters. Then the CNC reports the selection of a gearby outputting the gea...

  • Page 1058

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1032#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03709SAM[Data type] BitSAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.)1 : 13730Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed[Data type] Word[Unit of data] 0.1 %[Valid d...

  • Page 1059

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1033(5) After setting the parameters, command “0”, confirm that the output is0V.NOTEThis parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.3732The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed duringspindle gear shift[Data type] ...

  • Page 1060

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1034Spindle motor speedMax. speed (4095, 10V)Spindle motor max.clamp speed(Parameter No. 3736)Spindle motor minimumclamp speed (Parameter No. 3735)Spindle speed (S command)NOTEIf the function of constant surface speed control or bit 4(GTT) of parameter N...

  • Page 1061

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10353741Maximum spindle speed for gear 13742Maximum spindle speed for gear 23743Maximum spindle speed for gear 33744Maximum spindle speed for gear 4[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767Set the maximum spindle speed correspon...

  • Page 1062

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10363751Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 23752Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 to 4095For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gearsare switched.Se...

  • Page 1063

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10373761Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping3762Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of paramete...

  • Page 1064

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10383772Maximum spindle speed[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed ofthe spindle is specified , or the speed of the ...

  • Page 1065

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1039CAUTIONThis section mentioned a spindle speed control that shouldbe prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary todesign the signals to the spindle control unit.Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and takenecessary actions on ...

  • Page 1066

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1040In a two–path lathe application, the additional path section (path No. 2)can have the same spindle interface as a one–path lathe (see Section 9.2.).Each spindle is controlled by a command issued by tool post 1 or 2.Which spindle is controlled by ...

  • Page 1067

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1041When an analog spindle is used, supplying the position coder feedbacksignal to the position coder interface of tool post 2 via an externaldistribution circuit makes it possible to use either tool post for threadcutting and feed per rotation.Tool post...

  • Page 1068

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1042The spindle interfaces for both tool posts are used.The spindle command select signals SLSPA <G063#2> and SLSPB<G063#3> (input) specify the tool post whose spindle command is to befollowed by each spindle.When the serial spindles are used...

  • Page 1069

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1043If either tool post uses an analog spindle as the first spindle, the spindlefeedback signals SLPCA<G064#2> and SLPCB<G064#3> (input)cannot cause the NC to select a position coder feedback signal.If both tool posts use an analog spindle, s...

  • Page 1070

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1044If the first spindle is a serial spindle, the second and third spindles can alsobe used in a two–path lathe application. (See Section 9.2.)In the following chart, all spindles are connected under two–spindlecontrol.Under one–spindle control, n...

  • Page 1071

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1045Optional functions for spindles are valid for both tool posts. However,you may want to use the optional functions for only one of the tool postsbecause of relationships with the interface and PMC ladder.Parameters are available to disable the follow...

  • Page 1072

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1046(2) In the 2-spindle control modeSignal inputCommand to thespindle connected toCommand to thespindle connected toSLSPASLSPBspindle connected totool post 1spindle connected totool post 200Spindle command oftool post 1Spindle command oftool post 201Spi...

  • Page 1073

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1047NOTEThe SLPCA and SLPCB signals are effective only in the2-spindle control mode using two serial spindles. In the2-spindle control mode using analog spindles, the feedbacksignal of spindle 1 is input to tool post 1, and the feedbacksignal of spindle...

  • Page 1074

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1048#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ECS3702ESSEASESIEMS[Data type] BitEMS Multi–spindle control function0 : Used1 : Not usedNOTEIf the multi–spindle control function is not required for onetool post in two–path control, specify this parameter for thetool post to w...

  • Page 1075

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1049#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#037032SP[Data type] Bit2SP Specifies whether one or two spindles are controlled (at 2–path control).0 : One spindle (two tool posts)1 : Two spindle (two tool posts)#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03706PCS[Data type] BitPCS When multi–spindle contro...

  • Page 1076

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1050Table 9.4 lists the position coder feedback signals used for each tool postin the above configuration. These position coder feedback signals areselected according to the following:⋅ Bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706⋅ Spindle feedback select sign...

  • Page 1077

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1051NOTE1 The spindle commands include S code commands,maximum speed command (G50S__), M03, M04, M05, andconstant surface speed control commands (G96 and G97)2 Signals to operate the spindle control unit are not affectedby the spindle command select sign...

  • Page 1078

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1052With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying thesurface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes itpossible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain aconstant surface speed at a programmed po...

  • Page 1079

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1053Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speedwith the output 10 V is 1000 min–1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000min–1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter No.3741, 3742, respectively. In ...

  • Page 1080

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1054The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output(digital data) 4095.The above calculation becomes as follows:The v...

  • Page 1081

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1055ZXN3N4In this program, block N2 issues a constant surface speed controlcommand (G96), a surface speed command (S12 m/min), and afeed–per–revolution command (G95). Block N3 causes the CNC tochange the spindle speed specification from 76.4 min–1...

  • Page 1082

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1056#71405#6#5#4#3#2FPR#1#0[Data type] BitFPR Specifies the feed–per–revolution function with no position coder.0 : Not used.1 : Used.NOTEIf you set this parameter to 1, reset parameter NPC (bit 0 ofparameter No. 1402) to 0.3741Maximum spindle speed ...

  • Page 1083

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10573772Maximum spindle speed[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindlespeed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds...

  • Page 1084

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1058NOTESimultaneous use of multi–spindle control enables constantsurface speed control for spindles other than the firstspindle. (See Section 9.10.)Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.9.3CONSTAN...

  • Page 1085

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1059With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindlespeed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindlespeed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.This function is useful, for example, f...

  • Page 1086

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10601. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reachedSpindle speedCheckCheckNo checkSrSrSqSqSdSdSpecification of another speedStart of checkAlarmTimeSpecified speedActual speed2. When an alarm is issued before a specified spindle spee...

  • Page 1087

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1061[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a toleranceto the specified speed.[Output condition] The signal becomes logical “1” when:⋅ The actual spindle speed goes out of tolerance...

  • Page 1088

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10624911Percent tolerance (q) of the target spindle speed to begin checking[Data type] WordUnit of data 1% 0. 1% (T series)Data range 1 – 100 1 – 1000NOTEUnit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (Tseries only)Set the percent tolerance (...

  • Page 1089

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1063NumberMessageDescription704OVER HEAT : SPINDLESpindle overheat in the spindle fluc-tuation detection(1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve thecutting condition.(2) Check whether the cutting tool is share.(3) Another possible cause is a faultyspi...

  • Page 1090

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1064The PMC can read actual spindle speed.[Classification] Output signal[Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC theactual spindle speed obtained by feedback pulses from the position codermounted on the spindle.[Operati...

  • Page 1091

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1065This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and positioncoder.The function has a coarser least command increment compared with theCs contour control function and has no interpolation capability with otheraxes. However, it can be inst...

  • Page 1092

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1066Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameterno. 1020). Specify*1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023).Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindlesubjected to spindle positioning is ...

  • Page 1093

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1067The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixedangle; the second positions an optional angle.A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for thecommand. There are six positioning angle values (Mα to M(a + 5)),wh...

  • Page 1094

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1068Positioning by specifying a semi–fixed angle (by M code) is alwaysincremental. To perform positioning by specifying an optional angle,specify the distance between the program origin and the end point(absolute) with address C and the distance betwe...

  • Page 1095

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1069[Classification] Input signal[Function] When this signal is 1, the CNC orients and positions the spindle.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal specifies that spindle mechanical clamping be released in aspindle positioning sequence.When...

  • Page 1096

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1070Refer to 9.3 “Spindle Speed Control.”Refer to the manual for serial spindle.The spindle loop gain multiplier corresponding to the gear currentlyselected by this signal is used. When the serial spindle is used, input gearselection signals CTH1A an...

  • Page 1097

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1071- Spindle OrientationPOSITION LOOPINITIALIZESpindle enable onM codeM FSPSTPSUCLP*SUCPFSpindle movementZPxSCLP*SCPFFINSpindle enable off⇒ POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE is performed within the CNC.⇒ Spindle ENABLE ON/OFF specifies that the PMC ladder ...

  • Page 1098

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1072- Spindle Positioning by M codeSpindle enable onM codeM FSPSTPSUCLP*SUCPFSpindle movementSCLP*SCPFFINSpindle enable off

  • Page 1099

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1073- Spindle Positioning by Address C,HSpindle enable ONSPSTPSUCLP*SUPCFSpindle movementSCLP*SCPFSpindle enableOFF- Spindle Positioning ResetM codeM FSPSTPSUCLPFINPOSITION CODER INITIALIZE*SUPCF⇒ POSITION CODER INITIALIZE is performed only in the CNC.

  • Page 1100

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1074#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006ZMIx[Data type] Bit axisZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initialbacklash at power–on0 : Positive direction1 : Negative directionNOTEWhen the serial spindle is being used, this parameter isinva...

  • Page 1101

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10750 : Not set automatically1 : Set automatically1250Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate systemsetting is performed[Data type] Two–word axisSet the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be us...

  • Page 1102

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10761620Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] ms[Valid data range] 0 to 4000Set time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration foreach axis.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01816...

  • Page 1103

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10771829Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 0 to 32767Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.1850Grid shift for each axis[Data ...

  • Page 1104

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1078NOTEThe direction for spindle orientation (or reference positionreturn) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle isdetermined by this parameter.4044Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode (High gear)4045Velocity loop proportion gain in servo...

  • Page 1105

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1079NOTESet the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motorwhen the spindle positioning is performed with serialspindle. For which gear is used, it depends on theclutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.4065Position gain in servo mode (HIGH...

  • Page 1106

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1080ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification0 : The conventional specification is used.1 : The extended specification is used.NOTEThe extended specification includes the following twoextensions:D With the conventional specification, the numbe...

  • Page 1107

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10814960M code specifying spindle orientation[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Integer[Valid data range] 6 to 97Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindlepositioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation.Spindle po...

  • Page 1108

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1082NOTEθ represents the basic angular diplacement set inpamrameter No. 4963.4963M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle[Data type] Word[Unit of data] deg[Valid data range] 1 to 60This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for semi...

  • Page 1109

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10834971Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 14972Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 24973Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 34974Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 4[Data type] WordSet the se...

  • Page 1110

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1084NumberMessageDescription053TOO MANY ADDRESSCOMMANDSIn the chamfering and corner R com-mands, two or more of I, K and R arespecified. Otherwise, the character af-ter a comma(”,”) is not C or R in directdrawing dimensions programming. Orcomma (...

  • Page 1111

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1085CAUTION1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning.2 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied;restart with orientation operation.3 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are notavailable during spindle positioning.4 ...

  • Page 1112

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1086The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using thespindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on thespindle.This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindlepositioning function, and has an in...

  • Page 1113

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1087The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis namespecified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary.When the second auxiliary function option is provided, address B cannotbe used for the name of the contour axis. For th...

  • Page 1114

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1088After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cscontour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return thespindle to the reference position.The reference position return of the Cs contour control axis is as follows:- In...

  • Page 1115

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1089- Interruption of reference position return(i)Manual operationReturn to the reference position can be interrupted by reset-ting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and directionselect signal. When the interrupted return operation is re-sum...

  • Page 1116

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1090[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates the axis is under Cs contour control.[Output condition] Spindle speed control mode→ 0Cs contour control mode→ 1Spindle speed controlCs contour controlSpindle speed controlCONGear chan...

  • Page 1117

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1091Refer to the manual of serial spindle.These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used foreach gear position.CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spindle, butGR1 and GR2 must also be set. Do not change these ...

  • Page 1118

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1092Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn,*Jn <G100, G102> (Input)Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD<G018, G019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual)The Cs contour control axis can be manually opera...

  • Page 1119

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10931020Name of the axis used for programming for each axis[Data type] Byte axisSet the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of thevalues listed in the following table:AxisnameSetvalueAxisnameSetvalueAxisnameSetvalueAxisnameSetvalueX8...

  • Page 1120

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10941023Number of the servo axis for each axis[Data type] Byte axisSet the servo axis for each control axis.Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and thecorresponding servo axis.Set –1 as the number of servo axis to the Cs co...

  • Page 1121

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10951820Command multiply for each axis (CMR)[Data type] Byte axisD When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27Set value=1(Command multiply)+100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127]D When command multiply is 0.5 to 48Set value = 2 command multiply [Valid data range...

  • Page 1122

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10963900The number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 8Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis(1st group)NOTESet 0 when there is no servo axis that inter...

  • Page 1123

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10973911Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis duringinterpolation (High gear)3912Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis duringinterpolation (Medium high gear)3913Loop gain of the se...

  • Page 1124

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10983930Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 8Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis(4th group)NOTEWhen there is no servo axis or less than four servo a...

  • Page 1125

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION10993941Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis duringinterpolation (High gear)3942Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis duringinterpolation (Medium high gear)3943Loop gain of the se...

  • Page 1126

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1100NOTEFor which position gain is used in actual spindle operation,it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A.4135Grid shift value at Cs contour control[Data type] Two–word[Unit of data] 1 pulse unit (360000 p/rev)[Valid data range]...

  • Page 1127

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1101WARNINGIn the spindle contour control mode, do not switch thespindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put thesystem in the spindle speed control mode first.NOTEIn the T series machines, the spindle contour controlfunction and the spindle pos...

  • Page 1128

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1102This function is put in effect by setting the CSF parameter (bit 2 ofparameter No. 3712) and the CSPTRE parameter (bit 5 of parameter No.4353) to 1.(Using this function requires resetting the RFCHK3 parameter (bit 7 ofparameter No. 4016) to 0.)The M ...

  • Page 1129

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1103When Cs axis coordinate setup is normally completed:Codes <F010 to F013> for entering the Cs contour modeM codeCoordinate incrementMF<F007#0>CSFI1<G274#4>CON<G027#7>FSCSL<F044#1>ZRFx<F120#0 to #3>CSFO1<F274#4>...

  • Page 1130

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1104If an attempt to set up Cs axis coordinates fails (because of suspension byan emergency stop, for example)MF<F007#0>CSFI1<G274#4>CON<G027#7>FSCSL<F044#1>ZRFx<F120#0 to #3>CSFO1<F274#4>FIN<G004#3>CSPENA<F04...

  • Page 1131

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1105#73700#6#5#4#3#2#1NRF#0[Data type] BitNRF Once the Cs contour control mode has been entered, the first positioningcommand G00:0 : Makes a reference position return.1 : Performs normal positioning.To use the Cs axis coordinate setup function, it is re...

  • Page 1132

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1106[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that Cs axis coordinate setup has not normally beencompleted.[Output condition] The signal becomes ’1’ under the following condition:– Cs axis coordinate setup is not normally compl...

  • Page 1133

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1107NumberMessageDescription5346RETURN TO REFERENCEPOINTThe Cs coordinate setup function was sus-pended. Make a manual reference positionreturn.1. An attempt was made to perform Cs axiscoordinate setup for the Cs axis for whichCSPEN = ’0’.2. No posi...

  • Page 1134

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1108Whereas the Cs axis may stop at a machine position of 5.000 to 5.003 ifthe Cs contour control mode is entered after rotation in the spindle speedcontrol mode.In this case, the relationship between the machine coordinates andmachine position is adjust...

  • Page 1135

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1109In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, maximum four additional(second, third, and fourth) spindles can be controlled. These additionalspindles allow two-stage gear changes. A single S code is used tocommand to any of these spindles. The spi...

  • Page 1136

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1110An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, usinga spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS4 <G027#0-#2>, <G026#3>).Each spindle rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindleselection signal, it con...

  • Page 1137

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1111The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below.First spindleS commandHold 1Hold 2Hold 3SIND* SSTP 1* SSTP 2* SSTP 3SWS 1SWS 2SWS 3SIND2SIND3Second spindleThird spindleHold 4* SSTP 4SWS 4SIND4Fourth spindleIn multi-spindle control, the fir...

  • Page 1138

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1112Spindle configuration when multi-spindle control is used:Necessary option and parameter· Multi-spindle control· Spindle serial output· Parameter SS2 (No. 3701#4) = 1 (to use second spindle)· Spindle analog output (to use third spindle)Connection ...

  • Page 1139

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1113When the spindle motor is used for positioning, as in the case of spindlepositioning or Cs contour control, the first spindle will allows functionas the positioning spindle. Switching to the positioning mode andpositioning command are possible irresp...

  • Page 1140

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1114SWS3 1 : Outputs a speed command to the third spindle.0 : Outputs no speed command to the third spindle.SWS4 1 : Outputs a speed command to the fourth spindle.0 : Outputs no speed command to the fourth spindle.[Classification] Input signal[Function] ...

  • Page 1141

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1115[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals select the position coder of the serial spindle used formulti–spindle control. The 3rd and 4th position coder selection signalscan be selected only when PCS (bit 6 of parameter No.3704), whichs...

  • Page 1142

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1116First spindleSIND, SSIN, SGN <G033#7, #6, #5>R01I to R12I <G032#0 to G033#3>Second spindle SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2 <G035#7, #6, #5>R01I2 to R12I2 <G034#0 to G035#3>Third spindleSIND3, SSIN3, SGN3 <G037#7, #6, #5>R01I3 to R12I...

  • Page 1143

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1117The parameters for the 1st spindle and the 1st position coder are the sameas usual. This section describes the parameters which are added by themulti–spindle control function.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03701SS3SS2[Data type] BitSS2 In serial spindle control, ...

  • Page 1144

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1118#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03702EMS[Data type] BitEMS Multi–spindle control is0 : Used1 : Not usedNOTEIf the multi–spindle control function is not required for onepath in two–path control, set this parameter for the path towhich the multi–spindle control...

  • Page 1145

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1119#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03706GTTPCSPG2PG2PG1PG1[Data type] BitPG2, PG1 Gear ration of spindle to first position coderFor the setting, see the description of parameter No.3707.PCS When multi–spindle control is applied to two tool posts in two–pathcontrol, ...

  • Page 1146

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1120#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03707P42P41P32P31P22P21PG2, PG1 (Bits 1 and 0 of parameter No.3702)Gear ratio of spindle to first position coderP22, P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coderP32, P31 Gear ratio of spindle to third position coderP42, P41 Gear ...

  • Page 1147

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1121WARNING1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle isnot clamped.2 When spindle speed command control is applied using thePMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of thespindle is not clamped.NOTE1 When the constant surface sp...

  • Page 1148

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1122NOTE1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle controloption is selected.2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximumspeed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 modeis...

  • Page 1149

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11233822Maximum speed of the third spindle[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the maximum speed for the third spindle.When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindlespeed is specified, or...

  • Page 1150

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11243850Maximum speed of the fourth spindle[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the maximum speed for the fourth spindle.NOTE1 These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control.2 When this paramet...

  • Page 1151

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1125CAUTION1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP for stopping allselected (SWS1 to SWS4) spindles’ rotation is cleared, thespeed command is restored. A spindle not selected bySWS1 to SWS4 and rotating at its previous speed, which isstopped using i...

  • Page 1152

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1126In a tapping cycle (M series: G84/G74, T series: G84/G88), synchronouscontrol is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and theoperation of the spindle.This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thusenabling...

  • Page 1153

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1127The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching andM–type/T–type) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Referto Section 9.3 as necessary.The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the M series...

  • Page 1154

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1128As shown in the figure below a gear ratio can be inserted between thespindle and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.Spindle controlSpindle amplifierSpindle motorSpindleGear ratio n:m 4ErrorcounterGear ratio q:p1024 p/revPositio...

  • Page 1155

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1129The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor.For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on eachgear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not bespecified for the serial spindle.)...

  • Page 1156

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1130If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parametersPG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder ismounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one stagegear is provided. .For 2nd spindl...

  • Page 1157

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1131Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from thatfor gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changinggears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3when the M type gear selection me...

  • Page 1158

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1132NOTEThis table show an example of three gears. For the basicspindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor descriptionmanual. “+ α” means that the spindle motor speed mayslightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.If the M type gear selecti...

  • Page 1159

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1133In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F. Thespindle speed is specified by S 360(deg/min). Use of override is invalidfor both of them. An override of 200% can be applied to withdrawaloperations by setting bit 4 (DOV) o...

  • Page 1160

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1134For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays informationrelated to rigid tapping.For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of dataitems relating to the synchronization of the spindle and tapping axis bysetting ...

  • Page 1161

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1135Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set orcanceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to “0” in the positioning ofthe rigid tapping cycle.The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.Z–axiserrorZeZcZ...

  • Page 1162

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11360450SPINDLE MOTION ERRORSpindle position deviation during rigid tapping[Unit] Pulse0451SPINDLE MOTION PULSENumber of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping[Unit] Pulse0452RIGID ERRORMomentary error difference between the spindle and t...

  • Page 1163

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11370455SYNC. PULSE(SUM)Momentary spindle–converted move during command differencebetween the spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping[Unit] PulseNOTEThis data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) ofparameter No. 5204 is set to 0.0456SYNC. ...

  • Page 1164

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1138The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below.For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, referto Section II.13.2.2 of the “Operator’s Manual for Machining Center(B–63534EN) ”.G84G88Front tapping cy...

  • Page 1165

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1139D Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, thatM29 and Mjj for C–axis clamping cannot be specified in the sameblock.)GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****;X (Z) __C__;X (Z) __C__; · ·G80;D Conver...

  • Page 1166

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1140G84⋅G85 ( Tapping cycle) Rapid traverse Z (X) axis feed P DwellG84 (G88) (G98 mode)G84 (G88) (G99 mode)SpindlestopSpindlestopMotion 1Motion 2Spindle CWSpindle CWMotion 3Spindle stopPPSpindle stopMotion 5Spindle CCWSpindle CCWZ (X...

  • Page 1167

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1141Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed perrotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98).Example)The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode forcutting a thread with a lead of 1 ...

  • Page 1168

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1142[Classification] Input signal[Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) isspecified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then turns on this signalto notify the CNC.1 : The PMC enters in rigid tapping mode.0 : The PM...

  • Page 1169

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1143[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is active.RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently active.0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently active.By latching M29, the PMC knows that rigid tapping m...

  • Page 1170

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1144Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting isrequired to output these signals, as described below.M series: SF output depends on the gear selection method, as describedbelow.[1] M–type gear selection methodSF output depends o...

  • Page 1171

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1145Reference information:The table below indicates the relationshipbetween the output signals and gear selection.GR3OGR2OGR1O1st (low) speed gear××f2nd (medium) speed gear×f×3rd (high) speed gearf××[Classification] Input signal[Operation] When T...

  • Page 1172

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1146When a serial spindle is used, the serial spindle clutch/gear selectionsignals (G070#3, #2 for the first spindle, G074#3, #2 for the secondspindle, and G264#3, #2 for the third spindle) must be set in addition tothe setting of the gear selection sign...

  • Page 1173

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1147(T series)When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to selecta spindle to be used for rigid tapping, set the signals asindicated below.Spindle used for rigid tappingSignal stateSpindle used for rigid tappingRGTSP1RGTSP2RGTSP3First spindle...

  • Page 1174

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1148However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, evenduring rigid tapping (See Section 9.10 for details of this signals).#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G026PC3SLCSWS2*SSTP2G027*SSTP1SWS1PC2SLCG028GR2GR1G029GR31GR21G061RGTSP3RGTSP2 RGTSP1RGTAP#7#...

  • Page 1175

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1149For the same reason, the PMC’s control over second spindle/third spindleoutput must be disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND2/SIND3to “0”.When T–type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whethergear switching is to be perfo...

  • Page 1176

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1150When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with thespindle motor and spindle, and the newly programmed S**** is outsidethe previously selected gear range, the spindle–speed function strobesignal SF <F007#2> and gear selec...

  • Page 1177

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1151The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the methodused to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M–type orT–type), and whether to perform gear switching.From the table, find the appropriate timing chart (Fig. 9...

  • Page 1178

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1152M type gear selection methodM29RTAPFirst block Second blockG84 (G74)ENBTo be masked to the secondblockSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSORRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPosition loop250msor moreFig. 9.11.7.1 (a) Gear is not changed9....

  • Page 1179

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1153M29RTAPFirst block Second blockG84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockNoteThis time chart show an example where the gear has shif...

  • Page 1180

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1154T type gear selection methodM29RTAPFirst bllock Second blockG84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutputSFS codeoutputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to the second blockFig. 9.11.7.1 (c) Gear change i...

  • Page 1181

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1155M29RTAPFirst block Second blockG84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockNoteThis time chart shows an example where the gear ...

  • Page 1182

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1156M type gear selectionM29RTAPFirst block Second blockG84 (G74)ENBTo be masked to the second blockSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPositionloopFig. 9.11.7.2 (a) When ...

  • Page 1183

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1157M29RTAPFirst block G84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockNoteThis time chart shows an example where the gear has s...

  • Page 1184

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1158T type gear selection methodM29RTAPFirst blockG84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutputSFS codeoutputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockSecond blockFig. 9.11.7.2 (c) When gear change is not performed

  • Page 1185

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1159M29RTAPFirst blockG84 (G74)ENBSpindleoutpoutSFS code out-putGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockNoteThis time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from middle to h...

  • Page 1186

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1160M type gear selectionM29RTAPFirst blockG84 (G74)M29 is commandedinternally.ENBTo be masked to thesecond blockSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINExcitaitonSFRPosition loopRotationSecond blockFig. 9.11.7.3 (a) When gear–change is ...

  • Page 1187

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1161M29RTAPFirst blockG84 (G74)M29 is commandedinternally.ENBSpindleoutputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blockNoteThis time chart shows an example where the gear has shifte...

  • Page 1188

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1162T type gear selection methodM29RTAPFirst blockG84 (G74)M29 is commandedinternally.ENBSpindleoutoputSFS codeoutputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to the second blockSecond blockFig. 9.11.7.3 (c) When ge...

  • Page 1189

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1163M29RTAPFirst blcokG84 (G74)M29 is commandedinternallyENBSpindleoutputSFS codeoutputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPosition loopTo be masked to thesecond blcokNoteThis time chart shows an example where the gear has c...

  • Page 1190

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1164When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (suchas G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.The S command used during rigid tapping is automatically cleared whenrigid mode is cancelled. This reduces the spindle ...

  • Page 1191

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1165WARNING1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code isexecuted at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”.Therefore, if the block contains an M code for controlling thespindle...

  • Page 1192

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1166#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03705SFANSFEVSSGTESFESF[Data type] BitESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) isused, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7(GTT) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1:0 : S cod...

  • Page 1193

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1167#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03706GTTPG2PG2PG1PG1[Data type] BitPG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coderMagnificationPG2PG1 100 201 410 811GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method0: Type M1 : Type TNOTE1 Type M:The gear selection signal is not ente...

  • Page 1194

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1168Spindle speedcommand (S command)Max. output (4095, 10V)Spindle motormin. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3735)Max. speed at gear1 parameter No. 3741Spindle motormax. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3736)Speed at gear 1–2 change point Parameter No. 3761Spindl...

  • Page 1195

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1169#7SRS5200#6FHDFHD#5PCP#4DOVDOV#3SIGSIG#2CRGCRG#1VGRVGR#0G84G84[Data type] BitG84 Method for specifying rigid tapping0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to theissue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.5210).1 ...

  • Page 1196

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1170#75201#6#5#4OV3OV3#3OVUOVU#2TDRTDR#1#0NIZ[Data type] BitNIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos.5261 through 52...

  • Page 1197

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11710 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. In G74 mode,the spindle rotates in reverse.1 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. In G74 mode, the spindlerotates in a normal direction.REF Feed forward during movement from the ...

  • Page 1198

    NOTE1 When switching between the rigid tapping parameters on aspindle–by–spindle basis in rigid tapping using the secondand third serial spindles, set this parameter to 1. Thefollowing parameters are supported for each spindle:2 For rigid tapping using the second and third serial spindles,th...

  • Page 1199

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1173NOTEWhen you want to perform rigid tapping, do not set thisparameter.If rigid tapping is performed with this parameter set, atapping tool, workpiece, or machine may be damaged.5210Rigid tapping mode specification M code[Data type] Byte[Valid data ran...

  • Page 1200

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11745213Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle[Data type] Word[Unit of data]Increment systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter input0.010.0010.0001mmInput in incluse0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the return or cle...

  • Page 1201

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1175NOTEWhen rigid tapping is performed using the second and thirdspindles• When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) isset to 0, the setting of parameter No.5214 is applied to thesecond and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle.•...

  • Page 1202

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11765231Number of position coder gear teeth (first–stage gear)5232Number of position coder gear teeth (second–stage gear)5233Number of position coder gear teeth (third–stage gear)5234Number of position coder gear teeth (fourth–stage gear)5235Numb...

  • Page 1203

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11775241Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first–stage gear)5242Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second–stage gear)5243Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third–stage gear)5244Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth–stage g...

  • Page 1204

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11785261Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis(first–stage gear)5262Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis(second–stage gear)5263Linear acceleration/deceleration time c...

  • Page 1205

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11795271Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (first–stage gear)5272Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (second–stage gear)5273Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extra...

  • Page 1206

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11805280Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to all gears)5281Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (first–stage gear)5282Position control loop gain for the spindle ...

  • Page 1207

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11815291Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)5292Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2)5293Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3)5294Spindle loop gain multioplier in ...

  • Page 1208

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11825300Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping5301Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 32767These parameters are used to set tapping axis and spindle in–positionwidt...

  • Page 1209

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1183NOTEThese parameters are enabled when the SPR parameter(bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1.5308In–position width at point R in rigid tapping (tapping axis)[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter...

  • Page 1210

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1184SpindleMotorSpindlePositioncoder1 : 1 : 2P.CS = 3600G = 3000L = 360 degrees (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotation)α = La/4096= 720 degrees/4096= 0.17578 degreesLa = 720 degrees(One position coder rotation requires two spindle rotations (=...

  • Page 1211

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11855313Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 32767This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed whilethe spindle is stopp...

  • Page 1212

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11865321Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first–stage gear)Spindle backlash in rigid tapping5322Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second–stage gear)5323Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third–stage gear)5324Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (fou...

  • Page 1213

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11875335Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extractionoperation (first–stage gear)5336Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extractionoperation (second–stage gear)5337Time constant for the spind...

  • Page 1214

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11885344Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping usingthe third spindle (common to all the gears)5345Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping usingthe third spindle (first–stage ge...

  • Page 1215

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11895352Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tap-ping using the second spindle[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 32767This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit im...

  • Page 1216

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11905355Positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping usingthe third spindle[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 1 to 32767This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed durings...

  • Page 1217

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11915365Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for the first spindle in rigidtapping (first–stage gear)5366Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for the first spindle in rigidtapping (second–stage gear)5367Bell–shaped...

  • Page 1218

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION11925381Override value during rigid tapping return[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] 1% or 10%[Valid data range] 0 to 200This parameter is used to set the override value during rigid tappingreturn.If the setting is 0, no override is applied.NOTEThis paramete...

  • Page 1219

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1193NumberDescriptionMessage204ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA-TIONIn rigid tapping, an axis movement isspecified between the rigid M code(M29) block and G84 or G74 block forM series (G84 or G88 block for T se-ries). Modify the program.205RIGID MODE DI SIGNALOFF1. A...

  • Page 1220

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1194CAUTION1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offsetvalue parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standardsystem, a value within –8191 to 8191 must be specified inthis parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a value within–1023 to ...

  • Page 1221

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1195CAUTION1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at thesame timeThe spindle orientation function positions the spindle byusing sensors and the PMC, without being directlycontrolled by the CNC.The CNC has no direct control over this proces...

  • Page 1222

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1196CAUTION (continued)(3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping modedirectly from Cs contouring control mode, positionsdesignated in Cs contouring control mode are notpreserved if rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80.When the system is changed...

  • Page 1223

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1197For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the “FANUC ACSPINDLE MOTORa series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E)” or“FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTORai series PARAMETER MANUAL(B–65280EN)”.4044Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mod...

  • Page 1224

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1198The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gearselection signals and selected gear numbers.CTH1CTH2Gear selectedParameter No. to be used00HIGH40654044405201MEDIUM HIGH40664044405210MEDIUM LOW40674045405311LOW406840454053Linear acc...

  • Page 1225

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1199The time required in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rigidtapping is the sum of the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant(value set in the conventional parameter) for the spindle and tapping axisand the time (value set in the new...

  • Page 1226

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION12005261Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (first gear stage)5262Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (second gear stage)5263Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (third gear stage)5265Time constant for th...

  • Page 1227

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1201NOTEThese parameters are valid if the TDR parameter (bit 2 ofparameter No. 5201) is 1.5365First–spindle bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for rigid tapping(first gear stage)5366First–spindle bell–shaped acceleration/decelera...

  • Page 1228

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1202(1) The linear acceleration/deceleration time constant parameter for rigidtapping specifies the time required for the spindle to reach itsmaximum permissible rotation speed. The actual time constant isobtained by calculating the ratio of the maximum...

  • Page 1229

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1203This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It alsoenables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowingnon–standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the twospindles.In spindle synchronous control, t...

  • Page 1230

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1204D Constant surface speed control can be executed in synchronizationcontrol even while a workpiece is being held with the two spindles. However, if the speed is to change in excess of the specified timeconstant, the speed changes within the extent spe...

  • Page 1231

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1205D In spindle synchronization control , the compensation value forspindle speed offset (parameter No. 3731) is disabled.D A spindle–phase synchronous control command is effective only insynchronous spindle control mode. The specified phase can bere...

  • Page 1232

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1206This parameter is used to output the inter–spindle phase error detectionsignal SYCAL in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. TheSYCAL <F044#4> signal becomes “1” when a phase error exceeding thevalue set in this parameter is ...

  • Page 1233

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1207This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle canbe stopped in either of the following two ways.·The spindle is stopped using mechanical stop.·The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle controlunit.To mecha...

  • Page 1234

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1208[Classification] Input signal[Function] This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absoluteposition within one rotation in the following equation:=4096360 (2i Pi)ni=0wherePi = 0 when SHAi = 0Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0SHA0...

  • Page 1235

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1209#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03702OR2OR1OR3[Data type] BitOR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function isused by the first spindle motor0 : Not used1 : UsedOR2 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function...

  • Page 1236

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1210FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER a seriesDESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E)11.111.2Position coder method spindle orientationMagnetic sensor method spindle orientationFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E)2.12.2Position coder method spindle orienta...

  • Page 1237

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1211Spindle output switching switches between the two motor windings, onefor low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the specialspindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stableoutput characteristics over a wide r...

  • Page 1238

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1212D When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O <F034 #0, #1>,are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speedcontrol is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is setto 0)Set two gears, which are almost the same.(...

  • Page 1239

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1213The three or four serial spindles can be connected usingthree/four–spindle serial output.The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. Forthe third as well as the first and second serial spindles, all the functionssupporte...

  • Page 1240

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1214NOTE1 PC = Position coder2 The multi–spindle function is required to enable the use ofthe position coder for the second spindle.3 For an explanation of how to control the speed of the secondand third spindles, see Sections 15.4 and 9.10.(Reference)...

  • Page 1241

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1215The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.(This table relates to a table that appears in Section 9.2.)f = Available = UnavailableSpindleSerial spindleAnalog spindleFunctionFirstspindleSecondspindleThirdspindle(*1)F...

  • Page 1242

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1216NOTE1 The multi–spindle function can control the speed of themaximum four spindles and switch the feedback signalbetween four position coders. It can operate without thesecond, third, or four spindle (The fourth spindle can beused only when the th...

  • Page 1243

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1217These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/outputsignals for the serial spindle control unit.For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to thefollowing manuals:“FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series Description...

  • Page 1244

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1218#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MRDYDG266ORCMDSFRDSRVDCTH1DCTH2DTLMHDTLMLDRCHDG267RSLDINTGDSOCNDMCFNDSPSLD*ESPDARSTDRCHHGDG268MFNHGDINCMDDOVRIDDDEFMDDNRRODROTADINDXDG269DSCND SORSLDMPOFDSLVDMORCMD#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ORARDF266TLMDLDT2DLDT1DSARDSDTDSSTDALMDMORA2DF267MORA1...

  • Page 1245

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1219#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03701SS3SS2ISINOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Bit typeISI Specifies whether to use the first and second serial spindle interfaces.0 : Use these interfac...

  • Page 1246

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1220Parameter settingSerial spindles to be usedSS4(No.3704#1)SS3(No.3701#5)SS2(No.3701#4)Serial spindles to be used000First spindle only001First and second spindles010First and third spindles011First to third spindles110First, third, and fourth spindles1...

  • Page 1247

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1221#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03702OR3NOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] Bit typeOR3 Specifies whether to use the stop–position external–setting type spindleorientation function for...

  • Page 1248

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1222NumberMessageContents749S–SPINDLE LSI ERRORIt is serial communication error while system is executing after powersupply on. Following reasons can be considered.1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cableis cut.2) MAIN CP...

  • Page 1249

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1223NumberContentsMessage782SPINDLE–4 MODE CHANGE ER-RORSame as alarm number 752 (for the fourth spindle)784SPINDLE–4 ABNORMAL TORQUEALMSame as alarm number 754 (for the fourth spindle)#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0430SS4SS3SSRSICSIC 0 : The module required for th...

  • Page 1250

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1224SSA 1 : System alarm in the spindle amplifier(The above are errors related to the third/fourth serial spindle. They arereflected in spindle alarm 749. They are usually caused by noise,disconnection, or instantaneous power interruption. When these ...

  • Page 1251

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1225In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can becontrolled as a slave axis of the first spindle.Therefore, the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping function,and spindle positioning function (T series) can be used on a ...

  • Page 1252

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION12261. Spindle mode (ordinary spindle control)The second spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as thatused for the first spindle.The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, insteadspecifies the ratio of the spindle motor speed to ...

  • Page 1253

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1227In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the parking function stopsthe motion of the first or second spindle, regardless of the mode (spindlemode, spindle positioning mode, Cs contour axis control mode, or rigidtapping mode) of the spindle.In the ...

  • Page 1254

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1228NOTE1 When the parking function is activated for a spindle in amode featuring a position loop, such as Cs contour axiscontrol mode, spindle positioning mode, and rigid tappingmode, the spindle is stopped at the point where the parkingfunction is acti...

  • Page 1255

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1229Simple spindle synchronous control does not guarantee synchronousspindle operation. However, in a control mode featuring a position loop,such as Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindlepositioning mode, the synchronization of bo...

  • Page 1256

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1230When the spindle synchronous control option is selected, ensure thatsimple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC is active whensynchronous control is not exercised.Also, ensure that spindle synchronous control signal SRSYC is not activeduring sim...

  • Page 1257

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1231NOTE1 The second spindle is initialized to Cs contour axis controlmode. At this time, the position of the second spindle willbe undefined, so that reference position return must beperformed for the first and second spindles. In this case, therefere...

  • Page 1258

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1232During simple spindle synchronous control, indications such as thepositional deviation of the first spindle are output in the usual way. Forthe second spindle, however, only the positional deviation of the secondspindle is indicated in diagnostic da...

  • Page 1259

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1233[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:– Activates the parking function for the second spindle placed undersimple spindle synchronous control.When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #7 of ...

  • Page 1260

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1234#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03701SS2NOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.[Data type] BitSS2 Under serial spindle control, the second serial spindle is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.NOTE1. This parameter is...

  • Page 1261

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION12354811Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindlesynchronization control mode[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Pulse[Valid data range] 0 to 32767Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spind...

  • Page 1262

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1236Master spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simplespindle synchronous control is active414Slave spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simplespindle synchronous control is active415Absolute value of synchroniza...

  • Page 1263

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1237The signal indicating the operation ready status of each serial spindle isoutput.When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the relevant signal isset to 1:D The serial spindle is to be used according to the setting.D No serial communication ...

  • Page 1264

    B–63523EN–1/039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION1238SRSP2R Indicates the ready status of the second serial spindle operation when thespindle is to be used according to the setting.0 : The spindle is not ready.1 : The spindle is ready.SRSP3R Indicates the ready status of the third serial spindle operat...

  • Page 1265

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS123910 TOOL FUNCTIONS

  • Page 1266

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031240Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up toan 8-digit numeral after address T.Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding toolnumbers and offset numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after addressT. The offset n...

  • Page 1267

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1241#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05002LGNLD1[Data type] BitLD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of toolgeometry/wear compensation is selected)0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T codeLG...

  • Page 1268

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031242NOTEWhen a move command and a tool function are specified inthe same block, the commands are executed in one of thefollowing two ways:(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and toolfunction commands.(ii) Executing tool function commands upon comple...

  • Page 1269

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS124310.2TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORYTool compensation values include tool geometry compensation valuesand tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2.1 (a)).The geometry compensation and wear compensation can be combine...

  • Page 1270

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031244One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected accordingto the configuration of offset amount.(1) Tool compensation memory AThere is no difference between geometry compensation memory andwear compensation memory in tool compensation memory A.Ther...

  • Page 1271

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1245NOTE1 Using the second figure tool offset requires the toolfigure/wear compensation option. It also requires that theLD1 parameter (bit 0 of parameter No. 5002) and LGNparameter (bit 1 of parameter No. 5002) be, respectively,reset to 0 and set to 1.2 When ...

  • Page 1272

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031246NOTE1 When parameter OIM (No. 5006#0)=1, the range inparenthesis is available.2 The above table does not apply to the B–axis offset inB–axis control function.The memory can hold 16, 32, 64, 99, 400, or 999 sets of toolcompensation values.There are two t...

  • Page 1273

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1247[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects an axis for which the sum of the first figure tool offset value andthe second figure tool offset value is applied.[Operation] If the signal is 0, the second figure tool offset value is not added for thecontrol...

  • Page 1274

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031248#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03109DWT[Data type] BitDWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensationamount0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number.1 : The characters are not displayed.#73205#6#5#4OSC#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitOSC On...

  • Page 1275

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1249Example:The following setting disables the modification of both the tool geometrycompensation values and tool wear compensation values correspondingto offset numbers 100 to 110:Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool geometrycompensation value ...

  • Page 1276

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/0312505013Maximum value of tool wear compensation[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inchIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CMetric input0 to 999990 to 9999990 to 9999999Inch input0 to...

  • Page 1277

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1251NumberMessageDescription032ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUEIN G10In setting an offset amount by G10 orin writing an offset amount by systemvariables, the offset amount was ex-cessive.5300SET ALL OFFSET DATASAGAINAfter the inch/metric automatic con-version function (OIM...

  • Page 1278

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031252The display of the offset screen is as follows.The above examples are cases where the geometry/wear compensation,the tool nose radius compensation, the tool offset value 7 digits, and theY–axis offset are available.Display Example

  • Page 1279

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1253System variables can be used to read and write tool compensation values.System variables for 999 tool compensation values are as follows.CompensationnumberWearGeometryX–axiscompensationvalues1:999#10001:#10999#15001:#15999Z–axiscompensationvalues1:999#1...

  • Page 1280

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/0312545052Bias for tool offset numbers for measured tool offset value setting(For tool offset 400 and 999)[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 1 to maximum tool offset count. When the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes is used, thisparameter al...

  • Page 1281

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1255T–code for registering tools consists of eight digits or less when the tooloffset 400 pairs or 999 pairs is available. And the last three digits is usedas the tool offset number.TjjjjjjjjTool offset numberTool selection numberNOTEWhen this function is ava...

  • Page 1282

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031256The tool group is specified as follows when the tool offset 400 pairs or 999pairs is available.T∆∆999End the tool used by now, and starts to use the tool of the. . ∆∆group. ”999” distinguishes this specification fromordinary specification.T∆...

  • Page 1283

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1257NOTE1 The tool offset 400 pairs and 999 pairs are optionalfunctions.2 The function codes, which have relation to the tool lifemanagement in PMC window functions, cannot be used<Function code> 38 to 49, 160, 163 to 173, 200 to 202227 to 231, 324 to 328...

  • Page 1284

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031258Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.14.8TOOL COMPENSATION VAL-UES, NUMBER OF COM-PENSATION VALUES, AND EN-TERING VALUES FROM THEPROGRAM (G10)OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.14.5TOOL COMP...

  • Page 1285

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1259When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. ofuses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, theusage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool life expires, thenext tool in the group is selected. ...

  • Page 1286

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031260[Classification] Input signal[Function] Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group, *, and @.To clear the data, specify a group number by tool group number selectionsignal after replacing the worn–out tools that are displayed on the...

  • Page 1287

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1261[Classification] Input signal[Function] A tool which has not reached its lifespan may be changed by one of twomethods:(i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group numberselection signal then turn the tool skip signal TLSKP to “1”. The next...

  • Page 1288

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031262New tool selectingsignal TLNWTool function strobe signal TFT code outputEnd signal FIN[Classification] Input signal[Function] When the TLRST or TLSKP signals are input, the tool group numbermust be given in advance, using the tool group number selection sig...

  • Page 1289

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1263Override value = 9i+0{2i Vi}*TLV0 0.1*TLV1 0.2*TLV2 0.4*TLV3 0.8*TLV4 1.6*TLV5 3.2*TLV6 6.4*TLV7 12.8*TLV8 25.6*TLV9 51.2(Example) When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to “0”, the overridevalue is calculated as follows:12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0The life co...

  • Page 1290

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031264#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06800M6TIGISNGGRSSIGLTMGS2GS1SNGGRSSIGLTMGS2GS1[Data type] BitGS1, GS2 This parameter sets the combination of the number of tool life groupswhich can be entered, and the number of tools which can be entered pergroup as shown in the table belo...

  • Page 1291

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1265#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06801M6EEXGEXTTSMEMDLFV[Data type] BitTSM When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is counted in tool lifemanagement:0 : For each of the same tool numbers.1 : For each tool.LFV Specifies whether life count override is enabled or disabled ...

  • Page 1292

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031266Example: When the LTM parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.6800) is setto 0G10 L3 ;P1 L10 Q1 ; (Q1: The life of group 1 is specified as a count.):P2 L20 Q2 ; (Q2: The life of group 2 is specified as a duration.):P3 L20 ;(Omission of Q: The life of group 3 is sp...

  • Page 1293

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1267NumberMessageDescription149FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was spe-cified as the life count type in the extendedtool life management.150ILLEGAL TOOL GROUPNUMBERTool Group No. exceeds the maximum allow-able value.Modify the program.151T...

  • Page 1294

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031268The maximum tool life that can be managed is conventionally 65,535 usecounts or 4,300 minutes. Using the tool life management B optionextends the maximum tool life that can be managed to 999,999 use countsor 100,000 minutes.In addition, tool life managemen...

  • Page 1295

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1269[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies that the life of the last tool in the group has expired.[Output condition] This signal is 1 in the following cases:S The actual remaining life ”LIFE – COUNT” is equal to the value setin a parameter →...

  • Page 1296

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031270When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of thetool.To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offsetvector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). The offsetvector is perpendicular t...

  • Page 1297

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1271ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇStart–upCutter compensation cancelFig. 10.4.1 (b) Outline of cutter compensation C#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05001OFH[Data type] BitOFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tooloffset0 : Specifies the tool length compe...

  • Page 1298

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031272#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05003CCNSUVSUP[Data type] BitSUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C0 : Type A1 : Type BSUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently,0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standardspecification.1 : Moves by a ...

  • Page 1299

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1273NOTEIn the MDI mode, cutter compensation C (M series) or toolnose radius compensation (T series) is not performed,irrespective of the setting of this parameter.QCR The travel distance of circular interpolation in cutter compensation C (Mseries) or tool nose...

  • Page 1300

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031274NOTEThe setting of this parameter determines the travel distancedetermination method for circular interpolation not duringcutter compensation C (M series) or tool nose radiuscompensation (T series) as well. Accordingly, if thisparameter is set, the setting...

  • Page 1301

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1275NumberDescriptionMessage038INTERFERENCE IN CIR-CULAR BLOCKOvercutting will occur in cutter com-pensation C because the arc start pointor end point coincides with the arc cen-ter. Modify the program.041INTERFERENCE IN CRCOvercutting will occur in cutter com-...

  • Page 1302

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031276It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate partswhen using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness intaper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius compensationfunction compensates automatically for the...

  • Page 1303

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1277#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05003CCN[Data type] BitCCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cuttercompensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (Tseries):0 : The cutter compensation vector or tool nose radius compensati...

  • Page 1304

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031278BCDStart pointEnd pointCenterIf the end point viewed from the start point isin the A region, the movement is made alongthe shortcut. If the end point is in the B, C,or D region, almost a single turn is made.A[FS16 format]BStart pointEnd pointCenterIf the e...

  • Page 1305

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1279NumberMessageDescription033NO SOLUTION AT CRCA point of intersection cannot be deter-mined for tool nose radius compensa-tion. Modify the program. Modify theprogram.034NO CIRC ALLOWED INST–UP /EXT BLKThe start up or cancel was going to beperformed in the...

  • Page 1306

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031280When a five–axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used,tool length compensation can be performed in a specified tool axisdirection on a rotation axis. When a rotation axis is specified in tool axisdirection tool length compensation mode...

  • Page 1307

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1281The G43.1 Hn command enables tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation.The tool compensation vector changes as the offset value changes ormovement is made on a rotation axis. When the tool compensation vectorchanges, movement is made according to the cha...

  • Page 1308

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031282(2) B–axis and C–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axisZCYXBBCWorkpieceVx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c)Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c)Vz = Lc * cos(b)(3) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the X–axisZBAXBYAWorkpieceVx = Lc * cos(b)Vy = Lc * sin(b) * si...

  • Page 1309

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1283(4) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the B–axisused as the masterZXBYABBWorkpieceVx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b)Vy = –Lc * sin(a)Vz = Lc * cos(a) * cos(b)(5) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the A–...

  • Page 1310

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031284The machine–specific length from the rotation center of the tool rotationaxes (A– and B–axes, A– and C–axes, and B– and C–axes) to the toolmounting position is referred to as the tool holder offset. Unlike a toollength offset value, a tool ho...

  • Page 1311

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1285Set offsets relative to the rotation angles of the rotation axes in parameterNo. 19659. The compensation vector calculation formula is the same asthat used for rotation axis origin compensation, except that Bp and Cp arechanged to rotation axis offsets.Whe...

  • Page 1312

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031286Compensation is performed when the rotation centers of two rotation axesdo not match.The length from the tool mounting position to the first rotation axis centeris set as the tool holder offset value in parameter No. 19666.The vector from the first rotation...

  • Page 1313

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1287NOTEWhen using the spindle center compensation describedbelow, set the length from the tool mounting position to thespindle center as the tool holder offset.Compensation of the spindle center is performed.The amount of spindle center compensation is set in ...

  • Page 1314

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031288Conventionally, the center of a rotation axis was used as the control point.The control point can now be shifted as shown in the figure below.Then, when the rotation axis is at the 0–degree position also in tool lengthcompensation along the tool axis (G43...

  • Page 1315

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1289Vx, Vy, Vz:Tool length compensation vectorsA, B, C: Absolute coordinate values for the A–, B–, and C–axesTo: Tool offset valueHo: Tool holder offset valueJx, Jy, Jz: Rotation center compensation vectorsCx, Cy, Cz:Spindle center compensation vector...

  • Page 1316

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031290#719650#6#5#4#3#2#1RAP#0RAM[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bit axisRAM Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axis directiontool length compensation.0 : Not used as the rotation axis.1 : Used as the rotation axis.Select two ...

  • Page 1317

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS129119655Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Word axis[Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axesWhen a rotation axis turns about a linear axis, the linear axis is referredto as an axis t...

  • Page 1318

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/03129219657Master rotation axis number[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axesWhen a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about the toolaxis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master...

  • Page 1319

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1293Example for setting parameters that determine the machine configurationTool axis direction: Z–axisAxis configuration: X, Y, Z, W, A, BRotation axes: A–axis (axis rotating about the X–axis), B–axis (axis rotating about the Y–axis) Master axis: A–...

  • Page 1320

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/03129419660Origin offset value of a rotation axis[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] 2 word axis[Unit of data] degreeIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Minimun unit of type] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis...

  • Page 1321

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1295#7ETH19665#6#5SVC#4SBP#3#2#1#0[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitSBP In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the control pointis:0 : Calculated automatically.1 : Set in parameter No. 19667.SVC In tool length compensation along the ...

  • Page 1322

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031296[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, set thecontrol point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5 (SVC) ofparameter No. 19665 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No. 19665 is 1....

  • Page 1323

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1297Tool side compensation is a type of cutter compensation that performsthree–dimensional compensation on a plane (compensation plane)perpendicular to a tool direction vector.YZXTool vectorCompensationplaneCutter compensation vectorCutter compensation amount...

  • Page 1324

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031298(1) Parameters setting the relationship between the rotation axis and rotation plane with which the tool iscontrolled(1) Relationship between the rotation axis and rotation planeParameter (No.19610 to 19619)(2) Direction of the tool axisParameter (No.19622 ...

  • Page 1325

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS129919615Rotation axis for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (second group)19616Linear axis 1 for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (second group)19617Linear axis 2 for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (...

  • Page 1326

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031300S When there is one rotation axis, set the rotation axis of the secondgroup to 0.S In general, the direction vector of a rotation axis has three directioncomponents. This function supports direction vectors with onedirection component and two direction com...

  • Page 1327

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1301– When the rotation axis rotates from the positive direction oflinear axis 1 to the positive direction of linear axis 2, therotation axis is said to rotate in the positive direction.BXYZqa: Angle of inclination19620Reference angle for the rotation axis fo...

  • Page 1328

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031302RB:Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 3 andlinear axis 1. When rotation is performed from the positivedirection of linear axis 3 to the positive direction of linear axis 1,the direction of the rotation is positive.Linear axes 1, 2, an...

  • Page 1329

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1303#719605#6#5NIC#4#3#2#1#0[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitNIC Specifies whether to perform an interference check when compensationplane switching occurs during three–dimensional cutter compensation.0 : Perform.1 : Do not perform.19635Effective an...

  • Page 1330

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/03130419631Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge offset[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] 2 word[Unit of data] degree[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999This parameter sets a variation range used to determine whether theincluded angle...

  • Page 1331

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1305NumberContentsMessage5406G41.3/G40 FORMATERROR(1) A move instruction was specified ina block in which the G41.3 or G40code is specified.(2) A G or M code which suppressesbuffering was specified in the blockin which the G41.3 code was speci-fied.5407ILLEGAL ...

  • Page 1332

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031306On a five–axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool, toollength compensation can be performed momentarily even in the middleof a block.This tool length compensation is classified into one of two types basedon the programming method. In the e...

  • Page 1333

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1307NOTEThe length from the tool tip to tool pivot point must equal thesum of the tool length compensation amount and tool holderoffset value.RISC processor is necessary, if this function is used. Refer to Subsection7.1.19 “RISC Processor Operation,” in thi...

  • Page 1334

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031308In programming, the position of the tool tip center is specified.Tool tip centerProgrammedpathBall–end millTool tip centerProgrammedpathFlat–end millCorner–radius–end millTool tip centerProgrammedpathWhen linear interpolation (G01) is specified in t...

  • Page 1335

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1309(1) Type 1When only the rotation axes are specified in tool center point control(type 1) mode, the feedrate of the rotation axes is set to the maximumcutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422, No. 1430, or No. 1432).(2) Type 2In tool center point control (type 2...

  • Page 1336

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031310The following item is the same as for tool length compensation along thetool axis:– Tool holder offsetPositioning (G00) and linear interpolation (G01) move the tool to theposition (x, y, z, b, c) obtained by the following method simultaneouslyalong the fi...

  • Page 1337

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1311(1) When the rotation axes are the A– and C–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axisZCYXAACWorkpiecea+ tan–1I2) J2Kc+ tan–1JI(2) When the rotation axes are the B– and C–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axisZCYXBBCWorkpieceb+ tan–1I2) J2Kc+ tan...

  • Page 1338

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031312(3) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theX–axisZBAXBYAWorkpieceb+ tan–1J2) K2Ia+ tan–1J–K(4) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axis (master axis: B–axis)ZXBYABBWorkp...

  • Page 1339

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1313(5) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axis (master axis: A–axis)ZXYABBAWorkpiecea+ tan–1–JKa+ tan–1–JI2) K2When tool life management is used, the tool length compensation amountof the tool used is used ...

  • Page 1340

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031314#719650#6#5#4#3#2#1RAP#0RAM[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bit axisRAM Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axis directiontool length compensation.0 : Not used as the rotation axis.1 : Used as the rotation axis.Select two ...

  • Page 1341

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1315(Example 2)The controlled axes include only the linear axes X, Y, and Z. By using thetool attachment, the tool axis is tilted in the same tool axis direction aswhen the A– and C–axes are rotated.RAM (No. 19650#0)RAP (No. 19650#1)Angle (No. 19658)X114500...

  • Page 1342

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/03131619657Master rotation axis number[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axesWhen a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about the toolaxis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master...

  • Page 1343

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1317Example for setting parameters that determine the machine configurationTool axis direction: Z–axisAxis configuration: X, Y, Z, W, A, BRotation axes: A–axis (axis rotating about the X–axis), B–axis (axis rotating about the Y–axis) Master axis: A–...

  • Page 1344

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/03131819660Origin offset value of a rotation axis[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] 2 word axis[Unit of data] degreeIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitRotation axis0.010.0010.0001deg[Minimun unit of type] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis...

  • Page 1345

    B–63523EN–1/0310. TOOL FUNCTIONS1319#7ETH19665#6#5SVC#4SBP#3#2#1#0[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitSBP In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the control pointis:0 : Calculated automatically.1 : Set in parameter No. 19667.SVC In tool length compensation along the ...

  • Page 1346

    10. TOOL FUNCTIONSB–63523EN–1/031320Connection manual (This function)7.1.19RISC Processor OperationReference item

  • Page 1347

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND132111 PROGRAM COMMAND

  • Page 1348

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031322Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal pointcan be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points canbe specified with the following addresses:X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, FM series. . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 1349

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1323#73455#6#5#4#3#2#1#0AXD[Data type] Bit axisAXD If a decimal point is omitted for an address with which a decimal point canbe used, the value is determined:0 : In accordance with the least input increment.1 : In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calculator...

  • Page 1350

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031324Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.8.4Decimal point programmingOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.8.3Decimal point programmingSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)...

  • Page 1351

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1325There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G codesystem using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No.3401#6).G code list for T series (1/3)G codeGroupFunctionABCGroupFunctionG00G00G0001Positioning (Rapid traverse)G01G01G0...

  • Page 1352

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031326G code list for T series (2/3)G codeGroupFunctionABCGroupFunctionG32G33G3301Thread cuttingG34G34G3401Variable–lead thread cuttingG35G35G3501Circular threading CWG36G36G36Circular threading CCW (When the bit 3 (G36) of parameterNo. 3405 is set to 1)G36G36...

  • Page 1353

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1327G code list for T series (3/3)G codeGroupFunctionABCGroupFunctionG70G70G7200Finishing cycleG71G71G7300Stock removal in turningG72G72G7400Stock removal in facingG73G73G7500Pattern repeatingG74G74G76End face peck drillingG75G75G77Outer diameter/internal diam...

  • Page 1354

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031328#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0GSC3401GSB[Data type] BitGSB, GSC The G code system is set.GSCGSBG code00G code system A01G code system B10G code system C#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03402CLRG91G01[Data type] BitG01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleare...

  • Page 1355

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1329NOTE1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) ofparameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNCis reset, the modal G codes change as follows.(1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled.(2) When the system is cleared due to pow...

  • Page 1356

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031330Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.3PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)160is/180isAPPENDIX ESTATUS WHEN TURNINGPOWER ON, WHENCLEAR AND WHEN RESETSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63604EN)II...

  • Page 1357

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1331A program consists of the following components:Table 11.3Program componentsComponentsDescriptionsTape startSymbol indicating the start of a program fileLeader sectionUsed for the title of a program file, etc.Program startSymbol indicating the start of a pr...

  • Page 1358

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031332#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00100CTVSetting entry is acceptable.[Data type] BitCTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.0 : Not performed1 : Performed#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03201NPEN99[Data type] BitN99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of par...

  • Page 1359

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1333NumberMessageDescription001TH PARITY ALARMTH alarm (A character with incorrectparity was input).002TV PARITY ALARMTV alarm (The number of characters ina block is odd). This alarm will be gener-ated only when the TV check is effective(when TVC, bit 0 of set...

  • Page 1360

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031334Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active.[Output condition] “1”indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and “0”indicates tha...

  • Page 1361

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1335#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006ROSxROTxNOTEWhen this parameter is changed, turn off the power beforecontinuing operation.[Data type] Bit axisROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axisROSxROTxDescription00Linear axis@ Inch/metric conversion is done.@ All coordinate va...

  • Page 1362

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0313361250Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate systemsetting is performed[Data type] Two–word axisIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitLinear axis(Metric input)0.010.0010.0001mmLinear axis(Inch input)0.0010.00010.00001inch...

  • Page 1363

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1337#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03104MCN[Data type] BitMCN Machine position is:0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input.(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machineposition is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches forinch machin...

  • Page 1364

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031338WARNINGWhen switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) andvice versa, the tool compensation value must be re–setaccording to the least input increment.However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, toolcompensation values are automatically conve...

  • Page 1365

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1339This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that canbe distributed as pulses at high-speed by the macro compiler and macroexecutor. The function can also call and execute the data group as amachining cycle using the CNC command (G05 co...

  • Page 1366

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031340Data for the high speed cycle cutting is assigned to variables (#20000 to#85535) for the high–speed cycle cutting by the macro compiler andmacro executor.Configuration of the high speed cycle cutting dataNumber of registered cyclesHeader of cycle 1Heade...

  • Page 1367

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1341The header for high-speed cycle cutting data has the followingconfiguration:Total number of fixed data items for the 5th axisTotal number of fixed data items for the 4th axisCycle repetition count#20001/20017/20033..Cycle connection data#20002/20018/20034....

  • Page 1368

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031342––––r6 r5 r4 r3 r2 r1t6t5t4t3t2t115 14 13 12 11 109876543210The bits from t1 to t6, corresponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the fol-lowing meanings:0: Distribution data is always constant.1: Distribution data is variable or fixed.When the dist...

  • Page 1369

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1343#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IPC7501IPCIT2IT2IT1IT1IT0IT0CSP[Data type] BitCSP Cs contouring control function dedicated to a piston lathe is0 : Not used.1 : Used.IT0, IT1, IT2IT2IT1IT0000Interpolates the G05 data in 8ms001Interpolates the G05 data in 2ms010Interpolates...

  • Page 1370

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031344HUNx Specifies whether the unit of data to be distributed during cutting in ahigh-speed cycle is ten times the least input increment.0 : The unit of data is the same as the least input increment.1 : The unit of data is ten times the least input increment.N...

  • Page 1371

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1345NumberDescriptionMessage178G05 COMMANDED ING41/G42 MODEG05 was commanded in the G41/G42mode.Correct the program.179PARAM. (NO. 7510)SETTING ERRORThe number of controlled axes set by theparameter 7510 exceeds the maximumnumber. Modify the parameter setting ...

  • Page 1372

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031346Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, thecustom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logicoperations, and conditional branches for easy development of generalprograms such as pocketing and user–defined c...

  • Page 1373

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1347 P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius α : Start angle β : Angle between circles k : Number of circles[Classification] Input signal[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read bya custom macro as a typ...

  • Page 1374

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031348[Classification] Output signal[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read orwritten by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used forinterface signals between custom macros and the PMC.These signals cor...

  • Page 1375

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1349#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0UI007G054UI006UI005UI004UI003UI002UI001UI000UI015G055UI014UI013UI012UI011UI010UI009UI008UI023G056UI022UI021UI020UI019UI018UI017UI016UI031G057UI030UI029UI028UI027UI026UI025UI024UI107G276UI106UI105UI104UI103UI102UI101UI100UI115G277UI114UI113U...

  • Page 1376

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031350UO315F285UO314UO313UO312UO311UO310UO309UO308#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0UO323F286UO322UO321UO320UO319UO318UO317UO316UO331F287UO330UO329UO328UO327UO326UO325UO324#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0SBV6000SBMHGOHMCMGO[Data type] BitMGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro cont...

  • Page 1377

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1351NOTEThis bit is invalid when bit 0 (NOP) of parameter No. 3404 isset to 1. (M series)SBV Custom macro statement0 : Not stop the single block1 : Stops the single blockTo control single blocks in custom macro statements using systemvariable #3003, use this ...

  • Page 1378

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031352PV5 Custom macro common variables0 : Outputs custom macro common variables #500 through #599.1 : Outputs custom macro common variables #100 through #199 and#500 through #599.CRO ISO code output using a BPRNT command or a DPRNT command0 : Outputs only LF af...

  • Page 1379

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND13536030M code that calls the program entered in file[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M codefor calling a program in a file stored on the external input/output device.NOTEThe M...

  • Page 1380

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0313546071M code that calls the subprogram of program number 90016072M code that calls the subprogram of program number 90026073M code that calls the subprogram of program number 90036074M code that calls the subprogram of program number 90046075M code that call...

  • Page 1381

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1355NOTESetting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be calledby M00.6090ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 90046091ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)Th...

  • Page 1382

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031356NumberDescriptionMessage114FORMAT ERROR IN MACROThere is an error in other formats than <For-mula>.Modify the program.115ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBERA value not defined as a variable number isdesignated in the custom macro, or theheader contents are impro...

  • Page 1383

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1357NumberDescriptionMessage129ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESSAn address which is not allowed in <Argu-ment Designation > is used.Modify the program.199MACRO WORD UNDEFINEDUndefined macro word was used. Modifythe custom macro.CAUTIONMachine tool builders: You a...

  • Page 1384

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031358When a program is being executed, another program can be called byinputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function isreferred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program aninterrupt command in the following format:M96 Pf...

  • Page 1385

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1359When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent programoperation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input toexecute the program specified by Pxxxx.Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 11.6.2) issued after M97is ignored.Do not en...

  • Page 1386

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031360MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code0 : M96/M971 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)MSB Interrupt program0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt)1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprog...

  • Page 1387

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1361Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.15.11Interruption type custom macroOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.15.11Interruption type custom macroSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Mac...

  • Page 1388

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031362Example) When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specifiedas follows:Custom macro variables 100 to 109: Used commonly between two pathsCustom macro variables 110 to 149: Used independently for each pathNOTE1 This parameter is ded...

  • Page 1389

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1363In this function, the macro programs, which are made by the machine toolbuilder (MTB), are stored in flash ROM. The macro programs, which arestored in flash ROM, are loaded to the program memory area for theembedded macro (DRAM) when the power supply is tu...

  • Page 1390

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031364Parameters for embedded macro exist both FROM and DRAM. If thekeyword in the parameters of FROM is not matched that of SRAM (lockstate), the embedded macro function executes by using the parameters onFROM. When the keyword is matched on both FROM and SRAM(...

  • Page 1391

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND13651) Program numberAs for the embedded macro program number, the first programnumber is set to parameter No.12011 and the last program number isset to No.12012. The remainder program numbers become the userprogram numbers of the tape storage memory area. Whe...

  • Page 1392

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031366It is not possible to move from the tape storage memory program tothe embedded macro program or from the embedded macro programto the tape storage memory program by the program number changeoperation. P/S alarm 74 is generated when doing. At the editable s...

  • Page 1393

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND13675. Embedded macro–calling G–code and program No. (ParameterNo. 12020 – 12049)At meeting all the following requirements, the parameter number12013 keyword cannot be changed.(1) There is a password. (Password 00)(2) The range of the embedded macro prog...

  • Page 1394

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0313687) Input to FROM and output from FROMThe ”INMC” file for the embedded macro stored in FROM can beinput and output to the memory card by BOOT SYSTEM. Please referto the maintenance manual for the details.8) Common variables #200 – #499Common variables...

  • Page 1395

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1369NOTE1 When one program exists, the parameters for embeddedmacro program number can not be changed.2 During 5) – 9) processes, if the CNC power supply is turnedoff and on without storing macro program in FROM, macroprograms are deleted.D New making (2)1) ...

  • Page 1396

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031370Following messages are displayed in the place on present time.D ”PROG–SAV” –– Please stores the embedded macro programs.This display is blink when the embedded macro programs are edited.It informs that the contents of edited the embedded macro pr...

  • Page 1397

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1371There is no problem even if a program in a usual tape storage memoryarea is edited or the parameter for embedded macro is changed and theCNC power supply is turned off/on.2) At the editable embedded macro program state, when program all clearoperation (”...

  • Page 1398

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031372#712001#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IMREP[Data type] BitIMREP Action in response to an attempt to register an embedded macro programwhose number is the same as that of an existing program0 : An alarm is generated.1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program ...

  • Page 1399

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND137312011First program number for embedded macro[Data type] 2–Word[Valid data range] 1 to 9999999912012Last program number for embedded macro[Data type] 2–Word[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999The program numbers for embedded macro are set by these parameter...

  • Page 1400

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0313741. Valid / invalid of embedded macro program over registration(Parameter No. 12001#0)2. Valid / invalid of embedded macro program edit and reference(Parameter No. 12010)3. Embedded macro program No. (Parameter No. 12011,12012)4. Embedded macro series/editi...

  • Page 1401

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND137512020G–code No. for embedded macro(the 1st set)12023G–code No. for embedded macro(the 2nd set)::::12047G–code No. for embedded macro(the 10th set)[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 1 to 99912021Macro programs No. for embedded macro(the 1st set)12024...

  • Page 1402

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031376Embedded macro for milling is available for programming four cannedcycles (Hole machining, Facing, Side cutting, Pocketing).The G codes from G200 to G233 are used to call the macro. In addition,of alarms 3000 to 3999 that can be issued by custom macros, al...

  • Page 1403

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1377A maximum of 8 points can be specified. The following table showsaddresses, which are used in arguments for X and Y coordinate of theposition of each hole.X coordinateY coordinatePoint – 1XYPoint – 2ABPoint – 3CDPoint – 4EFPoint – 5HIPoint – 6J...

  • Page 1404

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031378Y: Start point YY coordinate of the position of first hole.A: Line angleThe angle between the X axis and the straight line.If there in no input, 0 is regarded.N: Holes numberThe total number of holes, including the number of the points to beomitted.T: Pitc...

  • Page 1405

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1379Hole Machining Sequence1234BCDLINEQ: Pattern continueSelection whether to continue entering another hole pattern. 1: End2: Continue.This is a menu for specifying the holes positions of a grid.Create ISO code program in the following form.G202 X__ Y__ U__ V...

  • Page 1406

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031380R: U – V angleThe acute angle between the line defined by the points and thehorizontal direction and vertical direction.It is considered to be a right angle if not input.123GRIDHole Machining SequenceOmit point :To designate the point to be omitted, inpu...

  • Page 1407

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1381V: V – lengthThe length in the vertical directionI: U – numberThe number of the holes in the horizontal direction.J: V – numberThe number of the holes in the vertical directionK: X – U angleThe angle between the line in the horizontal direction and...

  • Page 1408

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031382X: Center point XX coordinate of the center of the circle.Y: Center point YY coordinate of the center of the circle.R: RadiusThe radius of the circle.A: Start angleThe angle between the segment from the center of the circle to startingpoint and the X axis....

  • Page 1409

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1383Arc : same space arcArc : different space arc(X, Y)1243TANRXYAB(X, Y)CDERXYD In the case of Same space arc :X: Center point XX coordinate of the center of the circle.Y: Center point YY coordinate of the center of the circle.R: RadiusThe radius of the circl...

  • Page 1410

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031384A: Start angleThe angle between the segment from the center of the circle tostarting point and the X axis.If there in no input, 0 is regarded and the starting point is consideredto be on the X axis.Pitch space :The angle between the segment from the center...

  • Page 1411

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1385This is a menu for facing the surface on a square shape plane.Create ISO code program in the following form.G210 P__ L__ Z__ B__ J__ H__ F__ C__ W__ X__ Y__ D D D D ;HBJZKX ZNCMUV. (X, Y)XYV.(X, Y)MUCRQXYFacing : Z–X planeSquare surface : Uni and Bi dire...

  • Page 1412

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031386C: Cutting widthThe machining allowance one of pass in the XY direction.It is specified a rate (%) of the tool. (less than 70%)X: Center point XX coordinate of the center of the square.Y: Center point YY coordinate of the center of the square.U: U–length...

  • Page 1413

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1387E: Start pointThe starting position of the machining (1, 2, 3, 4).If there is no input, 1 is regarded.[4][2][3][1]M: Approach gapThe gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and thework.If there is no input, 5mm is regarded.N: Escape gapTh...

  • Page 1414

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031388a) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (ENDPOINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH)3. Cutting feed to the opposite side (B) of the starting point.4. Rise a...

  • Page 1415

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1389a) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (ENDPOINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH)3. Cutting feed to the other side (B) in the X axis (U direction).4. Rap...

  • Page 1416

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031390a) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (ENDPOINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH)3. Cut spirally and finally move in cutting feed by an amount equalto ES...

  • Page 1417

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1391T: Machining process1: Rough cutting2: Finish cuttingZ: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surfaceB: Removal depthThe machining allowance in the Z direction of the cutting surfaceJ: Removal pitchThe machining allowance of one pass for rough cu...

  • Page 1418

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031392E: Start pointThe starting position of the machining (1, 2, 3, 4).If there is no input, 1 is regarded.[4][2][3][1]M: Approach gapThe gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and thework.If there is no input, 5mm is regarded.N: Escape gapTh...

  • Page 1419

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1393This is a menu for cutting the square shape side.Create ISO code program in the following form.G220 P__ Z__ S__ I__ D__ B__ J__ H__ F__ E__ D D D D ;ZHBJCIIDSXZUV.(X, Y)RKXYSide cutting : Z–X planeSquare sideT: Machining process1: Roughing2: Bottom finis...

  • Page 1420

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031394D: Tool small diameterThe small diameter of chamfer tool.WorkpieceToolDiameterIDJ: Chamfer angleThe tool nose angle of a chamfering tool.H: Tool out depthThe thrust depth of a chamfering tool.WorkpieceToolToolHJF: The feed rate of the tool.E: Z_cut feed ra...

  • Page 1421

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1395C: ClearanceThe amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approachor escape movement. The default data is 3mm.W: Cutting direction1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting too...

  • Page 1422

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031396N: Start pointThe starting position of the machining (1, 2).If there is no input, 1 is regarded.[2][1][2][1]Out–sideIn–sideThe following table shows addresses used in arguments in eachmachining process.G220TZSIDBJHIDJHMFEXYUVRough########____#######Bot...

  • Page 1423

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1397a) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z+ BOTTOM REMOVAL + CLEARANCE)3. Descent along the lower Z axis in cutting feed (Z–CUT FEEDRATE) by the pitch (BOTTO...

  • Page 1424

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031398d) In the case of chamfering1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (B).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the cutting point. (Cutting point : It is calculated by END POINT Z, BOTTOMREMOVAL, CHAMFER REMOVAL, TOOL SMALL DIA.CHAMFER ANGLE, TOOL OUT ...

  • Page 1425

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1399T: Machining process1: Roughing2: Bottom finishing3: Side finishing4: ChamferingZ: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surfaceS: Side removalThe side machining allowance.I: Side pitchThe side machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting. R...

  • Page 1426

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031400X: Center point XX coordinate of the center of the circle.Y: Center point YY coordinate of the center of the circle.R: RadiusThe radius of a circle.C: ClearanceThe amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approachor escape movement. The de...

  • Page 1427

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1401D Movements :Except for the shape of the circle, the basic movements are similar tothose of Square side.This is a menu for cutting the track shape side.Create ISO code program in the following form.G222 P__ Z__ S__ I__ D__ B__ J__ H__ F__ E__ D D D D ;ZHB...

  • Page 1428

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031402J: Chamfer angleThe tool nose angle of a chamfering tool.H: Tool out depthThe thrust depth of a chamfering tool.F: The feed rate of the tool.E: Z_cut feed rate The cutting feed rate in Zaxis direction from point R.(Point R = End point Z + Bottom removal + ...

  • Page 1429

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1403The following table shows addresses used in arguments in eachmachining process..G222TZSIDBJHIDJHMFEXYURRough########____#######Bottom finish######_#____#######Side finish##___###____#######Chamfer##___#__###########G222CWAKKNRough&&&&_&...

  • Page 1430

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031404I: Side pitchThe side machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting. Roughcutting is done in one pass if not input.D: Side finishThe side machining allowance of the side finish cutting. This is cut inone pass.Side finish cutting is not done if not inpu...

  • Page 1431

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1405W: Cutting direction1, 4: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction2, 3: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the reverse direction If there is no input, 1 is regarded.(X, Y)(X, Y)[4: Down–cut][3: Up–cut][2: Up–cut][1: ...

  • Page 1432

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031406D Movements :Rapid Traverse (G00)Feed Traverse (G01)AZXYXPoint RBottom PitchClearanceBottom RemovalBottom FinishSide RemovalSide FinishSide PitchApproach/Escape GapClearancea) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2....

  • Page 1433

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1407c) In the case of side finish cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z+ BOTTOM REMOVAL + CLEARANCE).3. Rapid traverse toward one side by the allowance (SIDEFINISH).4. Descent along ...

  • Page 1434

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031408This is a menu for pocketing the square shape.Create ISO code program in the following form.G230 P__ Z__ B__ J__ H__ F__ C__ W__ X__ Y__ D D D D ;ZHBJMCDXZR.(X, Y)UVKXYPocketing : Z–X planeSquare pocketT: Machining process1: Roughing2: Bottom finishing3:...

  • Page 1435

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1409J: Chamfer angleThe tool nose angle of a chamfering tool.H: Tool out depthThe thrust depth of a chamfering tool.ToolToolWorkpieceHJF: The feed rate of the tool.E: Z_cut feed rateThe cutting feed rate in Zaxis direction from point R.(Point R = End point Z +...

  • Page 1436

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031410K: Approach / escapeThe radius of approach or escape. The movement is performed as aquarter arc.It is calculated automatically if not input.A: Incline angleThe angle between the U side and X axis, when the work is inclinedwith respect to the X axis. It is ...

  • Page 1437

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1411D Movements :Rapid Traverse (G00)Feed Traverse (G01)ZXYXPoint RRemoval PitchClearanceRemoval DepthBottom FinishSide FinishCutting Widtha) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point.2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to poi...

  • Page 1438

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314122. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the cutting point. (Cutting point : It is calculated by END POINT Z, REMOVALDEPTH, REMOVAL PITCH, CLEARANCE)3. Cut into the workpiece following a circular path.4. Cutting of the side finish allowance (SIDE FINISH).5...

  • Page 1439

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1413T: Machining process1: Roughing2: Bottom finishing3: Side finishing4: Chamfering 5: DrillingZ: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surfaceB: Removal depthThe depth of the pocket.J: Removal pitchThe machining allowance of one pass for rough cu...

  • Page 1440

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031414M: ClearanceThe amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approachor escape movement. The default data is 3mm.W: Cutting direction1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting too...

  • Page 1441

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1415Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surfaceB: Removal depthThe depth of the pocket.J: Removal pitchThe machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Zdirection.Rough cutting is done in one pass if not input.H: Bottom finishThe bot...

  • Page 1442

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031416W: Cutting direction1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the reverse direction If there is no input, 1 is regarded.K: Approach / escapeThe radius of approach or escape. The movem...

  • Page 1443

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1417T: Machining process1: Roughing2: Bottom finishing3: Side finishing4: ChamferingZ: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surfaceB: Removal depthThe depth of the groove.J: Removal pitchThe machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Z...

  • Page 1444

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031418K: Approach gapThe gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and theworkpiece .If there is no input, 5mm is regarded.Q: Escape gapThe gap between the tool edge and the workpiece when the tool movesaway from the work. If there is no input, 5...

  • Page 1445

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1419D Movements :Rapid Traverse (G00)Feed Traverse (G01)AZXYX(X, Y)BPoint RRemoval PitchClearanceRemoval DepthBottom FinishSide FinishGroove WidthApproach / Escape GapCutting Widtha) In the case of rough cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A)...

  • Page 1446

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031420c) In the case of side finish cutting1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (B).2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z+ REMOVAL DEPTH + CLEARANCE)3. Move down along Z axis in cutting feed (Z–CUT FEED RATE)by the pitch (REMOVAL ...

  • Page 1447

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1421NOTE1 This function requires the following optional functions.S Embedded MacroS Canned cycleS Custom macro BThis function consists of 83 programs. So consider thenumber of programs which an operator requires and specifyone of the following optional functio...

  • Page 1448

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031422NumberContentsMessage3004TOOL IS TOO BIG.Machining is impossible because thecutter diameter is too large.3005APPROACH AMOUNTISBIG.The tool interferes with the oppositeedge because the length of approach istoo long.3006CORNER RADIUS[R] ISBIG.Corner R interf...

  • Page 1449

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1423Data used in common to every measurement cycle must previously be setin macro variables (common variables).1. Calibration macro variablesThe following macro variables are used to calibrate the probe.Executing a calibration cycle sets up these variables aut...

  • Page 1450

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031424S #215: Return distance (e) after the second contactThis macro variable specifies the distance (measured in mm)through which the prove is to return after it touches themeasurement face the second time.NOTEAn alarm is issued if the setting of any of the abo...

  • Page 1451

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1425Z: Movement distanceSpecifies the distance from the measurement start point to the ringgage.D: Gage line–to–table distanceSpecifies the distance from the gage line to the table.H: Ring gage heightSpecifies the height of the ring gage.F: Movement speed...

  • Page 1452

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314262) The probe moves at the speed fa through the distance ”R – a” in thepositive X–axis direction.3) The probe moves at the speed fa in the range ”R + g” until it touchesthe ring gage.4) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X...

  • Page 1453

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1427Measurement sequence:What is done during measurement is described below.1) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to apoint the distance Z away from the measurement start point.2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the positive ...

  • Page 1454

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314283) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”R + g – stylus ball radius”until it touches the ring gage.4) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X–axiscoordinate where it was before the start of measurement, and makesthe same m...

  • Page 1455

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1429F: Movement speedSpecify the speed at which the probe is to move for measurement.W: Workpiece coordinate systemSelect a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter thecorresponding number listed below:G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G57...

  • Page 1456

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031430Executing G180 obtains a reference point from the input and measuredvalues, and outputs the obtained values to the W–specified workpiecezero point offset value and the following macro variables.#250: End face measurement value (machine coordinate system...

  • Page 1457

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14312) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to apoint the distance Z away from the measurement start point.3) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”V/2 – g + stylus ballradius” until it touches the measurement face (t...

  • Page 1458

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031432W: Workpiece coordinate systemSelect a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter thecorresponding number listed below:G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G57, 5 = G58, and6 = G59If 48 coordinate systems are valid, the following numbers ar...

  • Page 1459

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1433The center position and outside radius of a cylinder are measured bycreating a G code program in the following format:G183Z__R__F__W__ ;ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄRZÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄagbMeasurement start pointSecond measurementsessionFirst measurementsessio...

  • Page 1460

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314346) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X coordinatewhere it was before the start of measurement, and makes the samemeasurement as stated above in the negative X–axis direction and theY–axis direction (the first measurement session)...

  • Page 1461

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1435F: Movement speedSpecifies the speed at which the probe is to move for measurement.W: Workpiece coordinate systemSelect a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter thecorresponding number listed below:G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G...

  • Page 1462

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031436The center of a rectangle and the size of its outside sides in the X–axis andY–axis directions are measured by creating a G code program in thefollowing format:G185Z__U__V__F__W__ ;ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄVUZÄÄÄÄagbMeasurementstart poin...

  • Page 1463

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14373) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”U/2 – g + stylus ballradius” until it touches the measurement face (the first measurementsession).4) The probe returns through the distance b at the rapid traverse rate.5) The probe moves at the specifi...

  • Page 1464

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031438U: Length in the X–axis directionSpecifies the nominal length of the rectangle in the X–axis direction.V: Length in the Y–axis directionSpecifies the nominal length of the rectangle in the Y–axis direction.F: Movement speedSpecifies the speed at wh...

  • Page 1465

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1439The position of an outside corner is measured by creating a G codeprogram in the following format:G187A__B__C__D__U__V__I__J__F__W__ ;[2][3] (C, D)[4]IJUV[1] (A, B)Measurement start pointA: X coordinate of measurement point 1Specifies the X coordinate of m...

  • Page 1466

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031440NOTEBefore issuing a command for this cycle, be sure to set theprobe to an approximate measurement start point.Measurement sequence:1) The probe moves at the speed fa to a point the distance ”U – a – stylusball radius” away from the measurement sta...

  • Page 1467

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1441V: Distance in the Y–axis directionSpecifies the distance from the measurement start point to themeasurement end face in the Y–axis direction.I: Increment in the X–axis directionSpecifies an increment (distance from measurement point [1] tomeasuremen...

  • Page 1468

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031442The center position and radius of a bolt hole circle (for three holes) aremeasured by creating a G code program in the following format:G189Z__R__D__A__B__C__F__W__ ;ZDRCABMeasurementstart pointSecondholeFirst holeThird holeZ: Height along the Z–axisSpec...

  • Page 1469

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1443Measurement sequence:1) The probe moves to the center of the first bolt hole at the speed fa.2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to apoint the distance Z away from the measurement start point.3) The probe moves at the spee...

  • Page 1470

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031444The center position of each of four holes is measured by creating a G codeprogram in the following format:G190Z__D__A__B__C__E__H__I__J__K__F__W__ ;DZ(A, B)(C, E)(H, I)(J, K)Measurementstart pointFourth holeThird holeFirst holeSecond holeZ: Height along th...

  • Page 1471

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1445NOTEBefore issuing a command for this cycle, be sure to set theprobe above the approximate center of the first hole.Measurement sequence:1) The probe moves to the center of the first hole at the speed fa.2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z...

  • Page 1472

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031446The angle formed by one side of a workpiece and the X–axis is measuredby creating a G–code program in the following format:G191A__B__C__I__D__J__F__ ;[1][2]DXY1234J(A, B)(C, I)Measurement start pointA: X coordinate of measurement point 1Specifies the X...

  • Page 1473

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14474) The probe moves at the specified speed F in the range ”b + g” until ittouches the measurement face (the second measurement session).5) The probe returns through the distance e at the rapid traverse rate.6) The probe makes the same measurement as s...

  • Page 1474

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314483) The probe moves at the speed fa in the positive X–axis direction to apoint the distance ”D/2 – a – stylus ball radius” away from themeasurement start point.4) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”D/2 + g – stylus ballradius” unti...

  • Page 1475

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1449NOTE1 Using this function requires the following options:S Embedded macroS Custom macro B2 This function consists of 30 programs.3 This function uses common variables #200 to #290.4 This function uses program Nos. 9170 to 9199.5 This function uses G codes,...

  • Page 1476

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031450NumberMessageDescription3101SETTING DATA ERROR.ADD. AAddress A or the data that should followit has not been entered. Alternatively,the entered data is incorrect.3102SETTING DATA ERROR.ADD. BAddress B or the data that should followit has not been entered....

  • Page 1477

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1451NumberDescriptionMessage3121SETTING DATA ERROR.ADD. UAddress U or the data that should followit has not been entered. Alternatively,the entered data is incorrect.3122SETTING DATA ERROR.ADD. VAddress V or the data that should followit has not been entered....

  • Page 1478

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031452NumberDescriptionMessage3140ERROR: ESCAPEOFFSETThe return value to be used after theprobe touches the measurement facein the second measurement session(#215) has not been entered.3141CHECK SENSORSIGNALCheck the sensor signal.3142NO TOUCHThe probe is not in...

  • Page 1479

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1453Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can bespecified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,normally more than one block is required. In additio...

  • Page 1480

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031454In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reversedirection may be output.The following canned cycles require spindle control:M seriesT seriesReverse tapping cycle G74Face tapping cycle (G84)Fine boring cycle G76Side tapping cycle (G...

  • Page 1481

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1455Note) It is possible to not outputM05 code by using parame-ter M5T (No. 5101#6).Next block(G99 mode)FINFINMFMFM03M05FINFINMFMFM05M04ZX, YZZD G74 (Counter tapping cycle)FINFINMFMFM19M05FINFINMFMFM03M03ZZZReturn to ini-tial level inG98 modeX, YX, YZZFINFINMF...

  • Page 1482

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031456FINFINFINMFMFM03M03M05MFNext block(G98 mode)Return to initial level in G98 modeX, YZZFINFINMFMFMFMFMFM05 M19M03M05M19MFM03FINFINFINFINZZZX, Y(Note)It is possible to not output M05 code using param-eter M5B (no. 5101#7).Back boring cycle is not used in G99 ...

  • Page 1483

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1457X, C(Z, C)Z(X)Z(X)FINFINMFMFM04M05FINFINMFMFM05M03ZZ(X)Dwell(Note 1)D G84 (Face tapping cycle)G88 (Side tapping cycle)Next block(G98 mode)Next block(G99 mode)(Note 2)Dwell(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) When parameter M5T (No. 5101#6)=0, M05 is not output.(Note ...

  • Page 1484

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031458[Classification] Output signal[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:– The system is in tapping cycle mode.G74, G84: M seriesG84, G88: T series– The system is in tapping mode.G63: M ser...

  • Page 1485

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1459RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 orG87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.RD2RD1G17G18G1900+X+Z+Y01–X–Z–Y10+Y+X+Z11–Y–X–ZM5T When a spindle rotates from the forw...

  • Page 1486

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314605110C–axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 99This parameter sets the C–axis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle.5111Dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle[Data type] Wo...

  • Page 1487

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14615114Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73[Data type] WordIncrement systemIS-AIS-BIS-CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.001mmInch input0.0010.00010.0001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 32767For M seri...

  • Page 1488

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314625115Clearance canned cycle G83[Data type] WordIncrement systemIS-AIS-BIS-CUnitMetric input0.010.0010.001mmInch input0.0010.00010.0001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 32767G83 for M seriesq : Depth of cutd : Clearance valueR pointZ pointqqqddFig. 11.7 (g) Pe...

  • Page 1489

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1463Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.13.1Canned cycleOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.13.3Canned cycle for hole machiningSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–...

  • Page 1490

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031464Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an externaloperation function signal can be output to allow the machine to performspecific operation.G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command )Every time positioning for the IP_ move command is c...

  • Page 1491

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1465[Classification] Output signal[Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the externalmotion function, and that a special external operation is required.[Output condition] For details of the output condition and procedure, see the ...

  • Page 1492

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031466The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance,the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for roughmachining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.The following example shows stock removals in tu...

  • Page 1493

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1467[Classification] Input signal[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamferingdistance in parameter No. 5130.[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threadingcycle.When the signal is set to 0, c...

  • Page 1494

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031468QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a checkto see if the program contains a block that has the sequence numberspecified in address Q is:0 : Not made.1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot befound,...

  • Page 1495

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14695135Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction5136Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z–axis direction[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS-BIS-CUnitMetric input0.0010.001mmInch input0.00010.0001inch[Valid data ...

  • Page 1496

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314705140Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS-BIS-CUnitMetric input0.0010.001mmInch input0.00010.0001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in multiple rep...

  • Page 1497

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1471NumberMessageDescription061ADDRESS P/Q NOTFOUND IN G70–G73Address P or Q is not specified in G70,G71, G72, or G73 command.Modify the program.062ILLEGAL COMMAND ING71–G761The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero ornegative value.2The repetitive count in G...

  • Page 1498

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314721 Necessary parameters (such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W, and R) must be setcorrectly for an individual block that specifies a multiple repetitivecanned cycle.2 In G71, G72, and G73 blocks having a sequence number specifiedusing P, always specify G00 or G01 in gro...

  • Page 1499

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1473Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.13.1II.13.2Canned cycleMultiple repetitive canned cycleSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63604EN)II.13.1II.13.2Canned cycleMultiple repetitive canned cy...

  • Page 1500

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031474Mirror image can be applied to the X–axis with G code.G68 : Start double turret mirror imageG69 : Mirror image cancelWhen G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret,and the X–axis sign is reversed from the programmed command. ...

  • Page 1501

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND14751290Distance between two turrets for mirror image[Data type] Two–wordIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CUnitMillimeter machine0.010.0010.0001mmInch input0.0010.00010.00001inch[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999Set the distance between two turrets for mirror...

  • Page 1502

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031476Indexing the table on a machining center is a complished by specifyinga positioning angle.Before and after indexing, the table is automatically unclamped orclamped .The control axis that indexes the table can be named A, B or C. It willbe referred to as ...

  • Page 1503

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1477(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is set to “1”.This completes the sequence.The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.B command (independent) BbbbbB axis servo on for position controlB axis unclamp sign...

  • Page 1504

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031478The figure below shows the timing chart for type–A manual referenceposition return of the B axis.B axis manual feed selection signal +Jb*1<G100>B axis position control servo ONB axis unclamp signal BUCLP<F061#0>B axis unclamp completion sig...

  • Page 1505

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1479[Classification] Output signal[Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch orshot pin.[Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in thebasic procedure for positioning the index ...

  • Page 1506

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031480#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0*BECLPG038*BEUCP#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F061BCLPBUCLP#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006ROSxROTx[Data type] Bit axisROTx, ROSx Define linear or rotation axisROSxROTxDescription00Linear axis@ Inch/metric conversion is done.@ All coordinate values are linear axis t...

  • Page 1507

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1481#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0IDX5500SIMG90INCABSRELDDP[Data type] BitDDP Definition of index values0 : Conventional method (Example IS–B: B1; = 0.001 deg)1 : Calculator method (Example IS–B: B1; = 1.000 deg)REL Relative position display of index table indexing ...

  • Page 1508

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314825511Negative direction rotation command M code[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 2550 : No M code is defined to set the index table rotation to the negativedirection. The rotation direction is specified using a command andparameter (INC, #3 of parame...

  • Page 1509

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1483CAUTION1 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but itsaddress must be different from that of the indexing axis.2 If the incremental command is used for indexing of the indextable, the workpiece zero point offset value on the indextable axis must al...

  • Page 1510

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031484Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.13.11Index table indexing functionSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)II.13.5Index table indexing functionReference Item

  • Page 1511

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1485A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be magnified orreduced with the same or different rates of magnification.The magnification rate can be specified in the program or by a paramete...

  • Page 1512

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031486Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negativemagnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set aparameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis scaling (mirrorimage).Then, set parameter SCLx (No. 54...

  • Page 1513

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1487#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0SCR5400XSC[Data type] BitXSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image0 : Not active (The scaling magnification is specified by P.)1 : ActiveSCR Scaling magnification unit0 : 0.00001 times (1/100,000)1 : 0.001 times#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05401SCLx...

  • Page 1514

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0314885421Scaling magnification for every axis[Data type] Two–word axis[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400)[Valid data range]*999999X*1, 1X999999This parameter sets the scaling magnification for every axis.Number...

  • Page 1515

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1489A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it is possibleto modify a program using a rotation command. This is useful when aworkpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the programmedposition on the machine. This is also useful w...

  • Page 1516

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031490(α,β)Angle of rotationCenter ofrotation0Rotation plane G17YXRFig. 11.13 (b)Coordinate system rotation#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05400RIN[Data type] BitRIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R)0 : Specified by an absolute method1 : Specified by G90 or G915410Angular ...

  • Page 1517

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1491NumberMessageDescription144ILLEGAL PLANE SE-LECTEDThe coordinate rotation plane and arcor cutter compensation C plane mustbe the same. Modify the program.5302ILLEGAL COMMAND ING68 MODEA command to set the coordinate sys-tem is specified in the coordinate s...

  • Page 1518

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031492The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying thecenter of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angulardisplacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite useful forthree–dimensional machining on a diesinking machin...

  • Page 1519

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1493#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0DAC3104DALDRCDRL[Data type] BitDRL Relative position0 : The actual position displayed includes tool length offset value (Mseries)/tool offset value (T series).1 : The programmed position displayed does not include tool lengthoffset value (M...

  • Page 1520

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031494NumberMessageDescription047ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTFor startup of three–dimensional toolcompensation or three–dimensionalcoordinate conversion, two or moreaxes were specified in the same direc-tion (basic and parallel axes.)048BASIC 3 AXIS NOTFOUNDFor start...

  • Page 1521

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1495A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. Inaddition, a tool can move forward again along the path that the tool hasretraced. The tool can then resume machining according to the programwhen it returns to the position where it starte...

  • Page 1522

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031496[Classification] Input signal[Function] Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the toolwas moved in automatic operation (memory command, tape command,manual data input).[Operation] When RVS turns to “1”, the tool retraces the...

  • Page 1523

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1497Retrace end Re–forwarding start(Retrace signal RVS is “0”)Position to which auxiliaryfunction is output duringretracingBlock in which the move command andauxiliary function are includedRetrace start(Retrace signal RVS is “1”)Position to which aux...

  • Page 1524

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031498WARNINGPositioning (G00)If non–linear–interpolation positioning is executed (the LRPbit (bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 0), the retrace toolpath will not agree with the forward tool path. There–forward tool path agrees with the forward tool ...

  • Page 1525

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1499The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machinetool builders to executable programs, registers them in the flash ROMmodule, and executes them to solve problems as described below.NC programs are divided into two types: Programs that a...

  • Page 1526

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031500In peck drilling, the tool enters and retracts from hole based on anoverload torque detection signal (skip signal) until the designed holedepth is reached. The spindle speed and cutting feedrate are changed oneach entry of the hole.The cycle is realized b...

  • Page 1527

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1501The cutting feedrate programmed with the F word is changed during thesecond and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5166 and5167 specify the ratio of change for the case in which a skip signal wasreceived during the previous cutting operation an...

  • Page 1528

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031502NOTEThis signal is used also as a skip signal. (See Section 14.3.)[Classification] Output signal[Function] Indicates whether small–diameter peck drilling is in progress.[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” under the following conditions.S When...

  • Page 1529

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND15035164Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after anoverload torque signal is received[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 to 255This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed change caused bythe ov...

  • Page 1530

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/0315045167Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted withoutan overload torque signal received[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 to 255This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate change during ape...

  • Page 1531

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND15055172Speed of retraction to point R when no I address is defined[Data type] Word[Unit of data] mm/min[Valid data range] 0 to 4000This parameter sets the speed of retraction to point R when no I address isdefined.5173Speed advancing to the bottom of a hole w...

  • Page 1532

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031506WARNINGForwarding or retracting is not performed by rapid traversepositioning. Instead, it is performed with the sameinterpolation as for cutting feed. This means exponentialacceleration/deceleration is performed. However, the toollife management functi...

  • Page 1533

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1507Retract can occur during high–speed machining by setting the high–speedcycle machining retract signal HSRT to 1.Additionally, a retract path and speed must be defined for each axis.To use retracting during high–speed cycle machining, it is necessary ...

  • Page 1534

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031508[Example](1) Parameter No. 7515 setting < remaining distance for the current cycleA number of pulses for retracting based on the parameter–specifieddistance are superimposed on a usual operation. When the operationends, the CNC shifts to an automatic...

  • Page 1535

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1509(2) Parameter No. 7515 setting y remaining distribution count for thecurrent cycleA number of pulses for retracting until the end of the current cycle aresuperimposed on a usual operation. When retracting ends, the CNCshifts to an automatic operation paus...

  • Page 1536

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031510A retract cycle is created using the same methods (including the cycleconnection, cycle repetition count, and data specification methods) as forordinary cycles.The retracting signal HSRA <F062#2> remains 1 during retracting.(Example)Machining cycle d...

  • Page 1537

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1511NOTEWhen the high–speed cycle machining retract function isused, up to five axes can be controlled for high–speed cyclemachining.Header configuration when retracting is enabled#20001/20017/20033..(#200001/200017/200033..)Cycle repetition count#20002/20...

  • Page 1538

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031512[Classification] Input signal[Function] Starts high–speed cycle machining retracting.[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows:D If high–speed cycle machining is under way, and retracting is enabledfor the current mach...

  • Page 1539

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND15137515Retracting distribution count for high–speed cycle machining retracting[Data type] Two–wordThis parameter specifies a retracting distance for high–speed cyclemachining. If the machining cycle ends before the specified is reached,retracting ends ...

  • Page 1540

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031514This function cancels a repetition cycle operation in high–speed cyclemachining and causes a skip to the header information connected next.Skip signals (HCSKP1 to HCSKP4) sent from a size measuring device(sensor) can be used to skip a currently executed ...

  • Page 1541

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1515A repetition cycle is canceled, and a skip to the header operation cycleconnected next is made. A skip is not performed at a midway point of acycle operation.ExampleG05P10001L3;Cycle 1 Connection information 2 Number of repetitions 1Cycle 2 Connecti...

  • Page 1542

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031516Relationships between the header configuration and P code vari-able numbers when skip operation is enabled#20001/20017/20033..(#200001/200017/200033..)Cycle repetition count#20002/20018/20034..(#200002/200018/200034..)Cycle connection information#20003/200...

  • Page 1543

    B–63523EN–1/0311. PROGRAM COMMAND1517This function supports learning control. Up to five learning data areas areprovided. When the cycle operation is changed by a skip signal, thelearning data area is also changed. HCSKP1HCSKP2HCSKP3HCSKP4Skip operationNormal high–speed cyclemachiningS...

  • Page 1544

    11. PROGRAM COMMANDB–63523EN–1/031518#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0HCSKP4G065HCSKP3HCSKP2HCSKP1CAUTION1 Skip operation cannot be performed during emergent returnoperation of a high–speed cycle.2 For skip operation, the maximum number of axes forhigh–speed cycle machining is five. If six axes are set, ...

  • Page 1545

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT151912 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

  • Page 1546

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031520Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each displayscreen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time.Time information can be read and written.System variables for t...

  • Page 1547

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1521This function displays a history of the key stroke and signal operations,performed by the CNC operator, when a failure or CNC alarm occurs.The following history data is recorded:(1) MDI key operation sequencesExample: A ~Z, <POS>, <PAGE↑>, ...

  • Page 1548

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031522The following table lists parameter values for respective signal types.Table 12.1.2(b) Signal types and corresponding parametervaluesSignal typeParameter valueNot selected0G0000 to G02551G1000 to G12552F0000 to F02553F1000 to F12554Y0000 to Y01275X0000 t...

  • Page 1549

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1523Example:To select the automatic operation start signal (G7.2) asoperation history target No. 2, set up the related parameters aslisted below:No.12802=1No.12842=7No.12882=00000100If parameter No. 12802 is 1, parameter Nos. 12842 and 12882are initialized to...

  • Page 1550

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315243122Time interval used to record data in the operation history[Data type] Word[Unit of data] Minutes[Valid data range] 0 to 1439Time data is recorded in the operation history at set intervals. When 0 isspecified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed a...

  • Page 1551

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1525Signal typeParameter valueX0000 to X01276Y1000 to Y10637X1000 to X10638G2000 to G22559F2000 to F225510To deselect a signal type, reset the related parameter to 0 (the address andbit combined with the parameter that is reset are reset simultaneously withth...

  • Page 1552

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031526NOTE1 While the operation history screen is displayed, history datais not recorded.2 When the duration of the on/off state of an input signal is 16msec or shorter, that state is not recorded in the history. Inaddition, some signals are not recorded.3 App...

  • Page 1553

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1527Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.13HELP FUNCTIONOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.13HELP FUNCTIONSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)III.13HELP...

  • Page 1554

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031528On the servo tuning screen, parameters for each axis are listed for the basicadjustment of the servo motor.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03111SVS[Data type] BitSVS Servo tuning screen0 : Not displayed1 : DisplayedSeries16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isMAINTEN...

  • Page 1555

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1529Waveform diagnosis is classified into two main types.(1) One–shot typeOne–shot waveform diagnosis provides graphs of waveforms.In one–shot waveform diagnosis, the start of data collection can betriggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine si...

  • Page 1556

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315303120Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling[Data type] Word[Unit of data] ms[Valid data range] 1 to 32760When the waveform diagnosis function is used, this parameter sets thetime form the output of a servo alarm until data collecti...

  • Page 1557

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1531To determine the cause of an alarm, check the following.First, it has to be determined if the breakdown is in the CNC, the PMCor the machine.The CNC checks the following.1) Abnormality of detection system2) Abnormality of position control unit3) Abnormali...

  • Page 1558

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031532The required hardware/software configuration for the CNC can bedisplayed on the screen.The system configuration screen displays the following information:(1) Printed circuit board configurationa. The type and function of the printed circuit board mounted ...

  • Page 1559

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1533Disabling the current position display is accomplished by setting bit 0(NDPx) of parameter No. 3115.Bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 enables the display of positions inthe machine coordinate system.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Disables the di...

  • Page 1560

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031534#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03115NDAxNDPx[Data type] Bit axisNDPx Display of the current position for each axis0 : The current position is displayed.1 : The current position is not displayed.NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative coordinates is:...

  • Page 1561

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1535[Classification] Output signal[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have beenmachined.[Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:@ Machining of the specified number of parts has been completed.When the required number ...

  • Page 1562

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031536#76700#6#5#4#3#2#1#0PCM[Data type] BitPCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number ofcompleted parts0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 67101 : Use only the M code specified by parameter No. 6710 and not M0...

  • Page 1563

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1537NOTEWhen bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, thenumber of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.6713Number of required partsThis parameter can be entered on the setting screen.[Data type] Word[Unit of data] One piece[Valid data range] 0 to 9999...

  • Page 1564

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315386753Accumulated cutting timeThis parameter can be entered on the setting screen.[Data type] Two–word[Unit of data] One ms[Valid data range] 0 to 600006754Accumulated cutting timeThis parameter can be entered on the setting screen.[Data type] Two–word[...

  • Page 1565

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT15396757Operation time (accumulated automatic operation time)This parameter can be entered on the setting screen.[Data type] Two–word[Unit of data] One ms[Valid data range] 0 to 600006758Operation time (accumulated automatic operation time)This parameter ca...

  • Page 1566

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031540It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, and checkthe progress of machining.In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the drawing.The drawing coordinates (parameter) and graphic parameters must be setbefore a tool path can b...

  • Page 1567

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1541MEM STRT * * * FIN 08 : 24 : 56HEAD1HEAD1 O0001N00021X1200.000Z1200.000HEAD2 O0020N00020X2220.000Z2160.00062.5Z1X162.5Z2X2(OPRT)G.PRMZOOMGRAPHT series (Two–path control)There are two functions of Dynamic Graphics.Path graphicSolid graphi...

  • Page 1568

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031542 O1126 N01126ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄF.STSTOPREWINDA.STSOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)ZYXPart MachinedThe background graphic function allows a programmed tool path ...

  • Page 1569

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1543#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MVG3003[Data type] BitMVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machinemovement), the axis–in–movement signal is:0 : Output1 : Not output#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03109BGOBGO Response to pressing the <OFFSET/SETTING> fu...

  • Page 1570

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031544DPO Current position on the workpiece drawing or tool path drawing screen0 : Is not displayed1 : DisplayedWhen the background graphic function is used, modal informationitems F, S, T, and current position are displayed. When the [POS] softkey is selected...

  • Page 1571

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT15456509Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (2–path control)ZX1X2X1X2ZX1X2ZGRPAX=0, 10GRPAX=1, 11GRPAX=2, 12ZX1X2X1X2ZX1X2ZGRPAX=3, 13GRPAX=4, 14GRPAX=5, 15ZX1X2X1X2ZGRPAX=6, 16GRPAX=7, 17[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 7 and 10 to 17 (0 ...

  • Page 1572

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315466510Drawing coordinate system[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 7This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphicfunction.The following show the relationship between the parameter values andthe drawing coordinate systems.XZZZZZZ...

  • Page 1573

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT15476511Right margin in solid drawing6512Left margin in solid drawing6513Upper margin in solid drawing6514Lower margin in solid drawing[Data type] Word[Unit of data] DotThese parameters set the drawing margins in pixels on the screen. Theunit is a dot.Parame...

  • Page 1574

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031548#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08100NWPRST[Data type] Bit typeRST When the reset key on the MDI panel is pressed:0 : The reset effects both paths. The reset is effective for both themachining and the background graphics (M series).1 : The reset key is effective only for...

  • Page 1575

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1549The load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and the serial spindle.The load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes by settingparameters 3151 to 3153.When serial spindles are used, the load meter and speedometer can bedisplayed only for ...

  • Page 1576

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315502086Rated current parameter (RTCURR)[Data type] Word axis4127Load meter displayed value for maximum output[Data type] Word axisNOTEThe load meter display depends on servo parameter 2086and spindle parameter 4127.These parameters are set automatically.Seri...

  • Page 1577

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1551The execution time of a program is displayed on the program machinetime display screen. The machine time can be displayed, in hours,minutes, and seconds format, for up to 10 main programs.The time between the first start operation after a reset in memory...

  • Page 1578

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031552NOTEWhen M02 does not reset the control unit, and completionsignal FIN is sent to rewind and execute the program fromthe beginning (when bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 isset to 0), machine time is terminated by the completionsignal FIN.Series16i/18i/16...

  • Page 1579

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1553GroupFunctionOutput signalRelated input signal1Mode selectionMD1O <F073#0>MD2O <F073#1>MD4O <F073#2>ZRNO <F073#4>MD1MD2MD4ZRN2Jog feed axis select +J10 – +J40–J10 – –J40<F081>+J1 – +J4–J1 – –J4Manual rapid tra...

  • Page 1580

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031554#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0OUT7F072OUT6OUT5OUT4OUT3OUT2OUT1OUT0F073ZRNOMD4OMD2OMD1OF074SPOF075KEYODRNOMLKOSBKOBDTOF076ROV2OROV1OMP2OMP1OF077RTOHS1DOHS1COHS1BOHS1AO*FV7OF078*FV6O*FV5O*FV4O*FV3O*FV2O*FV1O*FV0O*JV7OF079*JV6O*JV5O*JV4O*JV3O*JV2O*JV1O*JV0O*JV15OF080*JV14...

  • Page 1581

    Arrow keys on the MDI panel789654123B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1555OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel0 : Not operational1 : Operational7210Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “↑”7211Jog–movement axis and its direction on software opera...

  • Page 1582

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031556Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axesin the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values givenbelow. [8°] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2±] to the negativedirection of the Z axis, [6³] ...

  • Page 1583

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1557Parameter No. 7223:Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.Parameter No. 7224:Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.Parameter No. 7225:Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.Parameter No. 7...

  • Page 1584

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031558Character to Code Correspondence TableCharacterCodeCom-mentCharacterCodeCommentCharacterCodeCom-mentCharacterCodeCommentA 0656 054 177 209B 0667 055 178 210C 0678 056 179 211D 0689 057 180 212E 069 032Space 181 213F 070 ! 033Exclama...

  • Page 1585

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1559NOTE1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by softswitches. When the mode for DNC operation is to berequired, then, all control switches for mode selectionshould be on the machine operator’s panel or ageneral–purpose soft switch should be used t...

  • Page 1586

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031560NOTE4 The following table lists the jog feedrate override valueswhich can be selected by soft switches.*JV00 – *JV150(*JV0 – *JV150)Override 1512±±8±4±0± bitOverride values (%)01111111111111111011111111111110 1 0 10.121 1 1 11 1 1 11 ...

  • Page 1587

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1561NOTE5 The following table lists the feedrate override values whichcan be selected by soft switches.*FV0O – *FV7O (*FV0 – *FV7)Override 74±±0±Override values (%)01 1 1 11 1 1 1011 1 1 10 1 0 11021 1 1 01 0 1 12031 1 1 00 0 0 ...

  • Page 1588

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031562Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.11.4.10Displaying and Setting theSoftware Operator’s PanelOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.11.4.13Displaying and Setting theSoftware Operator’s...

  • Page 1589

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1563The language displayed on the screen is set by a parameter.#73102DTH#6SPNSPN#5HNGHNG#4ITAITA#3CHICHI#2FRNFRAN#1GRMGRM#0JPNJPN#73119#6#5#4#3#2#1POR#0NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, cycle CNC power.[Data type] BitSelect the language to be used for the...

  • Page 1590

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031564With the remote diagnosis function, a commercial PC can be connected,as a service terminal, to the CNC via an RS–232–C interface or atelephone line and used to monitor the status of the CNC and to changedata in it by means of menu–driven remote diag...

  • Page 1591

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1565c. CNC ³ computer(1) Alarm information(2) Machine position(3) Absolute position(4) Skip position(5) Servo delay(6) Acceleration/deceleration delay(7) Diagnosis(8) Parameter(9) Tool life management data(10) Display screen status(11) Modal info...

  • Page 1592

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031566Parameter setting enables one external operator message (consisting of up255 characters) or, simultaneously, up to 4 external operator message(consisting of up to 63 characters) to be displayed.External operator messages can be logged in a history file.Th...

  • Page 1593

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1567#73207#6#5#4#3#2#1#0OM4[Data type] BitOM4 A message displayed on the external operator message screen can have:0 : Up to 256 characters, and just a single message can be displayed.1 : Up to 64 characters, and up to four messages can be displayed.Series16i...

  • Page 1594

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031568Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causesa LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen canbe cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to specify theautomatic clearing of the screen if...

  • Page 1595

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1569Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF (G062#1) is validonly for path 1. This signal is invalid for the signals of path 2 (G1062#1)and those of the loader (G062#1).If parameter No. 3123 is set to 0, clearing of the screen using the CAN keyan...

  • Page 1596

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315703123Screen display timeout[Data type] Bytes[Unit of data] Minutes[Valid data range] 1 to 255This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before erase screendisplay is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared.For the Series 160i/180i/210i/1...

  • Page 1597

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1571A touch panel can be used on the LCD display, as follows:(1) The soft keys (F0 to F9, FR, and FL) in the lower section on the10.4–inch color LCD/MDI panel are changed to those for the touchpanel.(2) Touch panel operation substitutes for cursor control o...

  • Page 1598

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031572(3) Positional precisionA positional precision of "2.5 mm can be maintained by performing9–point compensation as described later.When a rectangular soft key button on the screen is pressed, the soft keybutton display is indented. This type of a so...

  • Page 1599

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT15734 Press the [TP CAL] soft key.The following touch panel calibration screen appears.CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANELPLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS (+ OF 9 POINTS).IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH <INPUT> KEY.IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH <C...

  • Page 1600

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/0315740 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.As described in “Hardware connection,” the touch panel is connected tothe RS–232–C serial port 2 (JD36B) on the CNC motherboard. When thetouch panel is used, serial port 2 (JD36B) is set up for touch paneloperation, regar...

  • Page 1601

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1575Support of the external touch panel interface allows an SNP–X protocolcompliant external touch panel to be connected to the FANUC Series16i/18i/21i (referred to just as the CNC hereinafter).External touch panels are similar to the machine operator’s p...

  • Page 1602

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031576 ETPSIO (25–pin)CNCJD36B (20–pin)RDSDRSCSSG03020405!071101150508030713SDRDRSCSSGDRCDERShieldShield processing must be done with the cable attachment.Turn the power to the external touch panel on before the CNC power–on.Data at the CNC addresses l...

  • Page 1603

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1577The CNC uses SNP–X protocol direct commands only. So, as theprotocol on the external touch panel (ETP) side, also use SNP–X protocoldirect commands only.The processing in response to a request for writing 3–byte or longer datais the same as the pro...

  • Page 1604

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031578The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those itemsthat require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD backlight, touchpanel, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is indicated by themachine run time.When the service life...

  • Page 1605

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1579(1) Maintenance item namesThe names of maintenance items are set up here. They can beregistered using either the corresponding menu or MDI keys.1) Menu–based setup1 To display the setting menu, place the cursor on the desireditem, and press the [ENTRY]...

  • Page 1606

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031580NOTEFor the CNC edit function, specific strings of two or morecharacters are registered as reserved words of custommacro commands.(Example: GO for GOTO, WH for WHILE, and SI for SIN)Therefore, when a program to register item names iscreated in the above f...

  • Page 1607

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1581NOTE1 The asterisk (*) is used as a control code, so it cannot beused in the item name. Likewise, square brackets “[” and“]” and parentheses “(” and “)” must be excluded from theitem name.EOB “;” must be executed from the item name.2 ...

  • Page 1608

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031582[CNC maintenance screen]PERIODICAL MAINTENANCEO0001 N12345(NC)ITEM NAME 01BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 02BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 03FAN MOTOR 04LCD BACK LIGHT 05 06 07 08 09 10>_EDIT *** ***** *** ****19:27:05[ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ][ SEL...

  • Page 1609

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1583(2) Remaining lifetimeThe remaining lifetime of an item is the time allowed before it mustbe replaced. It is displayed in a count–down format. When theremaining lifetime becomes less than the percentage specified inparameter No. 8911 of the correspond...

  • Page 1610

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031584(1) Service lifeTo specify the service life, key in the corresponding data and press[INPUT] soft key or INPUT MDI key. The same data is set up as boththe service life and remaining lifetime. In addition, the count type isindicated as: “––––...

  • Page 1611

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1585(3) Count typePressing the [TYPE] causes the following count types to be displayedas soft keys. Select the desired one and press the [EXEC] soft key toset it up.SoftwareMeaningDisplay[EFFECT]No counting takes place (the counter is halted).– – –[ALL...

  • Page 1612

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031586f Menu screen (machine maintenance only)G10 L61 P01 [n] ;G10 L61 P02 [n] ;G10 L61 P03 [n] ;:a : Service lifer : Remaining lifetimen : Item name[Alphanumeric character]q : Count type0 = No counting.1 = Nonstop counting.2 = Counting continues as long as the...

  • Page 1613

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT15878911Lifetime versas service life parcentage[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] 1%[Valid data range] 0 to 100On the periodic maintenance screen, the remaining lifetime display turnsred for warning purposes, if the remaining lifetime goes below a specifiedpercen...

  • Page 1614

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031588This function is a monitor function for providing detailed disturbanceload torque data. The CNC stores disturbance load torque data detectedby servo and spindle motors in internal memory. The followingoperations are possible on stored torque data:D Refe...

  • Page 1615

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1589NOTE1 When the sample data store function is enabled (bit 2 ofparameter No. 6350 is set to 1), the period during which datacan be stored is halved.2 When the above period is exceeded, no more data is storedeven if the torque sensing command signal is 1.3 ...

  • Page 1616

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031590(a)(b)(c)(e)(f)(l)(k)(d)(g)(m)(i)(j)All–axes displaySingle–axis display(a) Whether the displayed data is the current data or sample data isindicated (only in all–axes display mode).(b) The axis number and name of the target axis are indicated (only ...

  • Page 1617

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1591(m) When the current torque data is indicated, the total time from the startof store operation until the end of store operation is indicated. (Whenstore operation is currently continued, the total time until the currenttime is indicated). When the sampl...

  • Page 1618

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031592You can save data to the memory card and load data from the memorycard. Press the [(OPRT)] then [TRNSFR] soft keys. To save data, press[SAVE] then [EXEC]. Data is saved under the file name”FNTRQSNS.DAT” on the memory card. To load data, press [LOA...

  • Page 1619

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1593(8) ConfirmationEXEC[ ] []STOP[] [] []CANCEL[] [ ]↓↓↓↓↓(1), (6)(1), (6)(9) ConfirmationEXEC[ ] [] [] [] []CANCEL[] [ ]↓↓↓↓↓(1), (6)(1), (6)Parameters related to the fine torque sensing function can be set on the finetorque sensing para...

  • Page 1620

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031594[Classification] Input signal[Function] Stores disturbance load torque data in CNC memory.[Operation] While the torque sensing command signal is 1, the CNC storesdisturbance load torque data in memory. Changing the signal state from1 to 0 stops store ope...

  • Page 1621

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1595#76350#6#5#4FTA#3#2FTM#1TQ2#0TQ1[Data type] BitTQ1, TQ2 The store interval for the fine torque sensing function is set.TQ1TQ2Store interval008ms0116ms1032ms11Invalid (P/S5199)FTM The function of saving stored disturbance load torque data as sample datais:...

  • Page 1622

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031596NOTEIf the number of target axes is N, use target axes 1 to N. If0 is set for target axis M, the target axis (M + 1) andsubsequent target axes are ignored.[Example]ParameterSettingTarget axis 11Target axis 22Target axis 30Target axis 43When the parameter...

  • Page 1623

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1597With the window function, stored torque data and statistical calculationresults can be referenced from the PMC.The number of stored torque data items is referenced.D Input data+0246810(Function code)232(Completion code)–(Data length)–(Data number)0(Da...

  • Page 1624

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031598Among stored torque data, the most recently stored data is referenced.D Input data+0246810(Function code)232(Completion code)–(Data length)–(Data number)N(Data attribute)M(Data area)–M = 0: Latest data= 1: Sample dataN: Target axis number of an axis...

  • Page 1625

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1599D Output data+0246810(Function code)232(Completion code)C(Data length)L(Data number)N(Data attribute)M(Data area)Most recently stored dataC = 0: Read terminates normally.= 3: Illegal data number= 4: Illegal data attributeL =0 or 2NOTE1 If no data is store...

  • Page 1626

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031600Among stored torque data, arbitrary data is referenced.D Input data+0246810(Function code)232(Completion code)–(Data length)6(Data number)N(Data attribute)M(Data area)Data number n (4 bytes)Number of data items l (2 bytes)M = 0: Latest data= 1: Sample d...

  • Page 1627

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1601D Output data+0246810(Function code)232(Completion code)C(Data length)L(Data number)N(Data attribute)M(Data area)Data number n (4 bytes)Number of data items l (2 bytes)Data with number n (2 bytes)Data with number n + 1 (2 bytes)C = 0: Read terminates nor...

  • Page 1628

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031602NOTE1 If data number n is within the valid range, but it is beyond thenumber of data items actually stored, no data is output, andread operation terminates with the number of data items lset to 0.Example: When the data number n is within the number ofactu...

  • Page 1629

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1603D Input data+0246810(Function code)226(Completion code)–(Data length)–(Data number)N(Data attribute)–(Data area)–N = –1: Read for all axes= 1 to 4 : Read for an axis (specified with a target axis number)NOTEFor read for an axis, only the axes sp...

  • Page 1630

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031604(Read for an axis)+02468101214(Function code)226(Completion code)C(Data length)4(Data number)N(Data attribute)–Average for specified axisMaximum for specified valueDistribution for specified axisC = 0: Read operation terminates normally.= 3: Illegal d...

  • Page 1631

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1605The actual speed is displayed on the current position display screen,program check screen, and program screen (MDI mode).PMC controlled axis movement data can be added to the actual speeddisplay.Reflection of movement along an arbitrary axis in the actual...

  • Page 1632

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031606The parameter set supporting screen is a parameter setting and tuningscreen intended to help:D Readily start up the machine by collecting and displaying theminimum required parameters for machine launching.D Smoothly make adjustments by easily displaying ...

  • Page 1633

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1607The items displayed on the parameter set supporting screen are outlinedbelow.[START UP][START UP] lets you specify the minimum required parameters formachine launching.AXIS SETTING:The axis, coordinate, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration CNC paramete...

  • Page 1634

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031608A brief help message corresponding to a parameter selected with thecursor is displayed.If a standard value (recommended by FANUC) is available for theparameter, it is also displayed.Make sure that the setting screen is ”parameter write enabled.”Select...

  • Page 1635

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1609Standard values can be specified for parameters, using soft keys.There are two methods. The first method is to specify a standard valueonly for the parameter selected with the cursor. The second method is tospecify standard values for all parameters in ...

  • Page 1636

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031610TUNING lets you display the servo, spindle, and machining parametertuning screens readily, so you can make adjustments easily.On the parameter tuning screen menu, place the cursor on the desiredtuning screen item and press the [SELECT] soft key to display...

  • Page 1637

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1611Parameters required for machine launchingMenuitemGroupParameterNo.Brief descriptionAXIS SETTINGBASIC1001#0Linear–axis least command increment0: Millimeter machines1: Inch machines1002#1Reference position return withoutdogs0: Disable1: Enable (all axes)1...

  • Page 1638

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031612MenuitemBrief descriptionParameterNo.GroupAXIS SETTINGBASIC1815#1Whether to use a separate pulse coder:0: Not to use1: To use1815#4Whether the machine position hasbeen associated with the position ofthe absolute position detector:0: Associated1: Not assoc...

  • Page 1639

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1613MenuitemBrief descriptionParameterNo.GroupAXIS SETTINGACCEL-ERATION/DECEL-ERATION1610#0The cutting feed acceleration/decel-eration used is:0: Exponential type acceleration/de-celeration1: Post–interpolation linear–type ac-celeration/deceleration1620Ra...

  • Page 1640

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031614This function automatically specifies machining conditions when yousimply select a precision level that matches your machining purposeswhen machining. The machining conditions are obtained based on theselected precision level and two prescribed parameter...

  • Page 1641

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1615On this screen, the velocity–first parameter set (precision level 1) andprecision–first parameter set (precision level 10) can be set up.The screen is displayed by pressing: <SYSTEM> function key → [>] softkey (several times) → [M–TUN]...

  • Page 1642

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031616Pressing the [INIT] soft key and then the [EXEC] soft key initializes acursor–selected item with a standard parameter. Pressing the [G_INIT]soft key and then the [EXEC] soft key initializes all items of acursor–selected parameter set (velocity–firs...

  • Page 1643

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1617This screen is displayed by pressing: <OFFSET/SETTING> functionkey → [>] soft key (several times) → [PR_LEV].The specified precision level value is not cleared by turning off the power(instead, it is saved to parameter No. 13634).The precisi...

  • Page 1644

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031618NOTE1 The machine condition select function requires any of theAPC, AI–APC, and AI contour control functions.2 Using the bell–shaped acceleration change time for AIcontour control requires the ”pre–read pre–interpolationbell–shaped acceleratio...

  • Page 1645

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1619This item is used to set up a linear–portion acceleration forpre–interpolation acceleration/deceleration (in mm/s2).Setting range: 50.000 to 99999.999 (mm/s2)Size:2–word typeThe parameter value set up on the machining parameter tuning screen issaved...

  • Page 1646

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031620NOTE1 This item is disabled for APC and AI APC.2 The time constant mentioned above is common to all axes.Changing this item results in the settings of all axes beingchanged. tb tatc tbtbtbtctaVelocityTimeLinear acceleration/decelerationBell–shaped ...

  • Page 1647

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1621S AI contour control and AI APC (for rotation axes and millimetermachine linear axes)Effective value(No.1730)2No.1731 1036(IS–B) =(No.1730)2No.1731 10036(IS–C) =No.1432No.1785 1006 =Note: Parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731 are set/re–set automatically ...

  • Page 1648

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031622The parameter value specified on the machine parameter tuning screen isreflected on the following parameters (common to all modes):No. 13622: Velocity–first parameterNo. 13623: Precision–first parameterIn addition, the following parameter is set up ...

  • Page 1649

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1623This item is used to specify an axis–specific maximum allowablemachining feedrate.Increment systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min0 to 2400000 to 100000Rotaion axis1 deg/min0 to 2400000 to 100000...

  • Page 1650

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031624#713600#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MCR[Data type] BitMCR When the permissible acceleration is adjusted with the machiningcondition selection function (machining parameter adjustment screen orprecision level selection screen), parameter Nos. No.1730 and 1731,which are r...

  • Page 1651

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT162513612Acceleration change time when AI contour control is used (bell–shaped) (precision level 1)13613Acceleration change time when AI contour control is used (bell–shaped) (precision level 10)[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] 1 to 1...

  • Page 1652

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031626Parameter No. 1602Acceleration/decelerationLS2(#6)BS2(#3)Acceleration/deceleration10Selects linear acceleration/deceleration after cuttingfeed interpolation.01Selects bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration aftercutting feed interpolation.NOTE1 For bell...

  • Page 1653

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT162713628Parameter number for arbitrary item 1 when advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control is used13629Parameter number for arbitrary item 2 when advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour contro...

  • Page 1654

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031628When a subprogram is being executed, the program number of the mainprogram can be displayed beside the number of the currently runningprogram on a 14–inch screen.#73209#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MPD[Data type] BitMPD During subprogram execution, the main program num...

  • Page 1655

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1629The following table lists FANUC two–byte character codes used on theperiodic maintenance screen.12.1.28FANUC Two–ByteCharacter Code Table

  • Page 1656

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031630

  • Page 1657

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1631

  • Page 1658

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031632

  • Page 1659

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1633

  • Page 1660

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031634

  • Page 1661

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1635One of the following part program size can be selected.CNC modelPart program sizeSeries 16iSeries 160iSeries 160isSeries 18iSeries 180iSeries 180isSeries 21iSeries 210iSeries 210is10m (4Kbyte)——f20m (8Kbyte)—fl40m (16Kbyte)fll80m (32Kbyte)lll160m (6...

  • Page 1662

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031636Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.11.3.1Displaying Memory Used and aList of ProgramsOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.11.3.1Displaying Memory Used and aList of ProgramsSeries21i/210i...

  • Page 1663

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1637Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.11.3.1Displaying Memory Used and aList of ProgramsOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.11.3.1Displaying Memory Used and aList of ProgramsSeries21i/210i...

  • Page 1664

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031638@ KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter data tables)When KEY = 1@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the inputof PMC parameters.@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used[Operation] When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.When a si...

  • Page 1665

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1639IWZ Setting a workpiece zero point offset value or wokpiece shift value(T–series) by MDI key input in the automatic operation activation or haltstate is:0 : Not disabled1 : DisabledMCM The setting of custom macros by MDI key operation is:0 : Enabled reg...

  • Page 1666

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031640Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.11SETTING AND DISPLAYINGDATAOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.11SETTING AND DISPLAYINGDATASeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Cent...

  • Page 1667

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1641(3) Program number search(4) Program editing after registration(5) Program registration(6) Program collation(7) Displaying programs3210Password(PASSWD)[Data type] Two–wordSet a password to this parameter. Its value is not displayed.CAUTIONThis paramete...

  • Page 1668

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031642NumberMessageDescription231FORMAT ERROR IN G10L50Any of the following errors occurred inthe specified format at the program-mable–parameter input.1)Address N or R was not entered.2)A number not specified for a pa-rameter was entered.3)The axis number wa...

  • Page 1669

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1643Editing a program while executing another program is called backgroundediting. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing(foreground editing).A program edited in the background should be registered in foregroundprogram memory.During backgro...

  • Page 1670

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031644When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode(TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In thesemodes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manualoperation is stored in memory as a program position to create a pro...

  • Page 1671

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1645Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screenwhile displaying the G code menu.Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G codemenu and converstional screen.Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S ...

  • Page 1672

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031646O0001O0010O0100O1000O2000O0001O0010O0100O0001O0010O0100O1000O2000O1000O1001O1002Copy source number: 0001–0100Copy destination number: No settingCopy sourceCopy sourceCopy sourceCopy sourceCopy source number: 0001–0100Copy destination number: 1000#...

  • Page 1673

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1647CAUTION1 The CNC does not perform copy operation in the followingconditions:S The data protection key of the copy destination is off.S The O number of a program to be copied is the numberbeing protected.S The same O number is found in the copy destination...

  • Page 1674

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031648This function can protect programs by setting an encryption key specificto the machine tool builder for a system parameter.This function is an option.After the encryption key parameter is set, for the programs within theprotection range, the following ope...

  • Page 1675

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1649Set encryption key 0 to 99999999 in parameter No. 3220. When a valueof 0 is set, the value (0) is displayed to indicate the unlocked state. Settinga value other than 0 locks the programs. The encryption key setting is notdisplayed for security. Write ...

  • Page 1676

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031650NOTE1 These values can be set in the unlocked state ([encryptionkey] = 0 or [encryption key] = [decryption key]).2 The programs within the specified protection range areprotected regardless of the settings of bits 0 (NE8) and 4(NE9) of parameter No. 3202,...

  • Page 1677

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT1651NOTE1 To punch out programs in encrypted text, set bit 1 (ISO) ofparameter No. 0000 to 1 (ISO code). An attempt to punchout programs in encrypted text with setting 0 (EIA code)causes an alarm (P/S 247).2 The encryption key set in the parameter is also pu...

  • Page 1678

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031652In the locked state, the contents of the programs within the protectionrange are not displayed. In the unlocked state, the contents of theprograms within the protection range are also displayed in the same wayas for normal programs.In the locked state, t...

  • Page 1679

    B–63523EN–1/0312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT16533220Encryption key[Data type] 2–word[Unit of data] None[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999This parameter sets an encryption key (password). When a value otherthan 0 is set, it is regarded as being an encryption key. Once an encryptionkey has been set, th...

  • Page 1680

    12. DISPLAY/SET/EDITB–63523EN–1/031654NumberMessageDescriptionPS0075PROTECTAn attempt was made to register a pro-gram having a protected number.PS0231FORMAT ERROR IN G10L50The following error was detected in thespecification format of programmableparameter input:(7) An attempt was made to ch...

  • Page 1681

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA165513 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

  • Page 1682

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031656The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncherinterface.1. Program2. Offset data3. Parameter4. Pitch error compensation data5. Custom macro common variables.The above data can be output to a memory card via a memory cardinterface.Sett...

  • Page 1683

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1657The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface(RS–232–C serial port), remote buffer interface, or memory card interfacefor inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters)between external input/output uni...

  • Page 1684

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031658#70000#6#5#4#3#2#1ISO#0TVCThis parameter can be entered on the setting screen[Data type] BitTVC TV check0 : Not performed1 : PerformedISO Code used for data output0 : EIA code1 : ISO code0020I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device or selecti...

  • Page 1685

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1659SettingDescription202122|3435Group 0Group 1Group 2 |Group 14Group 15Data is transferred between the CNC and a PowerMate CNC in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the FANUC I/OLink.Supplemental remark 1If the DNC operation is performed with FOCAS1/HSSB, th...

  • Page 1686

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031660[Valid data range] 0 to 3, 5, 10These parameters are valid only when bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 110 isset to control the I/O channels separately.The parameters set individual input/output devices if the I/O channels aredivided into these four types:...

  • Page 1687

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA16610024Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER–III)This parameter can be entered on the setting screen[Data type] ByteThis parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the PMCladder development tool (FANUC...

  • Page 1688

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031662IOP Specifies how to stop program input/output operations.0 : An NC reset can stop program input/output operations.1 : Only the [STOP] soft key can stop program input/output operations.(An reset cannot stop program input/output operations.)ENS Action ...

  • Page 1689

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA16630102Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)[Data type] ByteSet the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).Table 13....

  • Page 1690

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031664#7NFD0111#6#5#4#3ASI#2#1#0SB2[Data type] BitThese parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meaningsof the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.0112Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)[Data type] ...

  • Page 1691

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1665#7NFD0131#6#5#4#3ASI#2#1#0SB2NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.[Data type] BitThese parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. The meaningsof the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.0...

  • Page 1692

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031666Table 13.1 (c) Baud Rate SettingsSet valueBaud rate (bps)123456Set valueBaud rate (bps)91011240096001214384007680013501001101502003006001200781448001920086400#70134#6#5CLK#4NCD#3#2#1PRY#0NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefo...

  • Page 1693

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1667#7MDN0138#6#5#4#3#2#1#0MDP[Data type] BitMDP In data output by a memory card, the series information is:0: Not added to the output file name.1: Added to the output file name.MDN The DNC operation function by a memory card is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled. (...

  • Page 1694

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031668NumberMessageDescription001TH PARITY ALARMTH alarm (A character with incorrectparity was input). Correct the tape.002TV PARITY ALARMTV alarm (The number of charactersin a block is odd). This alarm will begenerated only when the TV check iseffective.08...

  • Page 1695

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1669NumberDescriptionMessage5235COMMUNICATION ERRORIn communication with the built–inhandy file unit, a communication errorhas occurred.5236COMMAND ERRORIn communication with the built–inhandy file unit, an incorrect commandwas issued.5237READ ERRORIt...

  • Page 1696

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031670Refer to Remote Buffer DESCRIPTIONS (B–61802E–1) for detailedinformetion of remote buffer.13.2REMOTE BUFFER

  • Page 1697

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1671Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS(B–61782E) for detailedinformation of DNC1 interface.0020I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output deviceSetting entry is acceptable.[Data type] ByteSet value. :100133Baud rate[Data type] ByteThe baud rate of HDLC is...

  • Page 1698

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/0316720142Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface)[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 2 to 52This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the CNCis connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint connection.NOTEWhen this parameter is set...

  • Page 1699

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1673COMMUNICATION OPERATION O0001 N00000 DNC FILE SELECTION>MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ...

  • Page 1700

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031674(b) Service ScreenPress soft key [C–SERV] and the following screen is displayed.Three pages are available and one of the pages is selected by page key.COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 NC ...

  • Page 1701

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1675COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 PASCAL STACK ADDRESSUPPER LIMIT 01ABC000LOWER LIMIT01ABC0FF SERVICE MODE 10101010000000010 SERVICE MODE 201000000 ...

  • Page 1702

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031676[Setting procedure]1 Put the system in the MDI mode.2 Switch to the setting screen or service screen to appear, and press the[(OPRT)] soft key.3 Move the cursor to the item you want to specify, using the page andcursor keys.4 Enter the setting value f...

  • Page 1703

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA16775) Press the [INPUT] soft key to input the values. DNC FILE SELECTION O1000.PRGJ> MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53[ STRING ] [ INPUT ] [ CLEAR ] [ INS. CH ...

  • Page 1704

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031678(1) Setting screenD DNC file selectionTo start DNC operation, specify a file name in the host computer.Format: Oxxxx. PRG (where xxxx is a four–digit decimalnumber.)(2) Service screenD CNC and host application namesSpecify these parameters with CNC...

  • Page 1705

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1679* For the T series (two–path control), bits 08 to 11 correspond to M00to M30 at HEAD2 respectively, and bits 12 to 15, at HEAD1.D Status post maskNot usedD Alarm post This parameter specifies whether the bit position of a CNC alarmis posted to the ...

  • Page 1706

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031680Refer to an item of FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS ( B–61992E ) fordetailed information of DNC2 interface.13.4DNC2 INTERFACE

  • Page 1707

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1681It is possible to request from an external source that a program beregistered, collated, or output.D Registeration/CollationAs triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the backgroundedit function saves programs from an external input unit int...

  • Page 1708

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031682D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program canbe registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registeredor collated, if a program with the same program number is beingexecuted in the foreground processing.[Classifica...

  • Page 1709

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1683[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating.[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when:D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC in the backgroundedit mode.D The MDI...

  • Page 1710

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031684[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during programregisteration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punchstart signal.[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1,...

  • Page 1711

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1685Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020) ↓Stop bit and other dataNumber specified for the in-put/output deviceBaud rateStop bit and other dataNumber specified for the in-put/output deviceBaud rateStop bit and other dataNumber specified for ...

  • Page 1712

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031686N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, programregistration is assumed to be:0 : Completed1 : Not completedNPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:0 : Completed1 : Not completed#73202#6#5#4N...

  • Page 1713

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1687NumberMessageDescription079PROGRAM VERIFYERRORIn memory or program collation,a pro-gram in memory does not agree withthat read from an external I/O device.Check both the programs in memoryand those from the external device.085COMMUNICATIONERRORWhen en...

  • Page 1714

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031688Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)III.8.4PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUTOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)III.8.4PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUTSeries21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B...

  • Page 1715

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1689While an automation operation is being performed, a program input froman I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed andstored in memory.Similarly, a program stored in memory can be executed and outputthrough the reader/punch in...

  • Page 1716

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031690[Classification] Input signal[Function] When this signal becomes logical 1, the control unit:D Selects the output and run simultaneous mode.To select the output and run simultaneous mode, it is necessary toselect the DNC operation mode and to set this...

  • Page 1717

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1691NOTE1 If a value beyond the valid data range is specified, thenumber of the input program is registered.2 When the eight–digit program number function is notprovided, the program number should not be set in thisparameter but in parameter 3218.Number...

  • Page 1718

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031692By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loadedfrom an input unit into CNC memory.When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC FloppyCassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiecenumber sea...

  • Page 1719

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1693Workpiece no. search signalFile no.PN16PN8PN4PN2PN1File no.000110300100040010105001100600111070100008010010901010100101111011001201101130111014011111510000161000117100101810011191010020101012110110221011123110002411001251101026110112711100281110129111...

  • Page 1720

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031694In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below.Press the cycle start button. Issuing the external program input startsignal (MINP) starts program input.The automatic operation mode signal (STL)is set to 1, then program input starts.When in...

  • Page 1721

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1695The timing chart for data reading is shown below.Execution of a machining programM code command for the Mxxxnext program inputCode signalM00~M31Strobe signalMFSingle–block signalSBKCompletion signalFINCycle start lamp signalSTLExternal program input...

  • Page 1722

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031696#7MIP3201#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] Bit typeMIP Specifies whether to load a program into memory according to theexternal program input start signal (MINP).0 : Does not load a program into memory.1 : Loads a program into memory.NOTE1 A program can be in...

  • Page 1723

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1697Power Mate programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic(PMC) data are input/output through the FANUC I/O Link.With the FANUC I/O Link, slaves from group 0 to group 15 can beconnected, thus enabling data input/output to and from a maximum of 1...

  • Page 1724

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031698For details of the FANUC I/O Link, refer to the ”FANUC PMCProgramming Manual.”For details of the external I/O device control function, see Section 13.5.(1) Program input/output(a) Program input·When the data input/output function based on the I/O...

  • Page 1725

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA16994)Select address O.5)Key in a program number.6)Using soft keys [(OPRT)], continuous–menu key, [PUNCH], and [EXEC], output the programcorresponding to the keyed–in program number.·When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link isused1)Usi...

  • Page 1726

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031700(a) Macro variable input·When the data input/output function based on the I/O Linkis usedWith Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify astart number for the macro variables to be read. WithEDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of macro variablesto...

  • Page 1727

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1701(a) Diagnostic (PMC) data input·When the data input/output function based on the I/O Linkis usedWith Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify astart number for the diagnostic data items to be read. WithEDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of diag...

  • Page 1728

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031702There are two methods of forcibly terminating input/output.(1) Termination by a resetInput/output can be terminated by a reset. In this case, however, slaveread/write stop signal ESTPIO is not output. Therefore, theoperation of the Power Mate is not...

  • Page 1729

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1703When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, thestate signals for a specified Power Mate must be reported to the CNC.These signals must be posted to the Series 16i/18i/21i via the followingpath:1)2)3)Power Mate address FPower Mat...

  • Page 1730

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031704The DI/DO signal timing charts applicable when data input/outputfunction B based on the I/O Link is used are shown below. When theordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, 1)through 4) in the figures are subject to MDI–base...

  • Page 1731

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1705(1) I/O Link specification signalIOLS(6)(14) Slave input/output dataselection signals EPRG,EVAR, EPARM, EDGN(2) External read/punch signalEXRD/EXWT(3) I/O Link confirmation signalIOLACK(4) Power Mate read/write in–progress signal BGION(5) Power Mate...

  • Page 1732

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031706(2) When an alarm is issued by the CNC (including the case whereprocessing is stopped by external read/punch signal EXSTP)Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output.11) When the CNC issues an alarm, or when externalread/punch stop...

  • Page 1733

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1707(1) I/O Link specification signalIOLS(6)(14) Slave input/output data selection signals EPRG,EVAR, EPARM, EDGN(2) External read/punch signalEXRD/EXWT(3) I/O Link confirmation signalIOLACK(4) Power Mate read/write in–progress signal BGION(5) Power Mat...

  • Page 1734

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031708(3) When an alarm is issued by the Power MateSteps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output.11) When the Power Mate issues an alarm, Power Materead/write alarm signal BGIALM is set to 1, and PowerMate read/write in–progress signal B...

  • Page 1735

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1709(1) I/O Link specification signalIOLS(6)(14) Slave input/output dataselection signals EPRG,EVAR, EPARM, EDGN(2) External read/punch signalEXRD/EXWT(3) I/O Link confirmation signalIOLACK(4) Power Mate read/write in–progress signal BGION(5) Power Mate...

  • Page 1736

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031710The data input/output function based on the FANUC I/O Link isimplemented by various elements such as ladder programs, I/O Linkassignment, CNC parameters, and Power Mate parameters. So, problemsmay occur when the function is started.The table below li...

  • Page 1737

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1711SymptomCause and corrective actionWhen an attempt is made to outputdata to a Power Mate:CNC:OUTPUT blinks con-tinuously.Power Mate : No response is re-turned.(Caution)I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACKis not set to 1.A ladder program error, I/O Link ...

  • Page 1738

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031712CAUTIONIf these symptoms are detected, the CNC waits for acondition to be satisfied in its internal processing. Whilesuch a state exists, the screen is not updated. So, the statesof signals cannot be checked on a real–time basis on ascreen such as...

  • Page 1739

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1713[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal indicates that the Power Mate state signals are valid.[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:– All Power Mate state signals become valid.For data input/outpu...

  • Page 1740

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031714[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal instructs the Power Mate to perform data input/output basedon the I/O Link.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:– When data input/output is performedThis signal is set ...

  • Page 1741

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1715[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal indicates that the CNC has started data input.[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:– When data input is startedThis signal is set to 0 in the following case:– When da...

  • Page 1742

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031716This signal is set to 0 in the following case:– When data input/output is terminatedThis signal is a Power Mate control signal. The corresponding PowerMate side signal is EVAR <G098#5/G251#5>.(The former address is for Power Mate A/B/C/E and...

  • Page 1743

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1717[Classification] Output signal[Function] These signals indicate the group number of the Power Mate that is actingas a slave.[Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave is specifiedwith the values of four binary code signal...

  • Page 1744

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031718#7G058#6#5#4#3EXWT#2EXSTP#1EXRD#0G091SRLNI3SRLNI2SRLNI1SRLNI0#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G092BGENBGIALMBGIONIOLSIOLACK#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F053BGEACTRPALMRPBSY#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0EDGNF177EPARMEVAREPRGEWTIOESTPIOERDIOIOLINK#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F178SRLNO3SRLNO2SRLNO1SRLNO0#7#6#5...

  • Page 1745

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1719SettingDescription0, 1RS–232–C serial port (connector JD36A on motherboard)2RS–232–C serial port (connector JD36B on motherboard)3Remote buffer interface (connector JD28A (RS–232–C interface) orconnector JD6A (RS–422 interface) on serial...

  • Page 1746

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031720NOTEWhen 0 is set, the input/output of parameters, macrovariables, and diagnostic data cannot be performed, butprogram input/output processing is performed.NumberMessageDescription085COMMUNICATIONERRORWhen entering data in the memory by usingReader / ...

  • Page 1747

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1721When the display control card has a graphic function, screen informationdisplayed on the CNC can be converted to 640–by–480–dot bit–mappeddata and output to a memory card. Then, the created bit map data can bedisplayed on a personal computer....

  • Page 1748

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031722After HDCPY099.BMP is output, executing another screen hard copyoperation outputs HDCPY000.BMP. Note that, however, when a filehaving the same name as that of the BMP data to be output by screen hardcopy operation is already present on the memory car...

  • Page 1749

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1723S This function cannot be used in the following case:– 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is– Construction of connecting with PC via HSSB and not attachingMDI to the CNC sideS Hard copies of system alarm screens cannot be taken.S When RS–232C is bein...

  • Page 1750

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031724[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal requests the CNC to stop hard copy operation.[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows:S Stops hard copy operation.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal rep...

  • Page 1751

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1725G067#7(HCREQ)F061#3(HCEXE)G067#6(HCABT)F061#2(HCAB2)Fig. 13.9 (b) Time chart when screen hard copy is interruptedCAUTION1 Even when hard copy operation is performed for screens onthe second path side or loader control board side, the inputsignals rel...

  • Page 1752

    13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATAB–63523EN–1/031726#7HDCPY3301#6#5#4#3HCNEG#2HCALM#1#0HDCL1[Data type] BitHDCL1 When the screen display is in VGA compatible mode on a color LCD:0 : Hard copy is performed with 256–color BMP. (The same colors asthose on the screen display can always be obtained, but ...

  • Page 1753

    B–63523EN–1/0313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA1727The hard copy status is output. When the hard copy start signal (HDCPY,G67#7) is not set to 1, pressing the reset button resets all bits of diagnosticnumber 35 to 0.#70035#6#5#4HCER3#3HCER2#2HCER1#1HCAB3#0HCENDHCEND Normal termination of hard copy op...

  • Page 1754

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/03172814 MEASUREMENT

  • Page 1755

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1729The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memoryas an offset value by a soft key.Switch to the offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positionsare also displayed on this screen. Then select the reference tool and setit at ...

  • Page 1756

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031730When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of acommand given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures thedifference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate valueof the command measurement position and uses it as the offset ...

  • Page 1757

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1731The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before themeasuring position.The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by aparameter No. 6241. If the measuring position reached signalcorresponding to the G code is turned ...

  • Page 1758

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031732NOTE1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10msec.2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reachedsignals from the machine tool; the PMC does not processthem.3 If automatic tool offset or automatic tool lengthmeasurement is not used,...

  • Page 1759

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1733CAUTIONSet a radius value irrespective of whether the diameterprogramming or the radius programming is specified.6254e value on X axis during automatic tool offsete value during tool length automatic measurement6255e value on Z axis during tool automatic offse...

  • Page 1760

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031734NumberMessageDescription080G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED(M series)In the automatic tool length measure-ment function (G37), the measurementposition reached signal (XAE, YAE, orZAE) is not turned on within an areaspecified in parameter 6254 (value ε). This i...

  • Page 1761

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1735NOTE1 Measurement speed, γ, and ε are set as parameters.ε mustbe positive numbers and satisfy the condition of γ>ε.2 The compensation value is updated by the followingformula:New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of th...

  • Page 1762

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031736Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.14.2AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTHMEASUREMENT (G37)OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.14.6AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET(G36, G37)Series21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For...

  • Page 1763

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1737Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial movefollowing the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is inputduring the execution of this command, execution of the command isinterrupted and the next block is executed.The skip function...

  • Page 1764

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031738NOTE1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004#7> fromthe machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to processthe signal.3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use thesignal termina...

  • Page 1765

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1739WARNINGDisable feedrate override, dry run, and automaticacceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No.6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified,allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool whena skip signal is input. These fu...

  • Page 1766

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031740Series16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63534EN)II.4.16SKIP FUNCTION(G31)OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) (B–63524EN)II.4.14SKIP FUNCTION(G31)Series21i/210i/210isOPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Machining Center)(B–63614EN)II....

  • Page 1767

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1741(1) Type A: The deviation is calculated from the cutting time constantand the servo time constant (loop gain).(2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number ofremaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration causedwhen the skip signal is tur...

  • Page 1768

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031742NOTEFor type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signalmust be turned on when the tool moves at constantfeedrate.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skipsignal. The signal-to-bit c...

  • Page 1769

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1743#76201#6#5#4IGX#3#2#1SEB#0SEA[Data type] Bit typeSEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:0 : Ignored.1 : Considered and compensated (type A).SEB When a high speed skip signal goes ...

  • Page 1770

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031744In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip functionstores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cancels the remainingdistance that the block was supposed to be moved when a skip signal (8points) or high-speed skip signal (8 points, howe...

  • Page 1771

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1745· The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state. So,if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to besatisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation isspecified.#7SKIPX004#6ESKIPSKIP6#5–M...

  • Page 1772

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031746#71S86202#61S7#51S6#41S5#31S4#21S3#11S2#01S12S862032S72S62S52S42S32S22S13S862043S73S63S53S43S33S23S14S862054S74S64S54S44S34S24S1DS86206DS7DS6DS5DS4DS3DS2DS1[Data type] Bit type 1S1–1S8, 2S1–2S8, 3S1–3S8, 4S1–4S8, DS1–DS8Specify which skip signal ...

  • Page 1773

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1747NOTEThe skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, andG31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond todifferent skip signals. The tool moves along the specifiedaxis performing linear interpolation until the SKIP signal isset to “1” or the end p...

  • Page 1774

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031748Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motortorque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMCwindow) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to beperformed.While the tool is moved with a motor torque limit...

  • Page 1775

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1749#7TRQL8F114#6TRQL7#5TRQL6#4TRQL5#3TRQL4#2TRQL3#1TRQL2#0TRQL1#76201#6#5#4#3TSA#2TSE#1#0[Data type] Bit typeTSE When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 or P98 command usedto specify torque limit skip:0 : Corrects servo errors.(1)1 : Does not correct se...

  • Page 1776

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031750NumberMessageDescription015TOO MANY AXES COM-MANDEDIn the block including the command forthe skip function (G31 P99/P98), to beexecuted under the control of thetorque limit reach signal, no axis movecommand is specified, or two or moreaxes are specified.In a s...

  • Page 1777

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1751The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolutecoordinates by using the high–speed skip signals (HDI0 to HDI7). Oncea high–speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolutecoordinates are read into custom macro variables #...

  • Page 1778

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031752#76200#6SRE#5#4HSS#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitHSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals.1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals.SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:0 : The signal is considered to be input at the rising edge (0...

  • Page 1779

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1753#79S86208#69S7#59S6#49S5#39S4#29S3#19S2#09S1[Data type] Bit9S1 to 9S8 Specify valid high–speed skip signals for high–speed skip commandG31P90. The bits correspond to signals as follows:9S1HDI09S2HDI19S3HDI29S4HDI39S5HDI49S6HDI59S7HDI69S8HDI7Set each bit a...

  • Page 1780

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031754High–speed skip signalThese portions are ignored.Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220)NumberMessageContents5068G31 P90 FORMATERRORNo axis is specified for movement.Two or more axes were specified for move-ment.Series16i/18i/160i...

  • Page 1781

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1755G81 T_ L_ ;(EGB mode on)G31.8 G91 a 0 P_ Q_ R_ ;(EGB skip command)P: The top number of the consecutive custom macro variables inwhich the machine coordinate positions of the EGB axis (work-piece axis) at the skip signal inputs are stored.a: EGB axis (Workpiece...

  • Page 1782

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031756#79S86208#69S7#59S6#49S5#39S4#29S3#19S2#09S1[Data type] Bit9S1 to 9S8 Specify which high–speed skip signal is enabled when the G31.8 EGBskip command is issued.9S1HDI09S2HDI19S3HDI29S4HDI39S5HDI49S6HDI59S7HDI69S8HDI7The bits correspond to the following signal...

  • Page 1783

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1757NOTE1 In the G31.8 block, only the EGB axis (work axis) should becommanded. When another axis is commanded, the P/Salarm (No.5068) will occur.2 If P is not specified in the G31.8 block, the P/S alarm(No.5068) will occur.3 If R is not specified in the G31.8 blo...

  • Page 1784

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031758This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiecediameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or cross direction manually.When the position record signal is turned “1” (pre...

  • Page 1785

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1759NOTETo use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.#7G040#6PRC#5#4#3#2#1#0#75005#6#5#4#3#2PRC#1#0[Data type] Bit typePRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shiftvalue0 : Not use a PRC signal1 : Uses a PRC signalSeries16i/...

  • Page 1786

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031760When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can beautomatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool tomake contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. Theworkpiece coordinate system shift amount can also be automatic...

  • Page 1787

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1761Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring referenceposition. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuringposition (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, usingparameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool ...

  • Page 1788

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031762NOTE1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in themanual mode while the GOSQM <G039#7> (toolcompensation amount write mode select) signal is 1. Storedpulses are lost if:a. The manual mode is exited,b. The GOSQM <G039#7> (tool compens...

  • Page 1789

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1763Select, manually or automatically, the tool compensation number to be setup, using the QNI parameter (bit 5 of No. 5005).S QNI = 0 (manual selection)Set the cursor to the desired tool compensation number by operatingthe MDI (such as page and cursor keys).S QNI...

  • Page 1790

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031764The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and themeasuring tool nose tip position can be set as the tool offset value. Definethe reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position(machine zero position) as the measuring ref...

  • Page 1791

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1765The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginaryzero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between theimaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at themechanical reference point can be set as the tool offset ...

  • Page 1792

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031766For the tool set function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, the workpiececoordinate shift amount for the Z–axis is automatically set in any ofworkpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 for workpiece coordinatesystem memory.[Z–axis workpiece coordinate s...

  • Page 1793

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1767(0,0)+Z–EXOFSZOFSXOFSZZt+XMeasuring tool noseposition at the mechani-cal machine positionMachine zero pointWorkpiece coordinate system zero point (programmed zero point)EXOFSz :Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be setOFSz :Tool geometry offset val...

  • Page 1794

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031768To use the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, firstspecify the spindle to be measured, using the S2TLS (G040.5) (spindlemeasurement select) signal.(1)Execute manual reference position return.By executing manual reference position retu...

  • Page 1795

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1769(9)Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”.The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator lightgoes off.When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is inuse, the S1MES or S2MES (spindle ...

  • Page 1796

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031770The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicatorlight goes off.When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is inuse, the S1MES or S2MES (spindle under measurement) signal,whichever is applicable, becomes 0.[Classifica...

  • Page 1797

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1771D Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis duringmanual operation.If the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of 5004) is 0+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positivedirection along the X-axis.–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manu...

  • Page 1798

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031772+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positivedirection along the Z-axis.–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negativedirection along the Z-axis.If the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of 5004) is 1+MIT1 : Automatic decision causes...

  • Page 1799

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1773[Classification] Input signal[Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinatesystem.[Operation] When this signal is turned to “1” in a manual operation mode, the modefor writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordi...

  • Page 1800

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031774[Classification] Output signal[Function] For the tool setter function of the one–turret/two–spindle lathe, it isindicated which spindle, 1 or 2, is under measurement.[Output condition] These signals check which head is being measured in the toolcompensatio...

  • Page 1801

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1775#73003#6#5#4#3DIT#2#1#0[Data type] BitDIT Interlock for each axis direction0 : Enabled1 : Disabled#75004#6#5#4#3TS1#2#1#0NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.[Data type] BitTS1 When the tool offset measureme...

  • Page 1802

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/0317765015Distance (X1P) between reference position and X axis + contact surface (touchsensor 1 side)5016Distance (X1M) between reference position and X axis – contact surface (touchsensor 1 side)5017Distance (Z1P) between reference position and Z axis + contact s...

  • Page 1803

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1777 Z axis – contactfaceZ axis + contact faceX axis – contact faceX axis + contactfaceZ1pZ1mX1mX1p+X+ZMeasuring reference positionMeasuring referencepositionX axis–contact face↓Z axis–contact face →← Z axis+contact face↑X axis+contact face+X+ZZ2pZ...

  • Page 1804

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/0317785021Number of pulse interpolation cycles memorized prior to contacting the touch sensor[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] Interpolation cycle[Valid data range] 0 to 8This parameter sets the number of pulse interpolation cycles to bememorized until the operator man...

  • Page 1805

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1779If 0 is set for this parameter, or if the maximum tool offset count isexceeded, the following is assumed:Tool offset number16 pairs32 pairs64 pairs99 pairsSpindle 11 to 81 to 161 to 321 to 49Spindle 29 to 1617 to 3233 to 6450 to 985054Workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 1806

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031780By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinatesystem from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zeropoint offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a commanded valuematches the actual measurement.Series16i/18i/160i/18...

  • Page 1807

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1781Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length: The automatic tool length measurement function (Section 14.2)automatically measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37);The tool length measurement function (Section 14.1) measures the too...

  • Page 1808

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/031782The ten code signals (binary code) select a tool offset number. Codesignals 0 to 998 correspond to tool offset numbers 1 to 999.NOTEThis signal is valid only when the QNI bit (bit of 5 parameterNo. 5005) is set to 1.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Sel...

  • Page 1809

    B–63523EN–1/0314. MEASUREMENT1783#75005#6#5QNI#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitQNI When the tool length measurement B function is executed, a tool offsetnumber is selected:0 : According to the selection the operator makes on an MDI unit (bymoving the cursor).1 : According to the signal input from the...

  • Page 1810

    14. MEASUREMENTB–63523EN–1/0317845022Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface[Data type] 2–word axisIncrement systemIS–AIS–BIS–CMillimeter machine0.01 mm0.001 mm0.0001 mmInch machine0.001 inch0.0001 inch0.00001 inchThe distance L from the reference...

  • Page 1811

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION178515 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

  • Page 1812

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031786The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC.In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by theCNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying movedistance and feedrate, from the PMC. This ...

  • Page 1813

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1787Commands from path 1Commands from path 2Commands from path 3Commands from path 4α axis controlβ axis controlγ axis controlε axis controlGroup AGroup BGroup C PMC CNC DI/ DOGroup DIn the following description, input/output signals from the...

  • Page 1814

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031788These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg(described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamountto one block executed during CNC–controlled automatic operation.These signals may be collectively called the axi...

  • Page 1815

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1789When the execution of command [1] is completed:⋅ command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executingbuffer;⋅ command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;and⋅ command [4] is transferred to the input buff...

  • Page 1816

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031790(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.When the final block has been issued, set control axis selectionsignals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”,however, check that the blocks stored in the C...

  • Page 1817

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1791No.Signal nameSymbol17EMBUFgBuffering disable signal18*EAXSLControl axis selection status signal19EINPgIn–position signal20ECKZgFollowing zero checking signal21EIALgAlarm signal22EGENgAxis moving signal23EDENgAuxiliary function executing signal24EOT...

  • Page 1818

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031792[Classification] Input signal[Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject toPMC control.When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changingthe setting of the control axis selection signal ...

  • Page 1819

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1793Axis controlcommand(hexadecimalcode)Operation02hCutting feed – feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter-polation)02hPerforms the same operation as G95 G01, used by theCNC.03hSkip – ...

  • Page 1820

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031794Axis controlcommand(hexadecimalcode)Operation0EhExternal pulse synchronization – 2nd manual handle0EhSynchronizes with the second manual handle.0FhExternal pulse synchronization – 3rd manual handle0FhSynchronizes with the 3rd manual handle.10hSpee...

  • Page 1821

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1795The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables thefollowing operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifyingreference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 ofparameter No. 1005, specifying reference...

  • Page 1822

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031796When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axisto be controlled as a rotation axis in ROTX, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006.While position control is being executed for the continuous feedcommand (EC0g to EC6g: 06h), the speed command...

  • Page 1823

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1797When follow–up is not performed, an integrated travel value (errorcount) exceeding the value of parameter No. 1885 causes servoalarm 423 to be issued. When torque control is switched to positioncontrol, follow–up is always performed, even if foll...

  • Page 1824

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031798CAUTION1 If the torque control axis may be moved in torque controlmode, the follow–up parameter TQF (bit 4 of parameter No.1803) must be set to “1”.2 If torque control mode is canceled while the torque controlaxis is moving, the return to positi...

  • Page 1825

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1799OperationCommand dataAxis control code signal EC0g to EC6g1st reference positionreturn07hRapid traverse rate EIF0g to EIF15g2nd reference positionreturn08hThe rapid traverse rateis valid when PRD, bit 0of parameter No. 8002,3rd reference positionretur...

  • Page 1826

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031800(4) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)(5) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)(6) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specifythe rapid traverse r...

  • Page 1827

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1801[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)Data rangeUnitIS–BIS–CUnitLinearaxisMetric machine1 to 1000000.1 to 12000.0mm/minLinearaxisInch machine0.01 to 4000.000.001 to 480.000inch/minRo...

  • Page 1828

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031802[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)Data rangeUnitIS–BIS–CUnitLinearaxisMetric input0.01 to 500.00mm/revLinearaxisInch input0.0001 to 9.9999inch/revRotation axis0.01 to 500.00deg/r...

  • Page 1829

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1803NOTEWhen diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx)of parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005can be used to specify whether a radius or diameter is to beused in a command.(14) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)Set the feedrate...

  • Page 1830

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031804CAUTIONThe maximum feedrate depends on whether override isapplied or canceled. The following table lists the maximumfeedrate when override is canceled.IS–BIS–CMetric inputInch inputMetric inputInch inputMagnifiedby 165535mm/min655.35inch/min6553m...

  • Page 1831

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1805(a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires thespecification of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along anaxis. To specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used tolink the servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted toa...

  • Page 1832

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031806[Classification] Input signal[Function]IS–BIS–CUnitMetric input Degree input0.0010.0001mmdegInch input0.00010.00001inch[Valid data range](1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)(2) Cutting feed – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)(3) Cutting fe...

  • Page 1833

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1807Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.(7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h)Auxiliary functions 2 (EC0g to EC6g: 14h)Auxiliary functions 3 (EC0g to EC6g: 15h)For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format,an auxiliary func...

  • Page 1834

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031808[Classification] Output signal[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data forPMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See “Basicprocedure” for details of the output conditions and the procedu...

  • Page 1835

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1809(2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation.(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operationwhen auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input.The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”...

  • Page 1836

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031810[Classification] Output signal[Classification] Output signal[Classification] Input signal[Function] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued bythe PMC, the auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signalsEID0g to ...

  • Page 1837

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1811[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read whilethe executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal isset to “1” when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executedbut subs...

  • Page 1838

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031812(5) External pulse synchronization – third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)(6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)[Classification] Output signal[Function] When this signal is set to “0”, control axis selection signals EAX1 toEAX8 can be changed...

  • Page 1839

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1813[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in–position checkis being performed for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal is set to “1...

  • Page 1840

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031814NOTEThis signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis iscompleted (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration).[Classification] Output signal[Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by thePMC, this signa...

  • Page 1841

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1815These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and resetsignal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of howto release an overtravel alarm.[Classification] Input signal[Function] Like the CNC’s fee...

  • Page 1842

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031816[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate,independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.Rapid traverse override signalsOverride valueROV2EROV1EOverride...

  • Page 1843

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1817[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%.[Classification] Input signal[Function] When this signal is set to “1” during execution of the skip cuttingcommand, the block being executed is...

  • Page 1844

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031818[Classification] Input signal[Function] These signals are also used by the CNC. The signals are provided for eachdirection of the individual controlled axes. The plus or minus sign in thesignal name indicates the direction, and the number at the end...

  • Page 1845

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1819[Classification] Input signal[Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocksto be made at a subsequent cutting feed command.(1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)(2) Cutting feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g...

  • Page 1846

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031820#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0EBUFAECLRAESTPAESOFAESBKAEMBUFAEFINAEMSBKAEC6AEC5AEC4AEC3AEC2AEC1AEC0AEIF7AEIF6AEIF5AEIF4AEIF3AEIF2AEIF1AEIF0AEIF15AEIF14AEIF13AEIF12A EIF11AEIF10AEIF9AEIF8AEID7AEID6AEID5AEID4AEID3AEID2AEID1AEID0AEID15AEID14AEID13AEID12AEID11AEID10AEI...

  • Page 1847

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1821#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0EBUFCECLRCESTPCESOFCESBKC EMBUFCEFINCEMSBKCEC6CEC5CEC4CEC3CEC2CEC1CEC0CEIF7CEIF6CEIF5CEIF4CEIF3CEIF2CEIF1CEIF0CEIF15CEIF14CEIF13CEIF12C EIF11CEIF10CEIF9CEIF8CEID7CEID6CEID5CEID4CEID3CEID2CEID1CEID0CEID15CEID14CEID13CEID12C EID11CEID10C...

  • Page 1848

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031822CNC→PMCADDRESS#7EADEN8F112#6EADEN7#5EADEN6#4EADEN5#3EADEN4#2EADEN3#1EADEN2#0EADEN1*EAXSLF129EOV0#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0EBSYAEOTNAEOTPAEGENAEDENAEIALAECKZAEINPAEABUFAEMFAEM28AEM24AEM22AEM21AEM18AEM14AEM12AEM11AForgroup AF130F131F132EMF3AEMF2A#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#...

  • Page 1849

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1823#7EACNT8F182#6EACNT7#5EACNT6#4EACNT5#3EACNT4#2EACNT3#1EACNT2#0EACNT1TRQM8F190TRQM7TRQM6TRQM5TRQM4TRQM3TRQM2TRQM11427External deceleration speed of each axis[Data type] Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS...

  • Page 1850

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031824NOTEThis parameter is valid when TQF (bit 4 of parameter 1803)is held 0.#72000#6#5#4#3#2#1DGPRx#0[Data type] Bit axisDGPRx At power–ON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105):0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.1 :...

  • Page 1851

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1825NOTEThis parameter is valid when the same axis is controlledalternately by the CNC and PMC.#7THB3709#6#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitTHB The start type for threading is:0 : A type1 : B typeCAUTIONWhen PMC axis control is used, set this parameter to 1.#7SK...

  • Page 1852

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031826NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected bya controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program:0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axiscontrol command. While the PMC does no...

  • Page 1853

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1827PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis controlPF2PF1Feedrate unit001/1011/10101/100111/1000FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by thePMC.FR2FR1Metric inputInch input000.0001 mm/rev0.00...

  • Page 1854

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031828NMT If the CNC issues a command that does not result in any movement alonga PMC–controlled axis while another command, specified for the axis, isbeing processed,0 : P/S alarm No. 130 occurs.1 : No alarm occurs.JFM Specifies the units used to specify...

  • Page 1855

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1829NOTEWhile the CDI bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 8005) is held to 0,the NDI bit is valid for an axis of diameter programming (theDIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) is set to 1).#7MFD8005#6#5#4#3#2#1CDI#0EDC[Data type] BitEDC Under PMC axis control, t...

  • Page 1856

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0318308022Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–controlled axis[Data type] Word axisIncrement systemUnit of dataValid data rangeIncrement systemUnit of dataIS-A, IS-BIS-CMillimeter machine1 mm/min6 to 150006 to 12000Inch machine0.1 inch/min6 ...

  • Page 1857

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1831(1) P/S AlarmNumberMessageDescription130ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATIONAn axis control command was given byPMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Oran axis control command was given byCNC to an axis controlled by PMC.Modify the program.139CAN NOT CHANGE PMCCONTROL...

  • Page 1858

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031832CAUTION1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lockcan be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001)is set to “1”. However, machine lock for an individual axisis always enabled.2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new ...

  • Page 1859

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1833This function makes it possible to use the following functions.(1) Cutting fees (sec/block)The time period until the end of the block can be specified.(2) Simultaneous start mode on/offIf the simultaneous start mode is turned on, the commands for mult...

  • Page 1860

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031834If the simultaneous start mode is set on, the commands for multiple pathscan be simultaneously started. By using this function together withsec/block described in Item (1), ”Cutting feed,” linear interpolation byPMC axis control can be implemente...

  • Page 1861

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1835The simultaneous start mode can be set on or off in any command groupof any path. If a block for setting on the simultaneous start mode isspecified while the simultaneous start mode is set on, the block becomesinvalid. For the other paths, normal co...

  • Page 1862

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031836NOTE1 Specify a cutting feed command by the automatic operationon the CNC side in the incremental mode.2 If a signal is switched from 1 to 0 during superimposedoperation, alarm 130 will be raised. When setting a signalto 0, do so after checking that ...

  • Page 1863

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1837#78006#6#5ESI#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitESI Superimposed control of the PMC axis control extension function is:0 : Extended.1 : Not extended.To use the superimposed command, set this parameter to 1.NumberMessageDescription130ILLEGAL AXISOPERATIONAn axis...

  • Page 1864

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031838Bit 4 of parameter No. 8005 specifies either position loop control orvelocity loop control is used to execute a constant velocity command forPMC–axis control.For a constant velocity command, acceleration or deceleration isperformed only by its dedic...

  • Page 1865

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1839The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.Signal nameSignal codeData signal for external data input (input)Address signal for external data input (input)Read signal for external data input (input)Read completion signal for ex...

  • Page 1866

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031840Data types accessed by external data inputNo.ItemESTEAEAEAEAEAEAEAED15 to ED0No.ItemSTBEA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA0151413121110 9 8765432101External program numbersearch1000××××Program number(BCD4 digits)1External program numbersearch1000××××0 to 90 ...

  • Page 1867

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1841A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source andis selected in the CNC memory. For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function canautomatically select the program to be executed corresponding to aspecific wor...

  • Page 1868

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031842Read signal for external data input(ESTB)Read completion signal for external data input (EREND)If RST becomes 1 even momentarily in thisperiodReset signal(RST)Search completion signal for externaldata input (ESEND)ESEND does not become high.Search can...

  • Page 1869

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1843Read signal for external data input(ESTB)Read completion signal for external data input (EREND)Search completion signal for externaldata input (ESEND)Cycle start lamp signal(ST)Cycle start signal(STL)Automatic operation signal(OP)External reset signal...

  • Page 1870

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031844ED2ED1ED0ED5ED4ED3ED6ED9ED8ED7ED12ED11ED10ED13ED14ED15EA2EA1EA0EA5EA4EA3EA60001 ABS/INC0MSBOffset amountsignAddressData0Specified by BCD 4-digit code(0000 to 7999)Specify “000”0 : Incremental specification(Input value is added to present compensat...

  • Page 1871

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1845The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiececoordinate system depending on the shift amount set via the PMC. Eachaxis (parameter No. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all theworkpiece coordinate systems for use. T...

  • Page 1872

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031846NOTETwo characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in thetable below).ED15 to ED8Character code in 1st character.. . . . . . ED7 to ED0Character code in 2nd character.. . . . . . . When sending only one character, fill the second slot witha cod...

  • Page 1873

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1847Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of partsmachined.BCD 4–digit code(0000 to 9999)Set to 110000.0 : No. of parts required1 : No. of parts machinedED15EA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA00/1110000ED0AddressDataMSB LSBValue of aprt...

  • Page 1874

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031848[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entereddata.[Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the “basicprocedure.”[Classification] Output signal[Function] T...

  • Page 1875

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1849#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G000G001G002ED7ED6ED5ED4ED3ED2ED1ED0ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9ED8ESTBEA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA0F060ESEND EREND#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ESCAN#73202#6PSR#5#4#3#2#1#0[Data type] BitPSR Search for the program number of a protected program0 : Disabled1 ...

  • Page 1876

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031850NumberDescriptionMessage132ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUNDNo alarm No. concerned exists in exter-nal alarm message clear.Check the PMC ladder diagram.133ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSGSmall section data is erroneous in ex-ternal alarm message or external oper-a...

  • Page 1877

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1851When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, aprogram can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1to PN16 from the machine side.When the cycle operation is actuated in the memory operation mode underreset status, th...

  • Page 1878

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031852Workpiece number search signalWorkpiecenumberPN16PN8PN4PN2PN1Workpiecenumber01100120110113011101401111151000016100011710010181001119101002010101211011022101112311000241100125110102611011271110028111012911110301111131Workpiece number 00 is a special de...

  • Page 1879

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1853NumberMessageDescription059PROGRAM NUMBERNOT FOUNDDuring an external program numbersearch or external workpiece numbersearch, a specified program numberwas not found. Otherwise, a programspecified for searching is being editedin background processing...

  • Page 1880

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031854Using the EPN0 to EPN13 (expanded external workpiece number search)signals enables a search for program numbers O0001 to O9999.Unlike the workpiece number search signal, which triggers an automaticoperation after a program search, these signals can ma...

  • Page 1881

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1855#7EPN7G024#6EPN6#5EPN5#4EPN4#3EPN3#2EPN2#1EPN1#0EPN0#7EPNSG025#6#5EPN13#4EPN12#3EPN11#2EPN10#1EPN9#0EPN8#73006#6#5#4#3#2EPS#1EPN#0EPN Workpiece number search signals are assigned to:0 : PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8, and PN16.1 : EPN0 to EPN13.EPS When a program...

  • Page 1882

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031856The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor,connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog outputfunction.The first to fourth spindles each have their own individual interfaces. Byusing a PMC ladder program, the u...

  • Page 1883

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1857Spindle motor speed data =Spindle speedMaximum spindle speed 4095By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data caneasily be obtained.The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when thefollowing are executed:⋅ Switching the contr...

  • Page 1884

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031858To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gearsto be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the dataof the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify thedata as the speed output command for the seco...

  • Page 1885

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1859D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx→ The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed iscontrolled by the CNC or PMC.1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands(R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by...

  • Page 1886

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031860[Classification] Output signal[Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speedoutput of the spindle motor that is required to control the connectedspindle. The converted value is sent to the PMC with twelve code si...

  • Page 1887

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1861NOTEFor the T series, this parameter is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is notoutput:(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindlespeed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speedcontrol m...

  • Page 1888

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031862[Setting method](1) Set 0 (standard value)(2) Specify a spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog outputbecomes 0.(3) Measure output voltage.(4) Set the following value to parameter No. 3731. Set value =–8191 offset voltage (V)12.5(5) After ...

  • Page 1889

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1863CONNECTION MANUAL (This manual)9.2SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLEANALOG OUTPUT9.3SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL9.10MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL9.15THREE/FOUR–SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUTReference Item

  • Page 1890

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031864MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interfacesignals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as whenthe operator performs MDI key operation.Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals betweent...

  • Page 1891

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1865NOTERead processing is controlled by exclusive–ORing (XOR)the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completionsignal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signalsdiffer in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Oncereading has been comple...

  • Page 1892

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031866[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal is on “1” while the CNC is displaying a program screen.[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code.#7EKSETG066#6#5#4#3#2#1ENBKY#0EKC7G098EKC6EKC...

  • Page 1893

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1867NOTE1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to .For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to . 0EEH is assigned to .2 Handling of the soft keys[F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the keycodes for the sof...

  • Page 1894

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031868MDI Key Code Table(00H–7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0Space0@P 11AQ 22BR 3#3CS 44DT 55EU 6&6FV 77GW 8 (8HX 9)9IY A; (EOB)*JZ B+K [ C,L D–=M] E.N F / ?O

  • Page 1895

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1869MDI Key Code Table(80H–0FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0RESET[F0](Note2) 1[F1](Note2) 2[F2](Note2) 3[F3](Note2) 4INSERT[F4](Note2) 5DELETE[F5](Note2) 6CANALTER[F6](Note2) 7[F7](Note2) 8Cursor→INPUTPOS[F8](N...

  • Page 1896

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031870Activating memory operation in memory operation mode (MEM) withthe direct operation select signal set to 1 enables machining (directoperation=DNC operation) while reading a program stored in the PMCor OPEN CNC.[Classification] Input signal[Function] S...

  • Page 1897

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1871You can connect two PCs to the CNC by connecting two HSSB boardsto the CNC.This subsection describes machining (direct operation = DNC operation)performed while reading a program from the PC connected to the secondHSSB board.For the second HSSB board,...

  • Page 1898

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031872This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switchinstalled in the machine only by the change in a minimum LADDERprogram.(1) Changes to MEM mode.(2) Execution of macro program registered in memory.(3) Return to the mode before ...

  • Page 1899

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1873D Return of mode(7) Please change the mode on the PMC side based on the signal outputin the step of above (6).(8) Please set ”1” in Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) on thePMC side when the mode change is completed. The P/S5306 alarmis not che...

  • Page 1900

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031874The abnormal end signal (MCSP) is not output when stopping in feedhold or single block. Under such a condition, when the cycle start signal(ST) is turned on and off, the continuity of the macro program is executed.Under such a condition, even if macro...

  • Page 1901

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1875NOTE1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selectionsignal (MD1,MD2,MD4) is effective. Therefore, pleasechange the LADDER program to disable the mode changewhen the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is ”1” whenthe inconvenience is caus...

  • Page 1902

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031876[Classification] Input signal[Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence.[Operation] When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts thecorresponding macro program. O number of the program started by theMCST1 signal is specifie...

  • Page 1903

    B–63523EN–1/0315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION1877[Classification] Output signal[Function] This signal notifies the mode which should be changed.[Output condition] This signal is output in the following case:S When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal(MCSTx).S When M30 or M02 is e...

  • Page 1904

    15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0318786095The number of programs used by the macro call function[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] Number[Valid data range] 0 to 16Specify the number of programs used by the macro call function.For instance, when three is set, macro call start signal MCST1, MCS...

  • Page 1905

    B–63523EN–1/0316. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC187916 INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC

  • Page 1906

    16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNCB–63523EN–1/031880This function enables manual handle feed of the Servo Motor b series I/OLink Option (called I/O Link b below) with the manual pulse generatoron the host side. A pulse signal generated by the manual pulse generatoris sent to the I/O Link ...

  • Page 1907

    B–63523EN–1/0316. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC1881[Classification] Input signal[Function] The signals select a manual pulse generator for feeding the I/O Link b.[Operation] A manual pulse generator for feeding the I/O Link b is selected with thesignals.Input signalManual pulse generator ...

  • Page 1908

    16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNCB–63523EN–1/031882#7G1712330#6G16#5G15#4G14#3G13#2G12#1G11#0G10[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.#0 G10 When PMC group 0 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O L...

  • Page 1909

    B–63523EN–1/0316. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC1883#7G1F12331#6G1E#5G1D#4G1C#3G1B#2G1A#1G19#0G18[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.#0 G18 When PMC group 8 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O L...

  • Page 1910

    16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNCB–63523EN–1/031884#7G2712332#6G26#5G25#4G24#3G23#2G22#1G21#0G20[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.#0 G20 When PMC group 0 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O L...

  • Page 1911

    B–63523EN–1/0316. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC1885#7G2F12333#6G2E#5G2D#4G2C#3G2B#2G2A#1G29#0G28[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] BitNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.#0 G28 When PMC group 8 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O L...

  • Page 1912

    16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNCB–63523EN–1/031886[Classification] CNC (host) → I/O Link b[Function] The signals select an operation mode of the I/O Link b.[Operation] The manual handle feed mode of the I/O Link b is selected with thesignals.Input signalMD4MD2MD1100NOTE1 Turn the manua...

  • Page 1913

    B–63523EN–1/0316. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC1887NOTE1 The signals are valid when bit 5 (MP) of parameter No. 5 forthe I/O Link b is set to 1.2 The signals are valid only in the manual handle mode.3 The signals are used also as rapid traverse override signals.In the manual handle mode, ...

  • Page 1914

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/03188817 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONThis chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernetfunction for Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B.

  • Page 1915

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1889The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of twotypes of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slotto the left of the front LCD for temporar...

  • Page 1916

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031890With the embedded Ethernet function, the following functions can beoperated:S FACTOLINK functionS FOCAS1/Ethernet functionS DNC1/Ethernet functionS FTP file transfer functionNOTEWith the series 20i–B, the ”FACTOLINK function” and”DNC1/Et...

  • Page 1917

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1891The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotelycontrol and monitor the CNC. The FOCAS1/Ethernet function cantransfer a wider range of NC data than the DNC1/Ethernet function. Fordetails, refer to ”FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/Et...

  • Page 1918

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031892NOTEWith the FOCAS1/Ethernet function of the embeddedEthernet function, DNC operation cannot be performed.The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotelycontrol and monitor the CNC. The DNC1/Ethernet function providessoftware ...

  • Page 1919

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1893Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet functionCompared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, the DNC1/Ethernetfunction provides software libraries in a simpler function call format forfrequently used functions.

  • Page 1920

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031894The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP. The function canread and punch NC programs and various types of NC data.NOTEThe FTP file transfer function is usable with the controlsoftware for the embedded Ethernet function series 656...

  • Page 1921

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1895NOTE1 The embedded Ethernet function includes the FTP filetransfer function.This function is almost equivalent to the NC data transferfunction in the FTP mode of the Data Server function of theoption board.2 Compared with the option board, the e...

  • Page 1922

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031896This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embeddedEthernet function.This subsection describes the settings required to operate theFACTOLINK function when the embedded Ethernet function is used.CAUTIONWhen using the embedded Et...

  • Page 1923

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1897On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FACTOLINK function.Display1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM.3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4 Pr...

  • Page 1924

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0318987 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE .If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

  • Page 1925

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1899Display item and setting itemsThe item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.ItemDescriptionMAC ADDRESSEmbedded Ethernet MAC addressSet the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet.ItemDescriptionIP ADDRESSSpecify the IP ...

  • Page 1926

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031900The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are describedbelow.0802Communication channel[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00810MONOTIMEBGS[Data type] BitBGS When the FACTOLINK screen is n...

  • Page 1927

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19010814Trigger PMC address for logging[Data type] Word[Valid data range] 0 to 65535Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data.0815Logging data transmission interval[Data type] Double–word[Unit of data] Seconds[Valid da...

  • Page 1928

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031902An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINKfunction on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough FACTOLINK.D On Personal Computer 1, the server of the FACTOLINK f...

  • Page 1929

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1903When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network,consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, androuter IP address.This subsection describes the settings required to operate theFOCAS1/Ethernet function (o...

  • Page 1930

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031904On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FOCAS1/Ethernet function.Display1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM.3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key displa...

  • Page 1931

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19057 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE .If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

  • Page 1932

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031906Display item and setting itemsThe item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.ItemDescriptionMAC ADDRESSEmbedded Ethernet MAC addressSet the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet.ItemDescriptionIP ADDRESSSpecify the IP ...

  • Page 1933

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1907NOTE1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval,communication load increases, and the performance of thenetwork can be adversely affected.2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to thefollowing default values before s...

  • Page 1934

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031908An example of minimum setting required to operate theFOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough FOCAS1/Ethernet.D On Personal Computer 1, the client of the...

  • Page 1935

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1909An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernetfunction on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough DNC1/Ethernet.D On Personal Computer 1, the client of the DNC...

  • Page 1936

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031910When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network,consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, androuter IP address.This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FTP filetransfer function ...

  • Page 1937

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1911On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FTP file transfer function.Display1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM.3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key disp...

  • Page 1938

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0319127 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE .If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

  • Page 1939

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1913Display item and setting itemsThe item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.ItemDescriptionMAC ADDRESSEmbedded Ethernet MAC addressSet the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet.ItemDescriptionIP ADDRESSSpecify the IP ...

  • Page 1940

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031914The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are describedbelow.0020I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.0931Special character (N...

  • Page 1941

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1915An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transferfunction on a small network is provided below. (Windows NT 4.0Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer.)In this example, one personal computer is connected to...

  • Page 1942

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031916When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network,consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, androuter IP address.This subsection describes the method of parameter input when theembedded Ethernet functio...

  • Page 1943

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1917(b) Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys.(c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter thedata.This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.NOTETurn on the power again so that you should make a changedparamete...

  • Page 1944

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031918Method of lowercase character inputThe method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a username, password, and login DIR is described below.1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen.3 Move the cursor to a ...

  • Page 1945

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19193 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys.4 Press the [STRING] soft key. The cursor position and soft key displaychange as shown below.

  • Page 1946

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0319205 Type ”/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0” with theMDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key.6 Next, type the remaining character string ”02” with the MDI keys, thenpress the [INPUT] soft key.[Tip]For example, even if the character string...

  • Page 1947

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19217 To insert ”/FACTORY0010” between ”NCPROGRAM” and”/LINE001”, move the cursor to ”/” prefixed to ”LINE001” then type”/FACTORY0010” with the MDI keys. Finally, press the [INSERT]soft key.8 To delete a character, move the ...

  • Page 1948

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031922Method of entering special charactersThe method of entering special characters such as ”\” unavailable with theMDI keys is described below.As an example, the procedure for setting the character string ”PROG$”is described.1 Place the CNC ...

  • Page 1949

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19235 Press the [$] soft key.6 Press the [INPUT] soft key.

  • Page 1950

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031924There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embeddedEthernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM.3 Pres...

  • Page 1951

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19255 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between theembedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears.6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears. Pressthe [EXEC] soft key to switch the device.NOTEIn...

  • Page 1952

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031926This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernetfunction.The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below.Display1 Press the function key MESSAGE.2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key d...

  • Page 1953

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1927The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.A list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer isdisplayed.1 Press the function key PROG .2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft ke...

  • Page 1954

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031928NOTEDepending on the FTP server software, the number ofdisplayed programs may differ between the host file listscreen above and the host file list (detail) screen describedbelow.5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display ...

  • Page 1955

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1929NOTEThe host file list (detail) screen shown above is an exampleof screen display, and information displayed may varyaccording to the specification of the FTP server used withthe host computer.Display itemsThe number of files registered in the d...

  • Page 1956

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031930When a list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the hostcomputer is displayed, a file can be placed at the start of the list byspecifying its file number.1 Display the host file list screen.2 Press the [SEARCH] soft key.3 Type the fil...

  • Page 1957

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1931A file (NC program) on the host computer can be read to the CNCmemory.For the host file list screen1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Display the host file list screen.3 Press the [READ] soft key.4 Type the file number or file name of an NC prog...

  • Page 1958

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031932For the program screen1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Press the function key PROG .3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft ke...

  • Page 1959

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19335 Press the [EXEC] soft key.6 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.[Example of use]When an NC program (O0001) in the CNC memory is to be output to thehard disk embedded to the host computer, enter O0001.NOT...

  • Page 1960

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031934With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can beinput/output. This subsection describes the input/output method.A) NC parameterB) Tool offset valueC) Custom macro variableD) Workpiece offset offset valueE) Pitch error ...

  • Page 1961

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19358 Press the [EXEC] soft key.9 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.The fixed file name PRAMETER is used.Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC.Tool offset value inputThe file (tool offset value) on th...

  • Page 1962

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031936The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used.Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC.Workpiece origin offset value inputThe file (workpiece origin offset value) on the host computer can be inputto the CNC memory.1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Pr...

  • Page 1963

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1937Pitch error compensation inputThe file (pitch error compensation) on the host computer can be input tothe CNC memory.1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM .3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft k...

  • Page 1964

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031938M code group inputThe file (M code group) on the host computer can be input to the CNCmemory.1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM .3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4 Press the [...

  • Page 1965

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1939Operation history data inputThe file (operation history data) on the host computer can be input to theCNC memory.1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2 Press the function key SYSTEM .3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key d...

  • Page 1966

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031940The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts tomake a connection as the current communication destination can bechecked.1 Press the function key PROG .2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display...

  • Page 1967

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1941NOTEThe title of the host computer that is the currentcommunication destination of the embedded Ethernet isdisplayed in reverse video.5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1],[CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key.Display itemsTho...

  • Page 1968

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031942If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function,the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays anerror message.Display1 Press the function key MESSAGE .2 Press the continuous menu key at the right en...

  • Page 1969

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19435 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE .[Tip]The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the rightof an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the erroris displayed. The format of da...

  • Page 1970

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031944With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen isavailable.The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when theembedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.Display1 Press the function key SYSTEM .2 Press the co...

  • Page 1971

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19456 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cableand whether a communication destination exists.Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDIkeys, then press the [PING] soft key. Communication is perform...

  • Page 1972

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0319467 The screen below is used to check the communication state of theembedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of theEthernet controller.The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection countfor transmission, and the...

  • Page 1973

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19478 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of theembedded Ethernet function.SymbolMeaningMASTER CTRLEEthernet controller being initializedDData being processed(NOTE)WWaiting for data processing(NOTE)PWaiting for parameter setting...

  • Page 1974

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031948MeaningSymbolPMCXWaiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitializationDData being processed(NOTE)WWaiting for data processing(NOTE)FTPXWaiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitializationDData being processed(NOTE)WWaiting for data ...

  • Page 1975

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1949ItemDescriptionEMPTY COUNTERIndicates a buffer empty count during NC program transferfrom the FTP file transfer function to the CNC.This counter is initialized to 0 at power–on, then is increm-ented each time a certain condition is satisfied.T...

  • Page 1976

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031950This additional manual explains DHCP and DNS functions of EmbeddedEthernet .By using DHCP function, CNC can get TCP/IP parameters from theDHCP server software of a PC .(If DHCP function is not available, TCP/IP parameters need to beconfigured to...

  • Page 1977

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1951By using DNS function, CNC can utilize a domain name (FQDN : fullyqualified domain name, for example, www.fanuc.co.jp) in order to specify the remotecommunication partner, instead of an IP address.

  • Page 1978

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031952For Standard Ethernet I/F#714880#6DHCP#5DNS#4#3D1ET#2#1#0[Data type] BitsD1ET TCP, UDP and Time interval parameters, when DHCP is available.0 : The following parameters are configured automatically forFOCAS1/Ethernet function.TCP port number8193...

  • Page 1979

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1953When DHCP function works in normal, the following parameters areconfigured to CNC by the DHCP server of PC.D IP addressD Sub–net maskD IP address for routerD IP address for DNS serverD Host nameD DomainIn the case that the parameters are confi...

  • Page 1980

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031954In the case that the parameters can not be configured by DHCP serverWhen DNS function is available, please set the ”DNS IP address” for aremote DNS server.(2) Setting screen in thecase that DNS isavailable

  • Page 1981

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1955D FOCAS1/Ethernet (DNC1/Ethernet) function (Note)D Machine remote diagnosis functionD FACTOLINK functionD FOCAS1/Ethernet (DNC1/Ethernet) function (Note)D Machine remote diagnosis functionNOTEWhen using FOCAS1/Ethernet function, DNS function o...

  • Page 1982

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031956On the condition of the following, this chapter explains the settings ofDHCP/DNS server.1) DHCP server and DNS server run on the same PC.2) The IP address of DHCP/DNS server is ”192.168.0.254”.3) The range of IP addresses leased by DHCP serv...

  • Page 1983

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1957This section explains the procedure of DHCP server settings.Click [Programs]–[Administrative Tools]–[DHCP].Click [Action]–[New Scope], and ”New Scope Wizard” will start.Click [Next]17.8.4.1Example of DHCP serversettings onWindows2000 s...

  • Page 1984

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031958Input ”factory” to [Name], and do ”FACTORY” to [Description].Click [Next].Input ”192.168.0.10” to [Start IP address], ”192.168.0.29” to [End IPaddress], ”24” to [Length], and ”255.255.255.0” to [Subnet mask]respectively.C...

  • Page 1985

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1959Click [Next] without modification.Confirm that Lease Duration is ”8 days”. Then click [Next].

  • Page 1986

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031960Confirm that [Yes, I want to...] is checked. Then click [Next].Click [Next] without modification.

  • Page 1987

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1961Input ”192.168.0.254”, and then click [Add].Click [Next].Click [Next] without modification.

  • Page 1988

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031962Confirm that [Yes, I want to ...] is checked. Then click [Next].Click [Finish].

  • Page 1989

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1963Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory]–[Scope Options]–[Action]–[Configure Options].Check [DNS Domain Name], and then input ”factory”.Click [OK].The configured parameters are displayed as follows.(3) Adding of scopeoption

  • Page 1990

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031964Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory]–[Scope]–[Properties].Check the items like the following figure.Click [OK]Then the setting of DHCP server is finished.(4) Setting for referringto Dynamic DNS

  • Page 1991

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1965This section explains the procedure of DNS server settings.Click [Programs]–[Administrative Tools]–[DNS].Click [Action]–[Configure the server]. Then the Configure DNS ServerWizard will appear.Click [Next].17.8.4.2Example of DNS serversetti...

  • Page 1992

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031966Confirm that [This is the first DNS...] is checked. Then click [Next].Confirm that [Yes, create a forward...] is checked. Then click [Next].

  • Page 1993

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1967Confirm that [Standard primary] is checked. Then click [Next].Input ”factory.”. (Don’t forget the last period”.”)Click [Next].

  • Page 1994

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031968Confirm that [Create a new file...] is ”factory.dns”. Then click [Next].Confirm that [Yes, create...] is checked. Then click [Next].

  • Page 1995

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1969Confirm that [Standard primary] is checked. Then click [Next].Input ”192.168.0”.Click [Next].

  • Page 1996

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031970Confirm that [Create a new file...] is ”0.168.192.in–addr.arpa.dns”. Thenclick [Next].Click [Finish].

  • Page 1997

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1971Click [Forward Lookup Zones]–[factory] with using the right side button.And then click [Properties].Choose ”Yes” from [Allow dynamic updates?].Click [OK].Then the setting of DNS server is finished.(3) Allowing of DynamicDNS

  • Page 1998

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031972The Ethernet parameters of CNC can be configured by utilizing aDHCP/DNS server, without CNC setting operation.DHCP is the network function which can assign a unique IP address tothe devices on a network automatically.When a CNC is rebooted(1) CN...

  • Page 1999

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1973Windows2000 Server or later is recommended.(DHCP/DNS server needs to support Dynamic DNS.)The following items need to be configured in DHCP server.1) Range of IP addresses which can be leased by DHCP server2) Sub–net mask3) IP address for DNS ...

  • Page 2000

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031974This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated withthe embedded Ethernet function.1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embeddedEthernet?2) Is the STP cable connected correctly?In general, a straight cable...

  • Page 2001

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19754) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less?5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiversatisfy the specified length?S Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50m. However, the maximum...

  • Page 2002

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031976This subsection describes how to check the state of communicationbetween the CNC and personal computer.Checking the connection status and settingsIf communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time totime, check the communicatio...

  • Page 2003

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION19772) When no response is received (error)If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to bea hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check thehardware connection and software settings.Checking the influence of...

  • Page 2004

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/0319783) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response isreturned).If lost packets occur in this state, there is probably an influence ofnoise from peripheral equipment.Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling toeliminate the i...

  • Page 2005

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1979If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen ofthe embedded Ethernet function displays an error message.This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen.The major error messages are described below.If a...

  • Page 2006

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031980TCP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALIDThe setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCPport number.Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESSThe broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct thesubnet mask and IP address of the ...

  • Page 2007

    B–63523EN–1/0317. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION1981This section briefly describes Ethernet–related terms.The descriptions below provide minimum information only. For furtherinformation, refer to relevant publications available on the market.For Ethernet–based communication, the TCP/IP (Tran...

  • Page 2008

    17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONB–63523EN–1/031982IP addresses are internationally managed systematically. This means thatbefore an IP address can be used, the IP address must be obtained formallyfrom the international organization.If the network used by a user is a local network closed within...

  • Page 2009

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS198318 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

  • Page 2010

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031984Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier bydiagnosis according to the guidance message.And when the thermal simulation or disturbance torque of servo axisexceeds the trouble forecast level, a trouble forecast signal can be outpu...

  • Page 2011

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS19853 Finaly, the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screenshows the probable cause of alarm and the method to remove theproblem.

  • Page 2012

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031986The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message toinvestigate the cause of an alarm.1 Press function key [Message].2 Press the continuous menu key [>] and press soft key [GUIDE].Contents of troubleProbable causeGuidance messageSta...

  • Page 2013

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1987[YES]/[NO]:Check contents of guidance message, and, answer bypressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the next guidancemessage is displayed.In some cases CNC automatically checks and judgescontents of guidance. In this case the next guidancemessage is autom...

  • Page 2014

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031988Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen memorizes and displays servo/spindlemonitor information for investigating servo/spindle alarm.Three kinds of data, ”Data when the alarm occurs”, ”Data just before thealarm occurs”, ”Current data” can be select...

  • Page 2015

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1989Displayed data in Monitor screen is showed below.Display range is the range which can be displayed on screen and notcapacity of system.1) Data of servo motorData (Unit)Data typeDisplay rangeRequired parameterAccumulated command pulse (pulse)2 Word"9...

  • Page 2016

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/0319902) Data of spindle motorData (Unit)Data typeDisplay rangeRequired parameterOperation modeCharacter*****Gear select commandCharacter*****Command pulse (pulse)2 Word"99999999Command speed (min–1) Note 1)1 Word–32768 to +32767No.4020 (Main)/No.4...

  • Page 2017

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1991Servo monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [NEW]/[OLD]/[CURRNT].Soft key [NEW] and [OLD] is displayed alternately.[NEW]:Data when the alarm occurs[OLD]:Data just before the alarm occurs[CURRNT]: Current data[MON_SP]: Spindle monitor infor...

  • Page 2018

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031992Data type, data unit and trouble forecast level in the trouble diagnosisgraphic screen are set in Trouble Diagnosis Parameter Screen.1 Press function key [Message].2 Press the continuous menu key [>] and press soft key [W.GRPH].3 Press soft key [W.PRM...

  • Page 2019

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1993Move cursor by Cursor key and input number by MDI key and press inputkey [INPUT] to set data.AXIS:In case of servo axis, input control axis number.(Example) Set ”1” for first servo axis.In case of spindle axis, input ”10 + spindle number”.(Exampl...

  • Page 2020

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031994Servo/spindle data is automatically memorized for several seconds beforealarm occurs and display and waveform of data can be displayed inTrouble Diagnosis Graphic Screen.Maximum 2 kinds of data are displayed in the same time.1 Press function key [Message...

  • Page 2021

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1995When Soft key [G–ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.[<] [] [] [] [] [] [ ]W.PRMG–ADJ.TRB_LV(OPRT)[<] [] [] [] [] [] [>]TIME→TIME←H–DOBLH–HALF(OPRT)[<] [] [] [] [] [] [>]CH–1↑CH–1↓V–DOBLV–HALF(OPRT)[<...

  • Page 2022

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/031996Trouble forecast level is set in this screen.Two trouble forecast levels, thermal simulation and disturbance torque,can be set.1 Press function key <Message>.2 Press the continuous menu key [>] and press soft key [W.GRPH].3 Press soft key [TRB L...

  • Page 2023

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS19971 Select thermal simulation or disturbance torque by page keys[Page↑]/[Page↓].2 Select axis by cursor keys [↑]/[↓].3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press [INPUT] key.Trouble forecast level is input into parameter No.8860 and 8861.When Soft ...

  • Page 2024

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/0319988860Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation8861Trouble forecast level for disturbance torque[Data type] WORD AXIS[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 to 100%#713110#6#5#4#3#2#1#0JPNNOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore ...

  • Page 2025

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS1999Machine alarms (External alarm message and Macro alarm) can bediagnosed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in addition to CNCalarms.Example of a trouble diagnosis guidance screenThe following alarms can be diagnosed.1 External alarm message(Alarm N...

  • Page 2026

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032000Microsoft, Windows, MS–DOS are registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation of the USA. Microsoft Excel 97 is aproduct whose copyright is owned by Microsoft Corporation ofthe USA.Guidance tables for diagnosis of machine alarms are made by using anExc...

  • Page 2027

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2001Alarm No., Classified code, Alarm message, Probable cause and etc. areregistered into a guidance table (1).(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)(a) Alarm No.Input alarm numbers of the external alarm message or the macro alarm.Max 5 figures (Range: 0–65535).Ex.) In case o...

  • Page 2028

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032002S [Check] buttonWhen [CheckECK] button is pushed, a range of number, a number ofcharacters and invalid character codes are checked.Alarm numbers are checked if they are within 0–65535. But alarmnumbers in the external alarm message and the macro alarm ...

  • Page 2029

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2003”Guidance message” is registered into a guidance table (2). ”Guidancemessage” is a question and an instruction to an operator.(a)(b)(c)(d)(a) Message IDA Message ID specifies a guidance message.Max 6 characters with capital letters.Ex.) In case o...

  • Page 2030

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032004S Input ”–1” for both YES and NO in case of the end of a diagnosis.(d) NotesIt is possible to write some notes here.S [Check] buttonWhen [Check] button is pushed, a range of number, a number ofcharacters and invalid character codes are checked.If t...

  • Page 2031

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2005Guidance tables on an Excel sheet is need to be converted to a memorycard file which CNC can reads. A procedure of conversion is as follows.(1) Finish to making both guidance tables (1) and (2), and then push[Convert] button on a guidance table (1).S In ...

  • Page 2032

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032006As a result of CNC alarm diagnosis, the alarm may be caused by machinetrouble. Considering such a case, it is possible to jump to MTB’s guidance tablefrom CNC guidance table by the special message IDs starting with ”M”.If the flowing special messag...

  • Page 2033

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2007#713110#6#5#4#3#2#1#0JPN[Data type] BitJPN Language used in the trouble diagnosis and the machine alarm diagnosis0 : English is prior.In case of the machine alarm diagnosis, a file ”GUIE_USR.MEM” isprior.1 : Japanese is prior.In case of the machine a...

  • Page 2034

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032008The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of thefollowing target alarms occurs.When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting toolsfrom the time a w...

  • Page 2035

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2009A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below.Servo amplifierSVWRN1–4(Warning)Occurrence of a warningActivationPerform deceleration stop or block stopduring this time period with the PMC tostop the machine without damage. Thetime period varies ...

  • Page 2036

    18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSISB–63523EN–1/032010For the αi spindle, the warning state can be reported before an alarm isissued. When the warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent.For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducingcutting load from the time a warning occ...

  • Page 2037

    B–63523EN–1/0318. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS2011WarningnumberDetailsContents58Converter maincircuit overloadedIf the main circuit of the PSM is overloaded, the warn-ing signal is output. Since the spindle continues tooperate at this time, use the PMC to perform proces-sing as needed.About one minute ...

  • Page 2038

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/03201219 INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROThe following diagram shows the relationships between interface signalsused among the CNC, PMC, and MACRO when a machining guidancefunction is implemented using the CNC macro executor.CNCMACRO...

  • Page 2039

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2013Coordinate originDatum plane setup signalsFirst–axis datum plane setup signal ORG1:Specifies a datum plane with the origin (0) set at thecurrent value of the first axis.Second–axis datum plane setup signal ORG2: Specifies a datu...

  • Page 2040

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032014Machining guidance menu selectsignalMachining guidance menu to beselectedGMN4 GMN3 GMN2 GMN1 GMN0FT00000Not selected (machining guidancemenu–based machining is not per-formed)00001Linear machiningLinear machining00010Circular machi...

  • Page 2041

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2015Feed–per–minute specification FMIN:When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in thefeed–per–minute mode.Feed–per–revolution specification FREV:When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in thefeed–per–revol...

  • Page 2042

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032016Timing of signals for specifying feed per minute and feed per revolutionThe following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as anexample.Feed–per–minute/–revolutionbutton(2)(3)(4)(5)(3)(4)(1)G98/G99;executedFMIN/FREV (f...

  • Page 2043

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2017Teaching/playback functionTeaching (cutting) TCH: When this signal is 1, it registers acutting operation that is supposed to endat the current position in memory.Teaching (rapid traverse) RCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a ra...

  • Page 2044

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032018Playback signal timingThe following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as anexample.(1) When the playback button is pressed, the PMC sets the PLB signal to1 to request MACRO to make preparation for playback execution.(2) W...

  • Page 2045

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2019Machining data setup signalsThese signals are used for manual handle/jog feed (linear/circular feed).AddressSizeLinear feedCircular feedR961 1 byte0: Neither linear nor circular feed is performed.1: Linear feed2: Circular feed (cl...

  • Page 2046

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032020Reset to 0 by themacro when settingends.Data at R961 to R974R979Set to 1 by the NC when it finishes reading.AddressSizeLinear feedCircular feedR980 to R9634 by-tesDistance from the cur-rent position to the speci-fied lineDistance fro...

  • Page 2047

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2021Timing of signals for machining guidance–based automatic operationThe following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as anexample.(2)(7)(5)(6)(3)(1)StartManual operationMD1, MD2, and MD4 (mode select signals)(PMC³CNC)MMEM...

  • Page 2048

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032022(7) When the GST becomes 0, and the mode select signal returns to theprevious state, the CNC resets the mode selection configuration signalMMEM to 0 to terminate machining guidance–based automaticoperation.Timing of signals for mac...

  • Page 2049

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2023Constant surface speed functionConstant surface speed function accepted signal SSCE:When this signal is 1, it indicates that MACRO hasaccepted a request for constant surface speed control.Teaching functionTeaching accepted signal TCE...

  • Page 2050

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032024X–axis(–)Z–axis(+)(+)(–)Approach direction when thehandle is rotated clockwiseCOSSINSIN=1COS=1SIN=0COS=1SIN=0COS=0SIN=1COS=0If the CNC is the T seriesCutting axisCircular cutting clockwise/counterclockwise rotation: C...

  • Page 2051

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2025The first, second, and third axes correspond to the X–, Y–, and Z–axes(20i–F) and the X– and Z–axes (20i–T), respectively.#7CW/CCWR985#6GUID#5APRC#4#3#23AXIS#12AXIS#01AXIS

  • Page 2052

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032026Limit data setup signalsAddressSet dataR9614: Specifies a line.5: Specifies a limit condition.R962 to R965Line tilt (COSθ 230)Inner datum point coordinate firstaxisR966 to R969Line tilt (SINθ 230)Inner datum point coordinate ...

  • Page 2053

    B–63523EN–1/0319. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO2027Timing of signals for polygon limit machiningThe following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as anexample.Input end key (INSERT)MACROLimit data write(R961 to R976)Setup change notification(R978)CNCLimit data read(R961 to ...

  • Page 2054

    19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACROB–63523EN–1/032028(7) MACRO sets the polygon limit mode request signal (MLMRQ) to 1.On detecting that the signal is 1, the PMC sets the polygon limit enablesignal (MALNT) to 1. After this, the CNC enables the polygon limitfunction according to the li...

  • Page 2055

    APPENDIX

  • Page 2056

  • Page 2057

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2031A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

  • Page 2058

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2032Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:G000–CNCPMCMTF000–X000–Y000–Following shows table of addresses:In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signalsare covered with shade ( ) in the...

  • Page 2059

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2033AddressBit number7X0006543210X001X002ESKIPX003-MIT2+MIT2-MIT1+MIT1ZAEXAESKIPSKIP6SKIP5SKIP4SKIP3SKIP2SKIP8SKIP7SKIPSKIP5SKIP4SKIP3(T series)(M series)X004X005X006X007*ESP*DEC8X008*DEC7*DEC6*DEC5*DEC4*DEC3*DEC2*DEC1X009X010X011X012SKIP6ESKIPSKI...

  • Page 2060

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2034AddressBit number#7G0006543210G001ESTBG002EA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA0G003G004MFIN3MFIN2FINBFING005AFLBFINTFINSFINEFINMFING006SKIPPOVC*ABSMSRNG007ERSG008RRW*SP*ESP*BSL*CSL*ITG009PN16PN8PN4PN2PN1G010ED7ED6ED5ED4ED3ED2ED1ED0ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9E...

  • Page 2061

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC203576543210EPNSG025EPN13EPN12EPN11EPN10EPN9EPN8G026*SSTP4SWS4PC4SLC PC3SLCCONG027*SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1SWS3SWS2SWS1PC2SLCG028SPSTP*SCPF *SUCPFGR2GR1G029*SSTPSORSARGR31GR21SOV7G030SOV6SOV5SOV4SOV3SOV2SOV1SOV0PKESS2G031PKESS1GR4IR08IG032R07IR06IR05IR...

  • Page 2062

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC203676543210G050*TLV9*TLV8*CHLDG051CHPST*CHP8*CHP4*CHP2*CHP0RMTDI7G052RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0CDZG053SMZUINTTMRONUI007G054UI006UI005UI004UI003UI002UI001UI000UI015G055UI014UI013UI012UI011UI010UI009UI008UI023G056UI022UI021UI0...

  • Page 2063

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC203776543210RCHBG075RSLBINTGBSOCNB MCFNBSPSLB*ESPBARSTBRCHHGBG076MFNHGB INCMDBOVRBDEFMDBNRROB ROTABINDXBG077DSCNB SORSLBMPOFBSLVBMORCMBSHA07G078SHA06SHA05SHA04SHA03SHA02SHA01SHA00G079SHA11SHA10SHA09SHA08SHB07G080SHB06SHB05SHB04SHB03SHB02SHB01SHB00...

  • Page 2064

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2038-LM176543210+J8G100+J7+J6+J5+J4+J3+J2+J1G101-J8G102-J7-J6-J5-J4-J3-J2-J1G103+EXL8G104+EXL7+EXL6+EXL5+EXL4+EXL3+EXL2+EXL1-EXL8G105-EXL7-EXL6-EXL5-EXL4-EXL3-EXL2-EXL1MI8G106MI7MI6MI5MI4MI3MI2MI1G107MLK8G108MLK7MLK6MLK5MLK4MLK3MLK2MLK1G109+LM8G11...

  • Page 2065

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC203976543210IUDD8G124IUDD7IUDD6IUDD5IUDD4IUDD3IUDD2IUDD1SVF8G125SVF7SVF6SVF5SVF4SVF3SVF2SVF1G126G127G128*IT8G129*IT7*IT6*IT5*IT4*IT3*IT2*IT1G130G131+MIT4+MIT3+MIT2+MIT1G132G133-MIT4-MIT3-MIT2-MIT1G134EAX8G135EAX7EAX6EAX5EAX4EAX3EAX2EAX1G136SYNC8G1...

  • Page 2066

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204076543210DRNEG149RTEOVCEROV2EROV1E*FV7EG150*FV6E*FV5E*FV4E*FV3E*FV2E*FV1E*FV0EG151G152EBUFBG153ECLRBESTPBESOFBESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZBEFINBEMSBKBG154EC6BEC5BEC4BEC3BEC2BEC1BEC0BEIF7BG155EIF6BEIF5BEIF4BEIF3BEIF2BEIF1BEIF0BEIF15BG156EIF14BEIF13BEIF12B...

  • Page 2067

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204176543210G174G175G176EBUFDG177ECLRDESTPDESOFDESBKD EMBUFDELCKZDEFINDEMSBKDG178EC6DEC5DEC4DEC3DEC2DEC1DEC0DEIF7DG179EIF6DEIF5DEIF4DEIF3DEIF2DEIF1DEIF0DEIF15DG180EIF14DEIF13DEIF12DEIF11DEIF10DEIF9DEIF8DEID7DG181EID6DEID5DEID4DEID3DEID2DEID1DEID0D...

  • Page 2068

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204276543210G199IOLBH3 IOLBH2EASIP8G200EASIP7EASIP6EASIP5EASIP4EASIP3EASIP2EASIP1G201JGRD3JGRD2JGRD1G202G203G204G205G206G207G208G209G210G211G212G213G214G215G216G217G218G219G220G221G222MRDYC ORCMLSFRCSRVCCTH1CCTH2CTLMHCTLMLCRCHCRSLCINTGCSOCNC MCFNC...

  • Page 2069

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204376543210G224G225G226G227G228G229G230G231G232G233G234G235G236G237G238G239G240G241G242G243G244G245G246G247G248

  • Page 2070

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204476543210G249G250G251G252G253G254G255G256G257G258G259G260G261G262G263G264G265G266G267G268G269G270G271G272G273MRDYD ORCMDSFRDSRVDCTH1DCTH2DTLMHDTLMLDRCHDRSLDINTGDSOCND MCFNDSPSLD*ESPDARSTDRCHHGD MFNHGDINCMDDOVRD DEFMDDNRROD ROTADINDXDDSCND SORSL...

  • Page 2071

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204576543210G274G275UI107G276UI106UI105UI104UI103UI102UI101UI100G277G278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287G288G289G290G291G292G293G294G295G296G297G298ITCDUI115UI114UI113UI112UI111UI110UI109UI108UI123UI122UI121UI120UI119UI118UI117UI116UI131UI130U...

  • Page 2072

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204676543210G299G300G301G302G303G304G305G306G307G308G309G310G311G312G313G314G315G316G317G318G319

  • Page 2073

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2047AddressBit number7F0006543210F001MDRNF002CUTSRNMVTHRDCSSRPDOINCHMTCHINF003MEDTMMEMMRMTMMDIMJMHMINCOPSASTLSPLRWDMATAPENBDENBALRSTALF004MBDT9F005MBDT8MBDT7MBDT6MBDT5MBDT4MBDT3MBDT2F006MREFMAFLMSBKMABSMMMLKMBDT1F007F008MF3MF2EFDM00F009DM01DM02DM3...

  • Page 2074

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC204876543210F025T07T06T05T04T03T02T01T00T15T14T13T12T11T10T09T08S31S30S29S28S27S26S25S24T31T30T29T28T27T26T25T24B07B06B05B04B03B02B01B00T23T22T21T20T19T18T17T16B23B22B21B20B19B18B17B16B31B30B29B28B27B26B25B24B15B14B13B12B11B10B09B08SPALR08OR07OR06...

  • Page 2075

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2049MHPCC76543210F050EXOFB SORENB MSOVRBINCSTB PC1DTBMORA2B MORA1BPORA2BSLVSBRCFNB RCHPBCFINBCHPBUO007UO006UO005UO004UO003UO002UO001UO000UO015UO014UO013UO012UO011UO010UO009UO008EKENBBGEACTRPALMRPBSY PRGDPLINHKYUO115UO114UO113UO112UO111UO110UO109UO...

  • Page 2076

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205076543210F075ROV2O ROV1ORTAPMP2OMP1ORTOHS1DO HS1CO HS1BOHS1AOSPOKEYODRNOMLKOSBKOBDTO*JV7O*JV6O*JV5O*JV4O*JV3O*JV2O*JV1O*JV0O*JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O*JV9O*JV8O*FV7O*FV6O*FV5O*FV4O*FV3O*FV2O*FV1O*FV0ORVSL- J4O+ J4O- J3O+ J3O- J2O...

  • Page 2077

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2051TRQL876543210F100MV8MV7MV6MV5MV4MV3MV2MV1ZP48ZP47ZP46ZP45ZP44ZP43ZP42ZP41INP8INP7INP6INP5INP4INP3INP2INP1MMI8MMI7MMI6MMI5MMI4MMI3MMI2MMI1MVD8MVD7MVD6MVD5MVD4MVD3MVD2MVD1MDTCH8 MDTCH7MDTCH6 MDTCH5MDTCH4MDTCH3 MDTCH2MDTCH1EADEN8EADEN7EADEN6EADEN...

  • Page 2078

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205276543210F125*EAXSLEOV0EBSYAEOTNAEOTPAEGENA EDENAEIALAECKZAEINPAEM28AEM24AEM22AEM21AEM18AEM14AEM12AEM11AEBSYBEOTNBEOTPBEGENB EDENBEIALBECKZBEINPBEABUFAEMFAEM28BEM24BEM22BEM21BEM18BEM14BEM12BEM11BEBSYCEOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENCEIALCECKZCEINPCEABUFB...

  • Page 2079

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205376543210F150EM48DEM44DEM42DEM41DEM38DEM34DEM32DEM31DF151F152F153F154F155F156F157F158F159F160F161F162F163F164F165F166F167F168F169F170F171F172F173F174ORARCTLMCLDT2CLDT1CSARCSDTCSSTCALMCMORA2C MORA1C PORA2CSLVSCRCFNC RCHPCCFINCCHPCEXOFC SORENC MS...

  • Page 2080

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205476543210F175EACNT8EACNT7EACNT6EACNT5EACNT4EACNT3EACNT2EACNT1F176F177F178F179F180F181F182F183F184F185F186F187F188F189F190F191F192F193F194F195EDGNEPARMEVAREPRGEWTIOESTPIOERDIOIOLNKSRLNO3SRLNO2SRLNO1SRLNO0CLRCH8CLRCH7CLRCH6CLRCH5CLRCH4CLRCH3CLRCH...

  • Page 2081

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205576543210F200F201F202F203F204F205F206F207EGBM8 EGBM7 EGBM6 EGBM5 EGBM4 EGBM3 EGBM2 EGBM1F208F209F210F211F212F213F214F215F216F217F218F219F220F221F222F223F224

  • Page 2082

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205676543210F225F226F227F228F229F230F231F232F233F234F235F236F237F238F239F240F241F242F243F244F245F246F247F248F249

  • Page 2083

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205776543210F250F251F252F253F254F255F256F257F258F259F260F261F262F263SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1SPWRN9F264F265F266F267F268F269F270F271F272F273F274ORARDTLMDLDT2DLDT1DSARDSDTDSSTDALMDMORA2D MORA1DPORA2DSLVSDRCFND RCHPDCFIN...

  • Page 2084

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205876543210F275F276UO023UO022UO021UO020UO019UO018UO017UO016UO031UO030UO029UO028UO027UO026UO025UO024F277F278F279UO207UO206UO205UO204UO203UO202UO201UO200UO215UO214UO213UO212UO211UO210UO209UO208F280F281F282UO223UO222UO221UO220UO219UO218UO217UO216UO2...

  • Page 2085

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC205976543210F300F301F302F303F304F305F306F307F308F309F310F311F312F313F314F315

  • Page 2086

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2060Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:G000–CNCPMCMTF000–X000–Y000–G1000–F1000–Path 1Path 2Signals addresses for each path are usually assigned as follows:Signal addressContentsG000–G512Signals on path...

  • Page 2087

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2061AddressBit numberSKIP5 #2-MIT2 #2SKIP4 #2+MIT2 #2XAE #2SKIP8 #2SKIP2 #2SKIP2 #2SKIP3 #1SKIP5 #1SKIP7 #1XAE #1YAE #1ZAE #1-MIT1 #1SKIP4 #1-MIT2 #1SKIP8 #1SKIP2 #1SKIP4 #1ESKIPSKIP6 #176543210X000X001X002X003*DEC7 #2*DEC4 #2 *DEC3 #2 *DEC2 #2 *D...

  • Page 2088

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2062AddressBit numberALNGH #1F1D #1BFIN #17G0006543210G001ESTB #1G002EA6 #1EA5 #1EA4 #1EA3 #1EA2 #1EA1 #1EA0 #1ED7 #1 ED6 #1 ED5 #1 ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1ED15 #1 ED14 #1 ED13 #1 ED12 #1 ED11 #1 ED10 #1ED9 #1ED8 #1AFL #1BFIN #1 TFIN #1 ...

  • Page 2089

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2063TL256 #1SPPHS #1SPPHS76543210G025*SSTP4 #1SWS4#1PC4SLC #1PC3SLC #1CON #1*SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1SWS3 #1EPNS#1EPN13#1 EPN12#1 EPN11#1 EPN10#1EPN9#1 EPN8#1*SSTP#1 SOR #1SAR #1GR31 #1GR21 #1SOV7 #1 SOV6 #1 SOV5 #1 SOV4 #1 SOV3 #1 SOV2 #1 SOV1 #...

  • Page 2090

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC206476543210G050UI007 #1 UI006 #1 UI005 #1 UI004 #1 UI003 #1 UI002 #1 UI001 #1 UI000 #1UI015 #1 UI014 #1 UI013 #1 UI012 #1 UI011 #1 UI010 #1 UI009 #1 UI008 #1CDZ #1SMZ #1UINT #1TMRON#1EXWT #1 EXSTP #1 EXRD #1 MINP#1*TSB #1RGTSP2#1 RGTSP1#1RGTAP#1T...

  • Page 2091

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC206576543210G075RCHB#1 RSLB #1SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1*ESPB#1 ARSTB#1SHA11#1 SHA10#1 SHA09#1 SHA08#1SHB07#1 SHB06#1 SHB05#1 SHB04#1 SHB03#1 SHB02#1 SHB01#1 SHB00#1SHA07#1 SHA06#1 SHA05#1 SHA04#1 SHA03#1 SHA02#1 SHA01#1 SHA00#1Reserved for order mad...

  • Page 2092

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2066PK7#176543210G100-J8 #1-J7 #1-J6 #1-J5 #1-J4 #1-J3 #1-J2 #1-J1 #1+J8#1+J7#1+J6#1+J5#1+J4 #1+J3 #1+J2 #1+J1 #1MLK8 #1 MLK7 #1 MLK6 #1 MLK5 #1 MLK4 #1 MLK3 #1 MLK2 #1 MLK1 #1MI8 #1MI7 #1MI6 #1MI5 #1MI4 #1MI3 #1MI2 #1MI1 #1*-L8 #1 *-L7 #1 *-L6 #1...

  • Page 2093

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC206776543210G124SVF7 #1SVF5 #1 SVF4 #1 SVF3 #1 SVF2 #1 SVF1 #1IUDD7#1IUDD5#1 IUDD4#1 IUDD3#1 IUDD2#1 IUDD1#1*IT7 #1*IT5 #1*IT4 #1*IT3 #1*IT2 #1*IT1 #1MIX7MIX5MIX4MIX3MIX2MIX1+MIT4 #1+MIT1 #1EAX7 #1EAX5 #1 EAX4 #1 EAX3 #1 EAX2 #1 EAX1 #1SYNC7#1SYNC...

  • Page 2094

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC206876543210G149*FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1DRNE#1 RTE #1OVCE#1ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1EBUFB#1ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 ELCKZB#1EFINB#1EMSBKB #1EC6B #1 EC5B #1 EC4B #1 EC3B #1 EC2B #1 EC1B #1 EC0B #1EIF15B#1 EIF14B...

  • Page 2095

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC206976543210G174EMSBKD #1EC6D #1 EC5D #1 EC4D #1 EC3D #1 EC2D #1 EC1D #1 EC0D #1EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 ELCKZD#1EFIND#1EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 E...

  • Page 2096

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC207076543210G199G200G201G202G203G204G205G206G207G208G209G210G211G212G213G214G215G216G217G218G219ORCMC#1SFRC#1 SRVC#1 CTH1C#1 CTH2C#1 TLMHC#1MRDYC#1TLMLC#1RSLC#1 INTGC#1 SOCNC#1 MCFNC#1SPSLC#1 *ESPC#1RCHC#1ARSTC#1MFNHGC#1INCMDC#1OVRC#1 DEFMDC#1NRRO...

  • Page 2097

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC207176543210G224G225G226G227G228G229G230G231G232G233G234G235G236G237G238G239G240G241G242G243G244G245G246G247G248

  • Page 2098

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC207276543210G249G250G251G252G253G254G255G256G257G258G259G260G261G262G263G264G265ORCMD#1SFRD#1 SRVD#1 CTH1D #1 CTH2D #1 TLMHD#1G266RCHD#1G267INTGD#1MCFND#1*ESPD#1G268SORSLD#1SLVD#1G269RCHHGD#1INCMDD#1DEFMDD#1ROTBD#1SHD06#1 SHD05#1 SHD04#1 SHD03#1 S...

  • Page 2099

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC207376543210G274G275G276G277G278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287G288G289G290G291ITCD#1G292G293G294UI222 #1 UI221 #1UI223 #1G295G296TDF8#1G297TDF6#1TDF4#1TDF2#1G298TDF7#1TDF5#1TDF3#1TDF1#1UI220 #1 UI219 #1 UI218 #1 UI217 #1 UI216 #1UI214 #1 UI2...

  • Page 2100

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC207476543210G299G300G301G302G303G304G305G306G307G308G309G310G311G312G313G314G315G316G317G318G319

  • Page 2101

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2075AddressBit numberRLSOT#2STLK#2EFIN#2BFIN#2BFIN#27G10006543210G1001ESTB#2G1002EA6#2EA5#2EA4#2EA3#2EA2#2EA1#2EA0#2G1003G1004MFIN3#2 MFIN2#2FIN#2G1005AFL#2TFIN#2SFIN#2MFIN#2G1006SKIPP#2OVC#2*ABSM#2SRN#2G1007ERS#2G1008RRW#2*SP#2*ESP#2 *BSL#2*CSL#2...

  • Page 2102

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2076TL256#2*BECLP #27EPNS#2G102565EPN13#24EPN12#23EPN11#22EPN10#21EPN9#20EPN8#2CON#2G1026*SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2SWS3#2 SWS2#2 SWS1#2PC2SLC#2G1027SPSTP#2*SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2GR2#2GR1#2G1028*SSTP#2 SOR#2SAR#2GR31#2GR21#2SOV7#2G1029SOV6#2 SOV5#2 SOV4#2...

  • Page 2103

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20777G1050654321*TLV9 #20*TLV8 #2G1051CDZ#2G1052SMZ#2UINT#2TMRON#2G1053UI007#2 UI006#2 UI005#2 UI004#2 UI003#2 UI002#2 UI001#2 UI000#2UI015#2G1054UI014#2 UI013#2 UI012#2 UI011#2 UI010#2 UI009#2 UI008#2G1055G1056G1057G1058TRRTN#2 TRESC#2*TSB#2G1059...

  • Page 2104

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20787RCHB#2G10756RSLB#254SOCNB#23MCFNB#22SPSLB#21*ESPB#20ARSTB#2G1076DSCNB#2 SORSLB#2SHA07#2G1077SHA06#2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA03#2 SHA02#2 SHA01#2 SHA00#2G1078SHA11#2 SHA10#2 SHA09#2 SHA08#2SHB07#2G1079SHB06#2 SHB05#2 SHB04#2 SHB03#2 SHB02#2 SHB01#2...

  • Page 2105

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20797G11006+J7#25+J6#24+J5#23+J4#22+J3#21+J2#20+J1#2G1101-J7#2-J6#2-J5#2-J4#2-J3#2-J2#2-J1#2G1102G1103G1104G1105MI7#2MI6#2MI5#2MI4#2MI3#2MI2#2MI1#2G1106G1107G1108G1109+LM7 #2G1110G1111G1112MLK7#2 MLK6#2 MLK5#2 MLK4#2 MLK3#2 MLK2#2 MLK1#2G1113G1114...

  • Page 2106

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20807IUDD8#2G11256IUDD7#25IUDD6#24IUDD5#23IUDD4#22IUDD3#21IUDD2#20IUDD1#2G1126G1127G1128G1129*IT7#2*IT6#2*IT5#2*IT4#2*IT3#2*IT2#2*IT1#2G1130G1131+MIT4 #2G1132SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2G1133G1134G1135EAX7#2 EAX6#2 EAX5#2 EAX4#...

  • Page 2107

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20817DRNE#2G11506RTE#25OVCE#24321ROV2E#20ROV1E#2G1151G1152G1153*FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2G1162G1163G1164G1165EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB #2ELCKZB#2EFINB#2EMSBKB#2G1154EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3...

  • Page 2108

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20827G11756543210G1176G1177G1186G1187G1188G1189G1190G1191IGVRY7#2 IGVRY6#2 IGVRY5#2 IGVRY4#2 IGVRY3#2 IGVRY2#2 IGVRY1#2G1192G1193G1194G1195G1196G1197G1198NPOS7#2 NPOS6#2 NPOS5#2 NPOS4#2 NPOS3#2 NPOS2#2 NPOS1#2EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD #2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD...

  • Page 2109

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20837G12006543210G1201G1202G1203JGRD3#2JGRD1#2G1208G1209G1210G1211G1212G1213G1214G1215G1216G1217G1218G1219G1199G1205G1206G1207ORCMC#2SFRC#2 SRVC#2 CTH1C#2 CTH2C#2 TLMHC#2MRDYC#2TLMLC#2RSLC#2 INTGC#2 SOCNC#2 MCFNC#2SPSLC#2 *ESPC#2RCHC#2ARSTC#2MFNHG...

  • Page 2110

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC208476543210G1224G1225G1226G1227G1228G1229G1230G1231G1232G1233G1234G1235G1236G1237G1238G1239G1240G1241G1242G1243G1244G1245G1246G1247G1248

  • Page 2111

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC208576543210G1249G1250G1251G1252G1253G1254G1255G1256G1257G1258G1259G1260G1261G1262G1263G1264G1265ORCMD#2SFRD#2 SRVD#2 CTH1D #2 CTH2D #2 TLMHD#2G1266RCHD#2G1267INTGD#2MCFND#2*ESPD#2G1268SORSLD#2SLVD#2G1269RCHHGD#2INCMDD#2DEFMDD#2ROTBD#2SHD06#2 SHD0...

  • Page 2112

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC208676543210G1274G1275G1288G1289G1290G1291ITCD#2G1292G1293G1294G1295G1296G1297G1298G276G277G278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287UI222 #2 UI221 #2UI223 #2UI220 #2 UI219 #2 UI218 #2 UI217 #2 UI216 #2UI214 #2 UI213 #2UI215 #2UI212 #2 UI211 #2 UI21...

  • Page 2113

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC208776543210G1299G1300G1301G1302G1303G1304G1305G1306G1307G1308G1309G1310G1311G1312G1313G1314G1315G1316G1317G1318G1319

  • Page 2114

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2088AddressBit numberBF#1EFD#1MBDT3 #1MBDT6 #1MBDT9 #17F0006543210F001MDRN#1F002CUT#1SRNMV#1THRD#1CSS#1 RPDO#1 INCH#1MTCHIN#1F003MEDT#1 MMEM#1MRMT#1 MMDI#1MJ#1MH#1MINC#1F004MREF#1 MAFL#1 MSBK#1 MABSM#1MMLK#1 MBDT1 #1F005MBDT8 #1 MBDT7 #1MBDT5 #1 M...

  • Page 2115

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2089ENB3#17S31#1F0256S30#15S29#14S28#13S27#12S26#11S25#10S24#1SRSRDY #1SRSP1R #1SRSP2R #1SRSP3R #1SRSP4R #1GR3O#1 GR2O#1 GR1O#1F034SPAL#1F035R08O#1 R07O#1 R06O#1 R05O#1 R04O#1 R03O#1 R02O#1 R01O#1F036R12O#1 R11O#1 R10O#1 R09O#1F037ENB2#1 SUCLP#1SC...

  • Page 2116

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2090PSYN#17F0506543RCFNB#12RCHPB#11CFINB#10CHPB#1UO131#1 UO130#1 UO129#1 UO128#1 UO127#1 UO126#1 UO125#1 UO124#1F059ESCAN#1 ESEND#1 EREND#1F060BCLP#1 BUCLP#1PRTSF#1F061S2MES#1F062WATO#1PSAR#1 PSE2#1 PSE1#1F063F064RGSPM#1RGSPP#1F065RTPT#1 G08MD#1F0...

  • Page 2117

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20917SPO#1F0756KEYO#15DRNO#14MLKO#13SBKO#12BDTO#110F084F085F086F087F088F089F090F091TRSPS#1TRACT#1SVWRN4#1F092SVWRN3#1 SVWRN2#1SVWRN1#1LIFOVR#1F093ZP7#1ZP6#1ZP5#1ZP4#1ZP3#1ZP2#1ZP1#1F094F095ZP27#1 ZP26#1 ZP25#1 ZP24#1 ZP23#1 ZP22#1 ZP21#1F096F097ZP...

  • Page 2118

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2092TRQL7#17F1006ZP47#154ZP45#13ZP44#12ZP43#11ZP42#10ZP41#1F109MDTCH7 #1MDTCH5 #1 MDTCH4 #1 MDTCH3 #1 MDTCH2 #1 MDTCH1 #1F110F111EADEN7#1EADEN5#1 EADEN4#1 EADEN3#1 EADEN2#1 EADEN1#1F112F113F114F115FRP7#1FRP5#1 FRP4#1 FRP3#1 FRP2#1 FRP1#1F116F117SY...

  • Page 2119

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20937F1256543210EABUFB #1EMFB#1F134F144F146F147F149-OT8#1F126F127*EAXSL#1F128EOV0#1F129EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1EIALA#1 ECKZA#1EINPA#1F130EM28A#1F131EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A#1 EM12A#1 EM11A#1EBSYB#1F132EOTNB#1 EOTPB#1 EG...

  • Page 2120

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20947F1506543210F159F160F161F162F163F164F165F166F167F168F169F170F171F172F173F174F152F153F154F155F156F157F158EM48D#1 EM44D#1 EM42D#1 EM41D#1 EM38D#1 EM34D#1 EM32D#1 EM31D#1F151ORARC#1TLMC#1 LDT2C#1 LDT1C#1SARC#1 SDTC#1 SSTC#1 ALMC#1MORA2C#1MORA1C#1...

  • Page 2121

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20957F1756543210F184F185F186F187F188F189F190F191F192F193F194F195F176F177F178F179F180F181EACNT7#1 EACNT6#1 EACNT5#1 EACNT4#1 EACNT3#1 EACNT2#1 EACNT1#1F182F183EDGN#1 EPARM#1EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1IOLNK#1SRLNO3#1CLRCH8#1SRLNO0#1SRLNO1...

  • Page 2122

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20967F2006543210F209F210F211F212F213F214F215F216F217F218F219F220F201F202F203F204F205F206F207F208F221F222F223F224

  • Page 2123

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20977F2256543210F234F235F236F237F238F239F240F241F242F243F244F245F226F227F228F229F230F231F232F233F246F247F248F249

  • Page 2124

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20987F2506543210F259F260F261F262F263F264F265F266F267F268F269F270F251F252F253F254F255F256F257F258F271F272F273F274ORARD#1TLMD#1 LDT2D#1 LDT1D#1SARD#1 SDTD#1 SSTD#1 ALMD#1MORA2D#1MORA1D#1PORA2D#1SLVSD#1 RCFND#1 RCHPD#1CFIND#1CHPD#1EXOFD#1 SOREND#1MSO...

  • Page 2125

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC20997F2756543210F284F285F286F287F288F289F290F291F292F293F294F295F276F277F278F279F280F281F282F283F296F297F298F299TDF9#1 TDF7#1 TDF6#1 TDF5#1 TDF4#1 TDF3#1 TDF2#1 TDF1#1UO023#1 UO022#1 UO021#1 UO020#1 UO019#1 UO018#1 UO017#1 UO016#1UO031#1 UO030#1 U...

  • Page 2126

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21007F3006543210F309F310F311F312F313F314F315F301F302F303F304F305F306F307F308

  • Page 2127

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2101AddressBit numberBF#2EFD#2MBDT3 #2MBDT6 #2MBDT9 #27F10006543210F1001MDRN#2F1002CUT#2SRNMV#2THRD#2CSS#2 RPDO#2 INCH#2MTCHIN#2F1003MEDT#2 MMEM#2MRMT#2 MMDI#2MJ#2MH#2MINC#2F1004MREF#2 MAFL#2 MSBK#2 MABSM#1MMLK#2 MBDT1 #2F1005MBDT8 #2 MBDT7 #2MBDT...

  • Page 2128

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2102GR3O#27S31#2F10256S30#25S29#24S28#23S27#22S26#21S25#20S24#2SRSRDY #2SRSP1R #2SRSP2R #2SRSP3R #2SRSP4R #2GR2O#2 GR1O#2F1034SPAL#2F1035R08O#2 R07O#2 R06O#2 R05O#2 R04O#2 R03O#2 R02O#2 R01O#2F1036R12O#2 R11O#2 R10O#2 R09O#2F1037ENB3#2 ENB2#2 SUCL...

  • Page 2129

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2103PECK2#2TLCHI#27F10506543RCFNB#22RCHPB#21CFINB#20CHPB#2UO131#2 UO130#2 UO129#2 UO128#2 UO127#2 UO126#2 UO125#2 UO124#2F1059ESCAN#2 ESEND#2 EREND#2F1060BCLP#2 BUCLP#2PRTSF#2F1061S2MES#2 S1MES#2F1062PSYN#2 WATO#2PSAR#2 PSE2#2 PSE1#2F1063F1064RGSP...

  • Page 2130

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21047SPO#2F10756KEYO#25DRNO#24MLKO#23SBKO#22BDTO#210F1084F1085F1086F1087F1088F1089F1090F1091TRSPS#2TRACT#2F1092F1093ZP7#2ZP6#2ZP5#2ZP4#2ZP3#2ZP2#2ZP1#2F1094F1095ZP27#2 ZP26#2 ZP25#2 ZP24#2 ZP23#2 ZP22#2 ZP21#2F1096F1097ZP37#2 ZP36#2 ZP35#2 ZP34#2 ...

  • Page 2131

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21057F11006ZP47#254ZP45#23ZP44#22ZP43#21ZP42#20ZP41#2F1109MDTCH7 #2MDTCH5 #2 MDTCH4 #2 MDTCH3 #2 MDTCH2 #2 MDTCH1 #2F1110F1111EADEN7#2EADEN5#2 EADEN4#2 EADEN3#2 EADEN2#2 EADEN1#2F1112F1113F1114F1115FRP7#2FRP5#2 FRP4#2 FRP3#2 FRP2#2 FRP1#2F1116F111...

  • Page 2132

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21067F11256543210EABUFB #2EMFB#2F1134F1144F1146F1147F1149-OT8#2F1126F1127*EAXSL#2F1128EOV0#2F1129EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTP#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2EIALA#2 ECKZA#2EINPA#2F1130EM28A#2F1131EM24A#2 EM22A#2 EM21A#2 EM18A#2 EM14A#2 EM12A#2 EM11A#2EBSYB#2F1132EOTNB#...

  • Page 2133

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21077F11506543210F1159F1160F1161F1162F1163F1164F1165F1166F1167F1168F1169F1170F1171F1172F1173F1174F1152F1153F1154F1155F1156F1157F1158EM48D#2 EM44D#2 EM42D#2 EM41D#2 EM38D#2 EM34D#2 EM32D#2 EM31D#2F1151ORARC#2TLMC#2 LDT2C#2 LDT1C#2SARC#2 SDTC#2 SSTC...

  • Page 2134

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21087F11756543210F1184F1185F1186F1187F1188F1189F1190F1191F1192F1193F1194F1176F1177F1178F1179F1180F1181EACNT7#2 EACNT6#2 EACNT5#2 EACNT4#2 EACNT3#2 EACNT2#2 EACNT1#2F1182F1183EDGN#2 EPARM#2EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2IOLNK#2SRLNO3#2CLRCH8...

  • Page 2135

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21097F12006543210F1209F1210F1211F1212F1213F1214F1215F1216F1217F1218F1219F1201F1202F1203F1204F1205F1206F1207F1208F1220F1221F1222F1223F1224

  • Page 2136

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21107F12256543210F1234F1235F1236F1237F1238F1239F1240F1241F1242F1243F1244F1226F1227F1228F1229F1230F1231F1232F1233F1245F1246F1247F1248F1249

  • Page 2137

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21117F12506543210F1259F1260F1261F1262F1263F1264F1265F1266F1267F1268F1269F1251F1252F1253F1254F1255F1256F1257F1258F1270F1271F1272F1273F1274ORARD#2TLMD#2 LDT2D#2 LDT1D#2SARD#2 SDTD#2 SSTD#2 ALMD#2MORA2D#2MORA1D#2PORA2D#2SLVSD#2 RCFND#2 RCHPD#2CFIND#2...

  • Page 2138

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21127F12756543210F1284F1285F1286F1287F1288F1289F1290F1291F1292F1293F1294F1276F1277F1278F1279F1280F1281F1282F1283F1295F1296F1297F1298F1299TDF8#2 TDF7#2 TDF6#2 TDF5#2 TDF4#2 TDF3#2 TDF2#2 TDF1#2UO023#2 UO022#2 UO021#2 UO020#2 UO019#2 UO018#2 UO017#2...

  • Page 2139

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC21137F13006543210F1309F1310F1311F1312F1313F1314F1315F1301F1302F1303F1304F1305F1306F1307F1308

  • Page 2140

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2114The figure below illustrates the addresses of interface signals between theCNC and PMC.G000 ∼CNCPMCMTF000 ∼X000 ∼Y000 ∼Following shows table of addresses:In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signalsare covere...

  • Page 2141

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2115AddressBit number7X0006543210X001X002ESKIPX003-MIT2+MIT2-MIT1+MIT1ZAEXAESKIPSKIP6SKIP5SKIP4SKIP3SKIP2SKIP8SKIP7SKIP(T series)(M series)X004X005X006X007*ESPX008*DEC4*DEC3*DEC2*DEC1X009X010X011X012ZAEXAEYAEESKIP*DEC5MT → PMC

  • Page 2142

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2116AddressBit number7G0006543210G001ESTBG002EA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA0G003G004MFIN3MFIN2FINBFING005AFLBFINTFINSFINEFINMFING006SKIPPOVC*ABSMSRNG007ERSG008RRW*SP*ESP*BSL*CSL*ITG009PN16PN8PN4PN2PN1G010ED7ED6ED5ED4ED3ED2ED1ED0ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9ED...

  • Page 2143

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC211776543210G025G026CONG027*SSTP3*SSTP2*SSTP1SWS3SWS2SWS1PC2SLCG028SPSTP*SCPF*SUCPFGR2GR1G029*SSTPSORSARGR31GR21SOV7G030SOV6SOV5SOV4SOV3SOV2SOV1SOV0PKESS2G031PKESS1R08IG032R07IR06IR05IR04IR03IR02IR01ISINDG033SSINSGNR12IR11IR10IR09IR08I2G034R07I2R0...

  • Page 2144

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC211876543210G050*TLV9*TLV8G051RMTDI7G052RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0CDZG053SMZUINTTMRONUI007G054UI006UI005UI004UI003UI002UI001UI000UI015G055UI014UI013UI012UI011UI010UI009UI008UI023G056UI022UI021UI020UI019UI018UI017UI016UI031G05...

  • Page 2145

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC211976543210RCHBG075RSLBINTGBSOCNBMCFNBSPSLB*ESPBARSTBRCHHGBG076MFNHGBINCMDBOVRBDEFMDBNRROBROTABINDXBG077DSCNBSORSLBMPOFBSLVBMORCMBSHA07G078SHA06SHA05SHA04SHA03SHA02SHA01SHA00G079SHA11SHA10SHA09SHA08SHB07G080SHB06SHB05SHB04SHB03SHB02SHB01SHB00G081...

  • Page 2146

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2120–LM176543210G100+J5+J4+J3+J2+J1G101G102–J5–J4–J3–J2–J1G103G104G105G106MI5MI4MI3MI2MI1G107G108MLK5MLK4MLK3MLK2MLK1G109G110+LM5+LM4+LM3+LM2+LM1G111G112–LM5–LM4–LM3–LM2G113G114*+L5*+L4*+L3*+L2*+L1G115G116*–L5*–L4*–L3*–...

  • Page 2147

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212176543210G124IUDD5IUDD4IUDD3IUDD2IUDD1G125SVF5SVF4SVF3SVF2SVF1G126G127G128G129*IT5*IT4*IT3*IT2*IT1G130G131+MIT5+MIT4+MIT3+MIT2+MIT1G132G133–MIT5–MIT4–MIT3–MIT2–MIT1G134G135EAX5EAX4EAX3EAX2EAX1G136G137SYNC5SYNC4SYNC3SYNC2SYNC1G138G139S...

  • Page 2148

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212276543210DRNEG149RTEOVCEROV2EROV1E*FV7EG150*FV6E*FV5E*FV4E*FV3E*FV2E*FV1E*FV0EG151G152EBUFBG153ECLRBESTPBESOFBESBKB EMBUFBELCKZBEFINBEMSBKBG154EC6BEC5BEC4BEC3BEC2BEC1BEC0BEIF7BG155EIF6BEIF5BEIF4BEIF3BEIF2BEIF1BEIF0BEIF15BG156EIF14BEIF13BEIF12BE...

  • Page 2149

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212376543210G174G175G176EBUFDG177ECLRDESTPDESOFDESBKD EMBUFDELCKZDEFINDEMSBKDG178EC6DEC5DEC4DEC3DEC2DEC1DEC0DEIF7DG179EIF6DEIF5DEIF4DEIF3DEIF2DEIF1DEIF0DEIF15DG180EIF14DEIF13DEIF12DEIF11DEIF10DEIF9DEIF8DEID7DG181EID6DEID5DEID4DEID3DEID2DEID1DEID0D...

  • Page 2150

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212476543210G199G200EASIP5EASIP4EASIP3EASIP2EASIP1G201JGRD3JGRD2JGRD1G202G203G204G205G206G207G208G209G210G211G212G213G214G215G216G217G218G219G220G221G222G223

  • Page 2151

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212576543210G224G225G226G227G228G229G230G231G232G233G234G235G236G237G238G239G240G241G242G243G244G245G246G247G248

  • Page 2152

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212676543210G249G250G251G252G253G254G255G256G257G258G259G260G261G262G263G264G265G266G267G268G269G270G271G272G273

  • Page 2153

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212776543210G274G275G276G277G278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287G288G289G290G291G292G293G294G295G296G297G298UI107UI106UI105UI104UI103UI102UI101UI100UI115UI114UI113UI112UI111UI110UI109UI108UI123UI122UI121UI120UI119UI118UI117UI116UI131UI130UI129...

  • Page 2154

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC212876543210G299G300G301G302G303G304G305G306G307G308G309G310G311

  • Page 2155

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2129AddressBit number7F0006543210F001MDRNF002CUTSRNMVTHRDCSSRPDOINCHMTCHINF003MEDTMMEMMRMTMMDIMJMHMINCOPSASTLSPLRWDMATAPENBDENBALRSTALF004MBDT9F005MBDT8MBDT7MBDT6MBDT5MBDT4MBDT3MBDT2F006MREFMAFLMSBKMABSMMMLKMBDT1F007F008MF3MF2EFDM00F009DM01DM02DM3...

  • Page 2156

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213076543210F025T07T06T05T04T03T02T01T00T15T14T13T12T11T10T09T08S31S30S29S28S27S26S25S24T31T30T29T28T27T26T25T24B07B06B05B04B03B02B01B00T23T22T21T20T19T18T17T16B23B22B21B20B19B18B17B16B31B30B29B28B27B26B25B24B15B14B13B12B11B10B09B08SPALR08OR07OR06...

  • Page 2157

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213176543210F050EXOFBSORENBMSOVRBINCSTBPC1DTBMORA2BMORA1BPORA2BSLVSBRCFNBRCHPBCFINBCHPBUO007UO006UO005UO004UO003UO002UO001UO000UO015UO014UO013UO012UO011UO010UO009UO008EKENBBGEACTRPALMRPBSY PRGDPLINHKYUO115UO114UO113UO112UO111UO110UO109UO108UO123UO...

  • Page 2158

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213276543210F075ROV2OROV1ORTAPMP2OMP1ORTOHS1DOHS1COHS1BOHS1AOSPOKEYODRNOMLKOSBKOBDTO*JV7O*JV6O*JV5O*JV4O*JV3O*JV2O*JV1O*JV0O*JV15O*JV14O*JV13O*JV12O*JV11O*JV10O*JV9O*JV8O*FV7O*FV6O*FV5O*FV4O*FV3O*FV2O*FV1O*FV0O– J4O+ J4O– J3O+ J3O– J2O+ J2O...

  • Page 2159

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213376543210F100MV5MV4MV3MV2MV1ZP45ZP44ZP43ZP42ZP41INP5INP4INP3INP2INP1MMI5MMI4MMI3MMI2MMI1MVD5MVD4MVD3MVD2MVD1MDTCH5MDTCH4MDTCH3MDTCH2MDTCH1EADEN5EADEN4EADEN3EADEN2EADEN1TRQL5TRQL4TRQL3TRQL2TRQL1HDO0ZRF5ZRF4ZRF3ZRF2ZRF1+OT5+OT4+OT3+OT2+OT1F101F10...

  • Page 2160

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213476543210F125*EAXSLEOV0EBSYAEOTNAEOTPAEGENAEDENAEIALAECKZAEINPAEM28AEM24AEM22AEM21AEM18AEM14AEM12AEM11AEBSYBEOTNBEOTPBEGENBEDENBEIALBECKZBEINPBEABUFAEMFAEM28BEM24BEM22BEM21BEM18BEM14BEM12BEM11BEBSYCEOTNCEOTPCEGENCEDENCEIALCECKZCEINPCEABUFBEMFBE...

  • Page 2161

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213576543210F150EM48DEM44DEM42DEM41DEM38DEM34DEM32DEM31DF151F152F153F154F155F156F157F158F159F160F161F162F163F164F165F166F167F168F169F170F171F172F173F174PBATLPBATZ

  • Page 2162

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213676543210F175EACNT5EACNT4EACNT3EACNT2EACNT1F176F177F178F179F180F181F182F183F184F185F186F187F188F189F190F191F192F193F194F195EDGNEPARMEVAREPRGEWTIOESTPIOERDIOIOLNKSRLNO3SRLNO2SRLNO1SRLNO0CLRCH5CLRCH4CLRCH3CLRCH2CLRCH1F196F197F198F199

  • Page 2163

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213776543210F200F201F202F203F204F205F206F207F208F209F210F211F212F213F214F215F216F217F218F219F220F221F222F223F224

  • Page 2164

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213876543210F225F226F227F228F229F230F231F232F233F234F235F236F237F238F239F240F241F242F243F244F245F246F247F248F249

  • Page 2165

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC213976543210F250F251F252F253F254F255F256F257F258F259F260F261F262F263F264F265F266F267F268F269F270F271F272F273F274SPWRN8SPWRN7SPWRN6SPWRN5SPWRN4SPWRN3SPWRN2SPWRN1SPWRN9

  • Page 2166

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC214076543210F275F276F277F278F279F280F281F282F283F284F285F286F287F288F289F290F291F292F293F294F295F296F297F298F299UO023UO022UO021UO020UO019UO018UO017UO016UO031UO030UO029UO028UO027UO026UO025UO024UO207UO206UO205UO204UO203UO202UO201UO200UO215UO214UO213...

  • Page 2167

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC214176543210F300F301F302F303F304F305F306F307F308F309F310F311F312F313F314F315

  • Page 2168

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2142The following dialog shows the relationships between the addresses forthe interface signals between the CNC and PMC.G000 ∼CNCPMCMTF000 ∼X000 ∼Y000 ∼If a signal in an item common to both T and F series is disabled for eithermodel, its n...

  • Page 2169

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2143AddressBit numberHS3DSTLK7G0006543210G001ESTBG002EA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1EA0G003G004MFIN3MFIN2FING005AFLTFINSFINEFINMFING006SKIPPOVC*ABSMSRNG007ERSG008RRW*SP*ESP*ITG009PN16PN8PN4PN2PN1G010ED7ED6ED5ED4ED3ED2ED1ED0ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9ED8RLSOTEX...

  • Page 2170

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2144HS3IB76543210G025G026G027G028GR2GR1G029*SSTPSORSARSOV7G030SOV6SOV5SOV4SOV3SOV2SOV1SOV0G031R08IG032R07IR06IR05IR04IR03IR02IR01ISINDG033SSINSGNR12IR11IR10IR09IG034G035G036G037G038G039G040PRCHS2IDG041HS2ICHS2IBHS2IAHS1IDHS1ICHS1IBHS1IAG042HS3IDHS...

  • Page 2171

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2145RGTAP76543210G050*CHLDG051CHPST*CHP8*CHP4*CHP2*CHP0RMTDI7G052RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0CDZG053SMZUINTTMRONUI007G054UI006UI005UI004UI003UI002UI001UI000UI015G055UI014UI013UI012UI011UI010UI009UI008UI023G056UI022UI021UI020UI0...

  • Page 2172

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC214676543210G075G076G077SHA07G078SHA06SHA05SHA04SHA03SHA02SHA01SHA00G079SHA11SHA10SHA09SHA08G080G081G082G083G084G085G086G087G088G089G090G091G092G093G094G095HROVG096*HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0G097EKC7G098EKC6EKC5EKC4EKC3EKC2EKC...

  • Page 2173

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2147–LM176543210G100+J4+J3+J2+J1G101G102–J4–J3–J2–J1G103G104G105G106MI4MI3MI2MI1G107G108MLK4MLK3MLK2MLK1G109G110+LM4+LM3+LM2+LM1G111G112–LM4–LM3–LM2G113G114*+L4*+L3*+L2*+L1G115G116*–L4*–L3*–L2*–L1G117G118G119G120G121G122G123

  • Page 2174

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2148EMBUFAEC1AESOFA+MIT4SVF4+MIT276543210G124IUDD4IUDD3IUDD2IUDD1G125SVF3SVF2SVF1G126G127G128G129*IT4*IT3*IT2*IT1G130G131+MIT3+MIT1G132G133–MIT4–MIT3–MIT2–MIT1G134G135EAX4EAX3EAX2EAX1G136G137G138G139G140EBUFAG141ECLRAESTPAESBKAELCKZAEFINAE...

  • Page 2175

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC214976543210DRNEG149RTEOVCEROV2EROV1E*FV7EG150*FV6E*FV5E*FV4E*FV3E*FV2E*FV1E*FV0EG151G152EBUFBG153ECLRBESTPBESOFBESBKB EMBUFBELCKZBEFINBEMSBKBG154EC6BEC5BEC4BEC3BEC2BEC1BEC0BEIF7BG155EIF6BEIF5BEIF4BEIF3BEIF2BEIF1BEIF0BEIF15BG156EIF14BEIF13BEIF12BE...

  • Page 2176

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2150IGVRY376543210G174G175G176EBUFDG177ECLRDESTPDESOFDESBKD EMBUFDELCKZDEFINDEMSBKDG178EC6DEC5DEC4DEC3DEC2DEC1DEC0DEIF7DG179EIF6DEIF5DEIF4DEIF3DEIF2DEIF1DEIF0DEIF15DG180EIF14DEIF13DEIF12DEIF11DEIF10DEIF9DEIF8DEID7DG181EID6DEID5DEID4DEID3DEID2DEID1...

  • Page 2177

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC215176543210G199IOLBH3IOLBH2G200G201JGRD3JGRD2JGRD1G202G203G204G205G206G207G208G209G276G277G278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287UI107UI106UI105UI104UI103UI102UI101UI100UI115UI114UI113UI112UI111UI110UI109UI108UI123UI122UI121UI120UI119UI118UI117U...

  • Page 2178

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2152AddressBit numberEF7F0006543210F001MDRNF002CUTSRNMVTHRDCSSRPDOINCHMTCHINF003MEDTMMEMMRMTMMDIMJMHOPSASTLSPLRWDMATAPENBDENBALRSTALF004F005F006MREFMAFLMSBKMABSMMMLKMBDT1F007F008MF3MF2DM00F009DM01DM02DM30TFSFEFDMFF010M15F011M14M13M12M11M10M09M08M2...

  • Page 2179

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC215376543210F025T07T06T05T04T03T02T01T00T15T14T13T12T11T10T09T08S31S30S29S28S27S26S25S24T31T30T29T28T27T26T25T24T23T22T21T20T19T18T17T16R08OR07OR06OR05OR04OR03OR02OR01OSRSRDY SRSP1RGR3OGR2OGR1OR12OR11OR10OR09OCHPCYL CHPMDMORA2AMORA1APORA2ASLVSARCF...

  • Page 2180

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2154RGSPM76543210F050UO007UO006UO005UO004UO003UO002UO001UO000UO015UO014UO013UO012UO011UO010UO009UO008EKENBBGEACTRPALMRPBSY PRGDPLINHKYUO115UO114UO113UO112UO111UO110UO109UO108UO123UO122UO121UO120UO119UO118UO117UO116UO107UO106UO105UO104UO103UO102UO1...

  • Page 2181

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC215576543210F075ROV2OROV1ORTAPMP2OMP1ORTOHS1DOHS1COHS1BOHS1AOSPOKEYODRNOMLKOSBKOBDTO*JV7O*JV6O*JV5O*JV4O*JV3O*JV2O*JV1O*JV0O*JV15O*JV14O*JV13O*JV12O*JV11O*JV10O*JV9O*JV8O*FV7O*FV6O*FV5O*FV4O*FV3O*FV2O*FV1O*FV0O– J4O+ J4O– J3O+ J3O– J2O+ J2O...

  • Page 2182

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2156EADEN4ZRF4MMI376543210F100MV4MV3MV2MV1INP4INP3INP2INP1MMI4MMI2MMI1MVD4MVD3MVD2MVD1MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1EADEN3EADEN2EADEN1TRQL2TRQL1HDO0ZRF3ZRF2ZRF1F101F102F103F104F105F106F107F108F109F110F111F112F113F114F115F116F117F118F119F120F121F122F1...

  • Page 2183

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2157EOV0*EAXSL76543210F125EBSYAEOTNAEOTPAEGENAEDENAEIALAECKZAEINPAEM28AEM24AEM22AEM21AEM18AEM14AEM12AEM11AEBSYBEOTNBEOTPBEGENBEDENBEIALBECKZBEINPBEABUFAEMFAEM28BEM24BEM22BEM21BEM18BEM14BEM12BEM11BEBSYCEOTNCEOTPCEGENCEDENCEIALCECKZCEINPCEABUFBEMFBE...

  • Page 2184

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC215876543210F150EM48DEM44DEM42DEM41DEM38DEM34DEM32DEM31DF151F152F153F154F155F156F157F158F159F160F161F162F163F164F165F166F167F168F169F170F171F172F173F174PBATLPBATZ

  • Page 2185

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC215976543210F175EACNT4EACNT3EACNT2EACNT1F176F177F178F179F180F181F182F183F184F185F186F187F188F189F190F191F192F193F194F195EDGNEPARMEVAREPRGEWTIOESTPIOERDIOIOLNKSRLNO3SRLNO2SRLNO1SRLNO0F264SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1LL

  • Page 2186

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC216076543210F265SPWRN9F298TDF4TDF3TDF2TDF1LLF276UO023UO022UO021UO020UO019UO018UO017UO016UO031UO030UO029UO028UO027UO026UO025UO024F277F278F279UO207UO206UO205UO204UO203UO202UO201UO200UO215UO214UO213UO212UO211UO210UO209UO208F280F281F282UO223UO222UO221...

  • Page 2187

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2161f:AvailableF:Available only with2–path control–:UnavailableFunctionSignal nameSymbolAddressTseriesMseriesSectionData input/outputPower Mate background operationsignalBGENG092#4ff13.8Data input/outputPower Mate read/write alarm signalBGIALM...

  • Page 2188

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2162FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameαi spindle warninginterfaceSpindle warning detailed signalsSPWRN1 to 9F264#0 to #7,F265#0ff18.4Alarm signalAlarm signalALF001#0ff2.4Alarm signalBattery alarm signalBALF001#2ff2.4Abnormal l...

  • Page 2189

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2163FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameExternal key inputExternal key input mode selectionsignalENBKYG066#1ff15.5External key inputKey code signalsEKC0 to EKC7G098ff15.5External key inputKey code read signalEKSETG066#7ff15.5Exter...

  • Page 2190

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2164FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameScreenerase/automaticscreen eraseAutomatic screen erase disable signal*CRTOFG062#1ff12.1.19Hobbing machinefunction (M series)Retract signalRTRCTG066#4ff1.131.14.11.14.21.14.41.16(M series)Si...

  • Page 2191

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2165FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameAutomatic tool lengthMeasuring position reached signalsXAEX004#0ff14.2Automatic tool lengthmeasurement (Mseries)/automaticMeasuring position reached signalsYAEX004#1—f14.2measurement (Mser...

  • Page 2192

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2166FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameCycle start/feed holdCycle start signalSTG007#2ff5.1Cycle start/feed holdFeed hold signal*SPG008#5ff5.1Cycle start/feed holdAutomatic operation signalOPF000#7ff5.1Cycle start lamp signalSTLF...

  • Page 2193

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2167FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialTorque limit command LOW signalsTLMLAG070#0ff9.2Spindle serialTorque limit command LOW signals(serial spindle)TLMLBG074#0ff9.2Spindle serialTorque limit command LOW signals(ser...

  • Page 2194

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2168FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialSpindle selection signals SPSLAG071#2ff9.2Spindle serialSpindle selection signals (serial spindle)SPSLBG075#2ff9.2Spindle serialSpindle selection signals (serial spindle)SPSLCG...

  • Page 2195

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2169FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialDifferential speed mode commandDEFMDAG072#3ff9.2Spindle serialDifferential speed mode commandsignals (serial spindle)DEFMDBG076#3ff9.2Spindle serialDifferential speed mode comm...

  • Page 2196

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2170FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialAlarm signals (serial spindle)ALMAF045#0ff9.2Spindle serialAlarm signals (serial spindle)ALMBF049#0ff9.2Spindle serialAlarm signals (serial spindle)ALMCF168#0ff9.2Spindle seria...

  • Page 2197

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2171FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialSpindle switch completion signalsCFINAF046#1ff9.2Spindle serialSpindle switch completion signals(serial spindle)CFINBF050#1ff9.2Spindle serialSpindle switch completion signals(...

  • Page 2198

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2172FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSpindle serialMotor activation off status signalEXOFAF047#4ff9.2Spindle serialoutput/spindle Motor activation off status signalEXOFBF051#4ff9.29.15output/spindle analog outputMotor activatio...

  • Page 2199

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2173FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameManual HandleCheck mode handle valid signalMCHKG067#3f—5.3.4Manual HandleCheck mode signalMMODG067#2f—5.3.4Manual HandleRetraceCheck mode backward movementinhibition signalMRVMG067#1f—...

  • Page 2200

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2174FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameStart lock/interlockStart lock signalSTLKG007#1f—2.5Start lock/interlockInterlock signal*ITG008#0ff2.5Start lock/interlockInterlock signal for each axis*IT1 to *IT8G130ff2.5Start lock/inte...

  • Page 2201

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2175FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameSoftware operator’sSoftware operator’s panel signal(HS1A)HS1AOF077#0ff12.1.15Software operator’sSoftware operator’s panel signal(HS1B)HS1BOF077#1ff12.1.15Software operator’sSoftwar...

  • Page 2202

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2176FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameCanned cycle (Mseries)/multiplerepetitive turningcanned cycle (T series)Chamfering signalCDZG053#7f—11.9Chuck/tailstockbarrier (T series)Tailstock barrier selection signal*TSBG060#7f—2.3...

  • Page 2203

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2177FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameTool postinterference check(T series, two–pathTool post interference check signalTICHKF064#6F—2.3.5interference check(T series, two–pathcontrol)Tool post interference alarm signalTIALM...

  • Page 2204

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2178FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal namePMC axisAxis control temporary stop signalsESTPAG142#5ff15.1PMC axisAxis control temporary stop signals(PMC axis control)ESTPBG154#5ff15.1PMC axisAxis control temporary stop signals(PMC axis...

  • Page 2205

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2179FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal namePMC axisIn–position signals (PMC axis control)EINPAF130#0ff15.1PMC axisIn–position signals (PMC axis control)EINPBF133#0ff15.1PMC axisIn–position signals (PMC axis control)EINPCF136#0f...

  • Page 2206

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2180FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal namePMC axisDistribution completion signals (PMCaxis control)EADEN1 to EADEN8F112ff15.1PMC axisBuffer full signals (PMC axis control)EABUFAF131#1ff15.1PMC axiscontrol/PMC axisspeed controlBuffer...

  • Page 2207

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2181FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameFlexiblesynchronizationFlexible synchronization control modeselect signalsMTA to MTDG197#0 to #3—f1.15FlexiblesynchronizationcontrolFlexible synchronization control modeselect signal switc...

  • Page 2208

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2182FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameManual absoluteon/offManual absolute signal*ABSMG006#2ff5.4Manual absoluteon/offManual absolute check signalMABSMF004#2ff5.4Multi–spindle controlSpindle selection signalsSWS1G027#0ff9.10Mu...

  • Page 2209

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2183FunctionSectionMseriesTseriesAddressSymbolSignal nameRetraction for rigidRigid tapping retraction start signalRTNTG062#6—f5.13Retraction for rigidtappingRigid tapping retraction completionsignalRTPTF066#1—f5.13High–precisioncontour contr...

  • Page 2210

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2184f:AvailableF:Available only with2–path control–:UnavailableGroupSymbol Signal nameAddressTseriesM seriesReference item**+ED1 to *+ED8External deceleration signalG118ff7.1.9**+L1 to *+L8Overtravel signalG114ff2.3.1**-ED1 to *-ED8External de...

  • Page 2211

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2185GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbol**SSTPSpindle stop signalG029#6ff9.3**SSTP1Individual spindle stop signalsG027#3ff9.10**SSTP2Individual spindle stop signalsG027#4ff9.10**SSTP3Individual spindle stop signalsG027#5ff9....

  • Page 2212

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2186GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolAALMAAlarm signal (serial spindle)F045#0ff9.2, 9.15AALMBAlarm signal (serial spindle)F049#0ff9.2, 9.15AALMCAlarm signal (serial spindle)F168#0ff9.2, 9.15AALMDF266#1ffAALNGHTool axis di...

  • Page 2213

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2187GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolCCONCs contour control change signalG027#7ff9.9CCOSPSpindle command signalF064#5F–9.4CCSFI1Cs–axis coordinate establishment request signalG274#4ff9.9.2CCSFO1Cs–axis coordinate es...

  • Page 2214

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2188GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolEEAX1 to EAX8Control axis select signal (PMC axis control)G136ff15.1EEASIP1 to EASIP8Axis control superimposed command signalG200ff15.1EEBSYAAxis control command read completion signal...

  • Page 2215

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2189GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolEEGENAAxis moving signal (PMC axis control)F130#4ff15.1EEGENBAxis moving signal (PMC axis control)F133#4ff15.1EEGENCAxis moving signal (PMC axis control)F136#4ff15.1EEGENDF139#4ff15.1E...

  • Page 2216

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2190GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolEEMSBKABlock stop disable signalG143#7ff15.1EEMSBKBBlock stop disable signal(PMC axis control)G155#7ff15.1EEMSBKCBlock stop disable signal(PMC axis control)G167#7ff15.1EEMSBKDG179#7ffE...

  • Page 2217

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2191GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolEESTPAAxis control temporary stop signal (PMC axisG142#5ff15.1EESTPBAxis control temporary stop signal (PMC axiscontrol)G154#5ff15.1EESTPCAxis control temporary stop signal (PMC axisco...

  • Page 2218

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2192GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolGGR21Gear selection signal (input)G029#0ff9.10GGR31Gear selection signal (input)G029#2ff9.10GR41G031#4ffHHCAB2Hard copy stop request acceptance flagF061#2ff13.9HHCABTHard copy stop req...

  • Page 2219

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2193GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolIINDXAOrientation stop position change signal (serialG072#0ff9 2 9 15IINDXBOrientation stop position change signal (serialspindle)G076#0ff9 2 9 15IINDXCOrientation stop position change...

  • Page 2220

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2194GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolMMCFNAPower line switch completion signal (serial spindle)G071#3ff9.2, 9.15MMCFNBPower line switch completion signal (serial spindle)G075#3ff9.2, 9.15MMCFNCPower line switch completion...

  • Page 2221

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2195GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolMMMODCheck mode signalG067#2f–5.3.4MMNCHGInversion inhibition signalF091#1f–5.3.4MMORA1ASignal for completion of spindle orientation with aF046#6ff9 2 9 15MMORA1BSignal for complet...

  • Page 2222

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2196GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolMMSPCOne–rotation position manual set signalG066#5ff1.13MMSPCFOne–rotation position setting completed signalF065#5ff1.13MMTA to MTDFlexible synchronization control mode selectsigna...

  • Page 2223

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2197GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolPPC1DEASignal indicating the status of the detectedF047#0ff9 2 9 15PPC1DEBSignal indicating the status of the detectedone rotation position coder signal (serial spindle)F051#0ff9 2 9 1...

  • Page 2224

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2198GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolRRCFNAOutput switch completion signal (serial spindle)F046#3ff9.2, 9.15RRCFNBOutput switch completion signal (serial spindle)F050#3ff9.2, 9.15RRCFNCOutput switch completion signal (ser...

  • Page 2225

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2199GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolRRSLAOutput switch request signal (serial spindle)G071#6ff9.2, 9.15RRSLBOutput switch request signal (serial spindle)G075#6ff9.2, 9.15RRSLCOutput switch request signal (serial spindle)...

  • Page 2226

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2200GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolSSFRACW command signal (serial spindle)G070#5ff9.2, 9.15SSFRBCW command signal (serial spindle)G074#5ff9.2, 9.15SSFRCCW command signal (serial spindle)G204#5ff9.2, 9.15SSFRDG266#5ffSSG...

  • Page 2227

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2201GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolSSORSpindle orientation signalG029#5ff9.3SSOV0 to SOV7Spindle speed override signalG030ff9.3SSPALSpindle fluctuation detection alarm signalF035#0ff9.6SSPLFeed hold lamp signalF000#4ff5...

  • Page 2228

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2202GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolSSVF1 to SVF8Servo off signalG126ff1.2.8SSVWRN1 to 4Servo warning detail signalsF093#4 to #7ff18.3SSWS1Spindle selection signalsG027#0ff9.10SSWS2Spindle selection signalsG027#1ff9.10SS...

  • Page 2229

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2203GroupReference itemM seriesTseriesAddress Signal nameSymbolTTLMLATorque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle)G070#0ff9.2, 9.15TTLMLBTorque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle)G074#0ff9.2, 9.15TTLMLCTorque limit command LOW signal (ser...

  • Page 2230

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2204f:AvailableF:Available only with2–path control–:UnavailableAddress Signal nameSymbolTseriesMseriesReference ItemX004#0Measuring position reached signalXAEff14.2X004#1Measuring position reached signalYAE–f14.2X004#1Measuring position reac...

  • Page 2231

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2205AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG007#1Start lock signalSTLKf–2.5G007#2Cycle start signalSTff5.1G007#4Stroke check 3 release signalRLSOT3ff2.3.3G007#5Follow-up signal*FLWUff1.2.7G007#6Stored stroke limit select signalEXLM...

  • Page 2232

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2206AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG027#3Stop signal in each spindle*SSTP1ff9.10G027#4Stop signal in each spindle*SSTP2ff9.10G027#5*SSTP3ffG027#7Cs contour control switch signalCONff9.9G028#1,#2Gear selection signal (input)GR...

  • Page 2233

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2207AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG040#7Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signalWOSETf–14.4.2G041#0 to #3Manual handle interrupt axis selection signalHS1IA to HS1IDff3.3G041#4 to #7Manual handle interrupt axis ...

  • Page 2234

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2208AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG061#0Rigid tapping signalRGTAPff9.11G061#4,#5Rigid tap spindle select signalRGTSP1, RGTSP2f–9.11G062#1Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal*CRTOFff12.1.19G062#4Conversation mod...

  • Page 2235

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2209AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG071#5Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial spindle)INTGAff9.29.15G071#6Output switch request signal (serial spindle)RSLAff9.2G071#7Power line status check signal (serial spind...

  • Page 2236

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2210AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG076#0Orientation stop position change signal (serial spindle)INDXBff9 2G076#1Rotation direction command while changing theorientation stop position signal (serial spindle)ROTABff9.29.15G076...

  • Page 2237

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2211AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG098Key code signalEKC0 to EKC7ff15.5G100Feed axis and direction selection signal+J1 to +J8ff3.1G102Feed axis and direction selection signal-J1 to -J8ff3.1G104Axis direction dependent stored...

  • Page 2238

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2212AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG142#0Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control)EFINAff15.1G142#1Accumulated zero check signalELCKZAff15.1G142#2Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control)EMBUFAff15.1G142#3Bloc...

  • Page 2239

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2213AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG150#6Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control)RTEff15.1G150#7Dry run signal (PMC axis control)DRNEff15.1G151Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control)*FV0E to *FV7Eff15.1G1...

  • Page 2240

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2214AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG190#0 to #6Superimposed control axis selection signalsOVLS1 to OVLS7F–1.9G192Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signalIGVRY1 to IGVRY8ff2.9G197#0 to #3Flexible synchronization control mode s...

  • Page 2241

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2215AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG207#2Motor power stop signal (serial spindle)MPOFCff9.29.15G207#4Disconnection detection disbale signal (serial spindle)DSCNCff9.29.15G208#0 to G209#3Spindle orientation stop position exter...

  • Page 2242

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2216AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameG276 to G279G280 to G283G284 to G287Input signals for custom macro (Extended signals)UI100 to UI131UI200 to UI231UI300 to UI331ff11.6.1G292#7Rotation area interference check disable signalIT...

  • Page 2243

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2217AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF007#2Spindle-speed function strobe signalSFff8.1F007#3Tool function strobe signalTFff8.1F007#42nd auxiliary function strobe signalBFf–8.1F007#72nd auxiliary function strobe signalBF–fF0...

  • Page 2244

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2218AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF045#2Speed detection signal (serial spindle)SDTAff9.2F045#3Speed arrival signal (serial spindle)SARAff9.2F045#4Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle)LDT1Aff9.2F045#5Load detection signal ...

  • Page 2245

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2219AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF051#0Signal indicating the status of the detected one-rotationposition coder signal (serial spindle)PC1DTBff9.2F051#1Incremental method orientation signal (serial spindle)INCSTBff9.29.15F05...

  • Page 2246

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2220AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF065#4Retract completion signalRTRCTFff1.131.14.11.14.21.14.41.16F065#5One–rotation position setting completed signalMSPCFff1.13F065#6EGB mode signalSYNMOD–f1.131.14F065#7Sync–with–C...

  • Page 2247

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2221AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF082#2Retrace-in-progress signalRVSL–f11.15F090#0Servo axis abnormal load detected signalABTQSVff2 10F090#1First-spindle abnormal load detected signalABTSP1ff2.10F090#2Second-spindle abnor...

  • Page 2248

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2222AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF130#5Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)EOTPAff15.1F130#6Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)EOTNAff15.1F130#7Axis control command read completion sig...

  • Page 2249

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2223AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF140#0Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)EMFDff15.1F140#1Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)EABUFDff15.1F141,F151Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control)EM11D to E...

  • Page 2250

    B–63523EN–1/03A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC2224AddressReference ItemMseriesTseriesSymbol Signal nameF197#0 to #3Flexible synchronization control mode select signalswitching accepted signalsMFSYNA toMFSYND–f1.15F208EGB mode confirmation signalEGBM1 to EGBM8–f1.14.4F264#0 to #7,F265#0Spi...

  • Page 2251

    IndexB–63523EN–1/03i–1Symbolsαi Servo warning interface, 2008Numbers2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return,560AAbnormal load detection, 443About differences among pitch error compensation, straightnesscompenation, and gradient compensation (for referencepurposes),...

  • Page 2252

    INDEXB–63523EN–1/03i–2DHCP/DNS functions, 1950Direct operation by PMC or OPEN CNC, 1870Direction–sensitive high–speed position switch, 39Display data on the diagnosis screen, 1134Display of hardware and software configuration, 1532Display/set, 1520Display/set/edit, 1519Displaying alarm ...

  • Page 2253

    INDEXB–63523EN–1/03i–3Graphic display/dynamic graphic display/background graphic,1540HHandle–synchronous feed, 509, 525Helical interpolation, 696Helical interpolation B (M series), 747Help function, 1526High speed cycle cutting, 1339High–precision contour control by RISC (M series), 810...

  • Page 2254

    INDEXB–63523EN–1/03i–4NC program output, 1932No. of registered programs, 1636Normal direction control (M series), 736Notes on interface with the PMC, 1148Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time,1896Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time,1903Notes on ...

  • Page 2255

    INDEXB–63523EN–1/03i–5Setting the reference position without dogs, 546Settings, 1952Settings of CNC, 1973Settings related to servo–controlled axes, 90Settings related with coordinate systems, 118Signals for the rigid tapping function, 1142Signals related to gear switching, 1144Signals rel...

  • Page 2256

    INDEXB–63523EN–1/03i–6Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network, 1908Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network, 1915VVRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, 441WWaiting M code (two–path control), 995Warning Interface for the αi Spindle, 2010Waveform diagnosis display, 152...

  • Page 2257

    Revision RecordFANUCSeries16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is–MODELBCONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63523EN–1)03Sep., 2004DAddition of Series 20i–MODEL BDAddition of signalsDAddition of parametersDAddition of functions02Nov., 2001DAddition of Series 160is/180is/210is–MODEL BDAd...

  • Page 2258

x